Blog

How to Calculate the Volume of a Block – Sinaumed’s certainly knows that in mathematics we can study several branches of knowledge in it, such as algebra, geometry, arithmetic, and so on. No exception with various kinds of shapes and wakes of space.

However, we will not discuss the branch of mathematics as a whole, ok Sinaumed’s. In this article, we will discuss how to calculate the volume of one of the geometric shapes.

Before that, did Sinaumed’s know what was included in the various geometric shapes?

Space structures include cubes, blocks, prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones, and spheres. In general, these spatial shapes have formulas, characteristics, properties, and so on with their respective differences. Thus, this article will discuss one of the geometric shapes, namely the beam.

A beam is a type of three-dimensional geometric shape which is bounded by six sides, namely a rectangle. The beam also has six sides, eight vertices, and twelve ribs.

Meanwhile, the side planes on the beam are located in pairs and parallel to each other. The sides of the beam are length, width, height, with different lengths.

Sinaumed’s can also read one of the following book recommendations entitled “Build Flat and Build Space” by Dewi Djuwita which is only available at sinaumedia.com to find out more about some other information about geometric shapes. Just click below, Sinaumed’s!

We also encounter many blocks in everyday life, such as food boxes, erasers, fish bowls, drink boxes, bathtubs, shoe boxes, post boxes, books, cupboards, refrigerators, and so on.

Well, Sinaumed’s already knows what beams mean by reviewing previous articles, right? Next, we will find out how to calculate the volume of a cuboid. Listen to the end of the article below, Sinaumed’s!

Block Volume Formula

It is known that how to calculate the volume of a block is very simple and easy to remember. All you need to do is multiply the three sides of the block, namely length, width, and height.

Source: Kelasprogrammer.com (Google)

One of the most important things to note in calculating the volume of this block is to make sure the length on all sides is in the same unit. For example, the length of the beam is expressed in cm or m, then the width and height must also be expressed in cm or m so that correct and appropriate results are obtained.

Thus, the unit for the volume of a block is a unit of length squared or commonly known as a cubic. For example, cm3 (cubic centimeters), m3 (cubic meters), and so on.

In order for Sinaumed’s to better understand how to calculate the volume of a block, then consider the following examples of questions using the formula above.

Example Question 1 

It is known that the length, width and height of a block are 3 cm, 2 cm and 4 cm respectively.

Wanted: calculate the volume of the block?

Answer:

It is known that length = 3 cm, width = 2 cm, and height = 4 cm.

V = pxlxt

V = 3 x 2 x 4

V = 24 cm3

No need to worry, Sinaumed’s, you can learn more about how to calculate the volume of a block or other shapes through the following textbook recommendations because how to calculate the volume of a block can be learned in grade 5 elementary school. You can find out more if you have read and practice it every day at home so it’s easy to find questions like this in lessons at school. Just click below!

Example Problem 2 

A block is 10 m long, 2 m wide and 200 cm high.

Wanted: Calculate the volume of the block?

Answer:

The way to solve the second example problem is basically the same as the previous problem, but the height of the block does not use the same units. Therefore, you must equate these units first so that they have the same units.

Length = 10 m

Width = 2 m

Height = 200 cm to 2 m

Then, enter in the formula v = pxlxt

V = 10 x 2 x 2

V = 40 m3

Example Problem 3 

A cuboid has a length of 300 cm, a width of 10 cm and a height of 20 cm.

Asked: calculate how much is the volume of the block?

Answer:

V = pxlxt

V = 300 x 10 x 20

V = 60,000 cm3

Example Problem 4 

It is known that Budi has a pool in the form of a block with a length of 80 cm, a width of 60 cm and a height of 40 cm. In the pool, of course, will be filled with water.

Asked: how much water is needed to fill ⅔ of Budi’s pond?

Answer:

It is known that the pond length (l) = 80 cm, width (l) = 60 cm, and height (t) = 40 cm.

Wanted: the volume of the block in the pool ⅔

V = ⅔ xpxlxt

V = ⅔ ( 80 cm x 60 cm x 40 cm)

V = ⅔ (192,000 cm3)

V = 128,000 cm3

So, the amount of water needed to fill ⅔ of Budi’s pond is 128,000 cm3.

Example Problem 5 

Jojo wants to make a catfish pond in the form of a beam with a width of 40 cm, a length 3/2 times the width and a height of 4 catfish ponds more than that width.

Asked: How much volume in the catfish pond will Jojo need?

Answer:

Is known:

The width of the catfish pond (l) = 40 cm

The length of the catfish pond (l) = 3/2 x (l) = 3/2 x 40 = 60 cm

The height of the catfish pond (t) = (l) + 4 = 40 + 4 = 44 cm

Formula: v = pxlxt

V = 60cm x 40cm x 44cm

V = 105,600 cm3

So, the volume of the catfish pond that Jojo needs is 105,600 cm3.

Sinaumed’s can also read one of the following books entitled “Basic Mathematics” by Afidah Khairunnisa which contains information on the role of science and technology development as well as references and references for students or mathematicians in studying one of the geometric shapes or other mathematics. Get the book by clicking below, Sinaumed’s!

So, that’s the discussion in this one article about how to calculate the volume of a block along with several examples of problems related to the volume of a block. We hope that after reading this article, you can add insight and knowledge about how to calculate the volume of an unknown block.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

 

If you are interested in finding some other information about how to calculate geometric shapes other than blocks, you can look for references to related books which are only available on the sinaumedia.com website , which are ready to become #Friends Without Limits in accompanying you in developing and moving forward every day. Happy learning and hopefully useful!

Author: Elsya Islamay

Production Costs – Definition, Examples, How to Calculate, and Elements – The production process is the main operational activity of an industry or manufacturing company. The company will take into account the existence of production costs when processing begins from raw materials into ready-to-use or semi-finished goods.

The calculation of production costs is quite complex because there are many types of expenditure components in manufacturing companies. For this reason, further understanding related to it is quite important. The following is a review regarding production costs , starting from the definition, examples, how to calculate, and the elements.

1. Definition of Production Costs

Production costs are costs incurred by the company during the manufacturing or management process with the aim of producing products that are ready for market. The calculation of production costs will be carried out starting from the beginning of processing, until finished or semi-finished goods.

The accumulated expenses required by the company to be able to process raw materials into finished products are referred to as production costs. The scope of production costs contains 3 elements, namely raw materials, direct labor, and factory overhead.
Production costs will be borne by the company until the processing produces goods that are ready to be sold on the market. Later, these costs will be calculated per unit of product, making it easier to calculate and retrieve profit figures.

These costs will later lead to the formation of the cost of finished goods at the end of the accounting period. The total economic sacrifice used in the processing of raw materials to become finished goods and ready to be marketed is called production costs.

Company expenses in the form of production costs are also interpreted as expenditures that are definitely needed to produce finished goods. The nature of these costs is widely considered to be incurred as long as the production of goods is still ongoing.

The characteristics of production costs are different when compared to operating expenses. Operational costs are usually incurred by companies to support the company’s managerial system, while production costs are for managing ready-to-sell goods.

As one example is when you build a building that requires precise calculations in order to do it precisely and quickly. A book entitled The Smart Book for Calculating Building Costs by Rio Manullang can help Sinaumed’s understand this.

2. Types of Production Costs

Classification of production costs is very important for companies to know what types of expenses are needed during the processing of goods. A company needs to classify production costs in order to facilitate the calculation of cost of goods later.

The classification of production costs has an influence on the calculation of the company’s financial statements. Companies must be able to understand correctly what types of production costs are, so they can calculate them appropriately.
In general, there are 5 types of production costs that are known to accumulate expenses when managing goods. Check out the reviews regarding the types of production costs that exist in manufacturing companies in the following details.

2.1 Fixed Costs

Variable costs are expenditures whose amount will not change, even though the volume of production of goods has increased or decreased. This type of cost has a certain nature, so it can be budgeted appropriately.

Fixed cost elements have the same nominal amount that must be paid in each production process. Fixed costs will not experience swelling even though the production process is busy, so it can increase output.

The company can plan a budget for these fixed costs because they are certain, so there is no need to worry about additions or reductions. These fixed production costs will usually be incurred as long as the production process is still running.

One example of fixed costs that must be paid by the company in the same amount, even though the volume of production changes is the cost of factory rent. The company is required to pay these fees regularly according to the agreed price.
Another form of fixed costs is the company’s expenses to pay employees’ monthly salaries. Another company expense that is also fixed is salary costs for factory security guards who use a monthly payment system.

2.2 Variable Cost

The next type of company production expenditure is variable costs, the amount of which depends on output. If the production of goods is higher, the variable costs will also increase.

Variable costs will only be required during the production process, so that they become the basis for spending per unit to be reported. The type of variable cost that is required in the production process is the purchase of raw materials.

Expenditure to purchase raw materials will usually be influenced by output targets during the production process. This variable cost will always change as long as the production process changes.

When the production process stops, it means that the variable costs incurred by manufacturing companies are zero. Variable cost is an important component of production costs to determine the price of goods when marketing takes place, in a matter of per unit.

2.3 Average Cost

Average cost is the cost per unit that will be obtained by dividing the total expenditure by the amount of production output. This average cost is needed by the company to determine future production decisions.

The cost of production per unit will be known by calculating this average cost. Furthermore, the company can determine the percentage of profit to be achieved from the average cost. Average cost will be compared with fixed costs when making production decisions.

From the results of the comparison, information will be obtained about which costs are higher between fixed and variable costs. This can be used as a benchmark for the company to determine the ideal profit.

2.4 Marginal Cost

Marginal costs can also be referred to as additional expenses that will be used by companies to increase production. Companies can find out the maximum amount of output that can be obtained during the production process by adding marginal costs.

Marginal cost calculation is done by adding the variable cost during the production process. Companies can also associate fixed costs with marginal costs when producing additional output.

The function of marginal costs is to help companies maximize overall operational activities. This will enable the company to achieve the maximum profit value of the product more efficiently.

Marginal costs can only be calculated after the fixed and variable costs are known by the company. Marginal cost calculation is done by dividing the increase in cost and the change in production target quantity.

2.5 Total Cost

The last type of production expenditure is the total cost obtained from the combination of variable and fixed costs. This total cost will be information regarding the total amount of expenses incurred during the production process.

This total cost can only be calculated when the company already has output in the form of finished goods ready for sale. Calculation of this total cost must be done every production period is completed so that it can be reported immediately.

This total cost is comprehensive because it includes all company expenses during the production process. The cost of raw materials, administration and marketing must be taken into account in this total cost.

In controlling the costs incurred by a company, there are concepts and cost accounting methods that can be used. Cost Accounting Book 2nd Edition by Firdaus A. Dunia and Wasilah Abdullah can help Sinaumed’s understand cost accounting.

3. Example of Production Cost

Production costs are taken into account during the product processing process in a business in a manufacturing company. One example that will be discussed this time is a manufacturing company engaged in the food sector where the output is noodles.

In this case the Healthy Food Company produces ready-to-cook yellow noodles with an output of 4,000 packs of finished goods for one month. The following is a breakdown of the yellow noodle production costs for one month.

Cost of purchasing raw materials = Rp. 11,000,000
Direct Labor Cost = Rp. 3,500,000
Factory Security Guard Wages = Rp. 2,000,000 (only during the production process)
Factory Rental Cost = Rp. 1,500,000

The total production cost incurred to produce 4,000 packs of yellow noodles is IDR 18,000,000. From the total expenditure, the production cost per unit can be determined by dividing the total cost by the total number of products. The calculation is Rp. 18,000,000 : 4,000 = Rp. 4,500.

Furthermore, the company can determine the selling price by calculating the cost of production per unit plus the percentage of profit.

In this yellow noodle product, the profit percentage used is 40% of production costs. So, the calculation of the selling price per unit is Rp.4500 + (40% x Rp.4500) = Rp. 6,300

The company will be able to determine the selling price more precisely by knowing the total cost of production. In addition, this cost information is also useful for companies to minimize potential risks during the production process.

4. How to Calculate Production Costs

Calculation of production costs will later be used as a reference to determine the value of the cost of production. There are several steps that need to be taken in calculating this production cost.

As an illustration of the production calculation, below is presented the expenditure data of PT Antara for one month. PT Antara is a company engaged in the production of hijab with a total output of 5,000 units for one month.
Hijab products from PT. Antara is marketed through 3 large stores and e-commerce. The following is PT Antara’s expenditure report data for one month.

• Raw material inventory IDR 30,000,000
• Semi-finished raw materials Rp. 40,000,000
• Finished goods ready for sale Rp. 80,000,000
• Purchase of raw material inventory Rp. 50,000,000
• Shipping costs IDR 5,000,000
• Machine maintenance costs IDR 5,000,000
• Direct labor salary Rp. 30,000,000
• Remaining use of raw materials and remaining semi-finished materials Rp.30,000,000
• The remaining semi-finished materials Rp. 5,000,000
• Hijab ready for sale Rp. 30,000,000

Once the expenditure data is known, then production costs can be calculated. The following are the steps taken to calculate the production costs.

Stage 1:

Raw materials used = initial balance of raw materials + purchases of raw materials – ending balance of materials
= Rp. 30,000,000 + (Rp. 50,000,000 + Rp. 5,000,000) – Rp. 30,000,000
= Rp. 55,000,000

Stage 2:

Production Costs = raw materials + direct labor + factory overhead costs
= IDR 55,000,000 + IDR 30,000,000 + 5,000,000
= IDR 90,000,000

Production costs per unit = production costs: total units
= Rp. 90,000,000 : 5,000
= 18,000

Stage 3:

Cost of Production = total production costs + beginning inventory balance – ending balance

= IDR 90,000,000 + IDR. 40,000,000 – Rp. 5,000,000
= Rp. 125,000,000

Stage 4

Cost of Goods Sold = Cost of production + initial inventory – ending inventory
= Rp. 90,000,000 + Rp. 80,000,000 – Rp. 50,000,000
= Rp. 140,000,000

Related Books :

1. Utilization of Excel 2010 to Prepare Production Budget

2. Production Management Book

5. Elements of Production Costs

Production costs in manufacturing companies are divided into 3 types which include the process of obtaining raw materials to become goods ready for sale. The following are elements that need to be included in the production costs of manufacturing companies.

5.1 Cost of Raw Materials

The first element that must be included in production costs is the cost of raw materials. This cost is used to obtain the main materials that will be used to process the product. Acquisition of raw material costs is obtained from the purchase and processing of the main material.

There are several things related to the company’s raw material costs. The first component in the raw material cost is the cost incurred for purchasing. Companies can buy this raw material either by debit, credit or import from outside suppliers.

The cost component that must be spent on raw materials is the expenditure for warehousing purposes. Raw materials that have been purchased by the company need to be distributed to the warehouse to plan which material will be processed first.

Raw material costs also take into account other acquisition expenses, including during the delivery process. This production expenditure arises because of the calculation of the cost of raw materials purchased by the company.

Cost elements that are definitely taken into account in the acquisition of raw materials include the purchase price, shipping costs, and warehousing costs until they are ready for processing. While the cost of receiving disassembly, and ordering is often not included, because it is difficult to calculate.

Recording of raw material purchases will usually be adjusted to the nominal on the invoice. The transaction document will contain information regarding the cost of purchase, freight charges, and VAT.

5.2 Direct Labor Costs

Direct labor costs are the budget required by the company to pay the salaries of production employees. Direct labor is a company employee who is directly related to the production process.

The salaries of these production employees will be calculated starting from the processing of raw materials to finished products. One example of employee salaries that can be included in direct labor costs is the wages of machine operators.

Components of direct labor costs in professional manufacturing companies do not only include the base salary of employees. Other costs such as employee benefits and insurance are also included in the direct labor cost calculation.

This direct labor cost budget can be done by planning employee needs in advance. Furthermore, the company can determine the basic wage that will be received by direct workers in accordance with the division of their duties.

Companies also need to supervise the performance of direct workers so that salaries can be distributed properly according to the quality of work. This direct labor cost will be calculated in the production cost per unit.

5.3 Factory Overhead Costs

Other expenses related to the production process excluding raw materials and direct labor are called factory overhead costs. These overhead costs often arise due to additional material costs, production control processes, and taxes.

Factory overhead costs will later be calculated in the income statement after the accounting period is over. This cost element has an important role to maximize the production process.

Production-related labor wage payments that cannot be charged to product output will be included in factory overhead costs. There are also machine maintenance and factory rental costs which will also add to overhead costs.

Factory overhead can also be included in variable costs which can change accordingly. production volumes. Examples of factory overhead costs that follow production volume are purchasing factory equipment and paying for factory electricity.

How do you calculate PPh and PBB taxes? – Sinaumed’s, every Indonesian citizen is required to pay taxes, be it vehicle tax, residence tax, income tax, and others. However, do you know the meaning of the tax itself?

A. Definition of Tax

Tax in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) means a mandatory levy, usually in the form of money that must be paid by residents as a mandatory contribution to the state or government in relation to income, ownership, purchase price of goods, and so on.

In simple terms, paying taxes can be interpreted as an obligation that must be carried out by citizens in an effort to finance the state and national development. All tax payment procedures must comply with existing laws and regulations.

Usually the type of tax that is often known by many people is the motor vehicle tax. Have you ever heard of income tax and land and building tax? The two taxes need to be known by many people, both understanding and how to calculate them. By knowing the two types of taxes, we will try to pay the taxes on time.

If you want to know about income tax and land and building tax, let’s take a look at these two taxes, starting from their definition to the formula and how to calculate them.

B. Definition of PPh and PBB

1. Income Tax (PPh)

Income Tax (Pajak Penghasilan or PPh) is a tax imposed on individuals or entities on income earned during a tax year. In this case, income is an economic capability that can be used to meet daily needs or increase wealth for both domestic and foreign sources. In simple terms, income can be interpreted as profit from a business, honorarium, salary, gifts, and so on.

2. Land and Building Tax (PBB)

If we own a plot of land or have a residence, the land and residence will be taxed. The tax imposed on land ownership or residence is called Land and Building Tax or commonly abbreviated as PBB.

At first this tax was a central tax, but since the emergence of Law No. 28 of 2009 concerning Regional Taxes and Regional Retribution (PDRD), rural and urban PBB have become regional taxes. However, for PBB on plantations, forestry, mining, they are still part of the central tax.

C. Subject to Income Tax and Land and Building Tax

“Tax subject” is a term in the tax law that is indicated for an individual (personal) or organization (group) based on the applicable tax law. The thing that needs to be underlined in “tax subject” is that a person or entity is a “tax subject” but not all of these people and entities are subject to tax.

In other words, “tax subject” will only be imposed on individuals who have met the taxpayer requirements. While the entities that are subject to taxpayers are Limited Liability Companies (PT), Limited Liability Companies, State-Owned Enterprises or regions with any name and in any form, partnerships, companies or other associations, firms, joint ventures, cooperative associations, and permanent establishments.

Basically, tax payments must be made if there is income earned in Indonesia. Thus, if a person or entity no longer earns income or income in Indonesia, then there is no need to pay taxes.

The conditions that are not subject to the taxpayer are as follows.

• When you die;
• When choosing to leave Indonesia forever;
• When the legal entity is liquidated, the legal entity is no longer subject to taxpayers.

1. Subject of Income Tax (PPh)

Based on the Income Tax Law it is not clearly explained what is meant as an income tax subject, but in general income tax subjects are divided into three groups, namely:

• Individuals and inheritance that have not been divided into a unit to replace those who are entitled;
• Entities consisting of Limited Liability Companies (PT), Limited Liability Companies, State or Regional Owned Enterprises in whatever name and form, associations, corporations or other associations, firms, partners, cooperative associations, and other business entities;
• A permanent establishment (BUT) is a business carried out by a person who does not reside in Indonesia or is in Indonesia for no more than 183 days within a 12 month period or an entity that is not established and is not domiciled in Indonesia. The bodies referred to include management positions, company branches, representative offices, workshops, office buildings, and workshops.

Domestic tax subjects will be taxed on income obtained from Indonesia, meanwhile, foreign tax subjects will be taxed based on income sourced from Indonesia.

Domestic tax subjects will be taxed based on net income or net income at general rates, while foreign tax subjects will be taxed based on gross income or gross income at comparable tax rates.

Domestic tax subjects are required to notify the Annual Tax Return (SPT Tahunan) as a medium for calculating the tax payable, while foreign tax subjects are not required to notify the Annual Tax Return because their tax obligations have been fulfilled through final withholding taxes.

2. Subject to Land and Building Tax (PBB)

A person or entity that is required to pay Land and Building Tax (PBB) in accordance with the provisions of the PBB Act can be referred to as a PBB subject. PBB tax is imposed on subjects who already own buildings or get benefits from the land (land). Based on the Agrarian Law, the rights to land and buildings in PBB are property rights, building use rights, usufructuary rights, usufructuary rights, and management rights.

However, in several cases where the building or land is used it is not clear who owns it and the PBB has not been paid, the Director General of Taxes has the authority to determine and stipulate who is the tax subject who will be responsible in order to be able to pay off the tax debt.

What is done when the Director General of Taxes determines the tax subject is to carry out research into the field, which is followed by determining the tax subject for buildings or land whose owners are unknown.

The selection of PBB subjects to pay taxes or pay off tax debts even though they do not have rights over the building or land used, has been stated in Law Number 12 of 1994.

However, if the subject that has been stipulated by the Director General of Taxes has objections, then the tax subject can file an objection by writing a statement stating that the PBB subject is not a person or entity that has to pay the PBB in question.

The thing that needs to be underlined when making PBB payments is that the status of ownership rights to land and buildings has nothing to do with the PBB payment process. This is because the appointment of a person or entity by the Director General of Taxes is not proof of ownership of land and building rights.

D. Objects of Income Tax and Land and Building Tax

1. Objects of Income Tax (PPh)

Income or income derived from work is a tax object. Income or income has a very broad meaning so that Law Number 36 of 2008 was made in which the object of income tax is contained in articles 21, 22, 23 and 26.

However, there are several types of income that are not part of the income tax object. The following are types of income that are not part of the income tax object.

• Inheritance
• Other income as contained in the income tax law.
• Aid or donations such as zakat and religious donations.
• Grant funds as long as they are not related to ownership, work effort, or control between related parties.
• Reimbursement or compensation related to work or services in the form of enjoyment from the Taxpayer or the Government, if given by a non-Taxpayer or certain Taxpayer will become Income).

2. Objects of Land and Building Tax (PBB)

The objects of Land and Building Tax are immovable objects. In simple terms, the surface of the earth which includes land, deep waters, and seas. Meanwhile, a building is a construction built on land/water with implanted or patented techniques. As for those included in the category of buildings as follows:

• Toll road;
• Swimming pool;
• Environmental roads that become an integral part of the building complex;
• fancy fence;
• Sports venues;
• Dock;
• luxurious garden;
• Oil, water and gas refineries;
• Other facilities that provide benefits.

As for those that are not included in PBB objects as follows:

• Land or buildings designated for public purposes, such as worship, health, education, culture, social, and others.
• Land or buildings used for public burials of ancient relics, museums, and so on.
• Land or buildings used by diplomatic missions or consulates. This is done so that the RI representative buildings abroad are also not subject to PBB fees.
• Land that is part of a protected forest, nature reserve, national park, and so on.
• Land and buildings used by representatives of international organizations determined by the Minister of Finance.

E. Formulas and Methods for Calculating PPh

In calculating income tax, it is necessary to carry out several stages. In order to make it easier to understand each stage, a case example will be given.

1. Calculate net income

All income earned during one year of work is gross income. Therefore, to calculate income tax, one year’s net income is required.

Net income can be calculated by subtracting gross (gross) income from dependents such as credit, insurance, debt, and others. Example: 80,000,000 (gross) – 5,000,000 (dependents) = 75,000,000, then net income for one year is 75,000,000.

2. Calculating Non-Taxable Income (PTKP)

If you have received net income for one year, the next step is to calculate Non-Taxable Income (PTKP). The purpose of calculating PTKP is to find Taxable Income (PKP).

PTKP already has a rate set by the Directorate General of Taxes. PTKP rates that need to be known are as follows:

IDR 54,000,000 for individual taxpayers.
Additional IDR 4,500,000 for married taxpayers.
Rp. 54,000,000 for the wife whose income is combined with the husband’s income.
Additional IDR 4,500,000 for each blood family member in a straight line and adopted children who are fully dependent, a maximum of 3 people for each family.

3. Calculating Taxable Income (PKP)

After getting the results of the PTKP calculation, the next step is to calculate the Taxable Income (PKP). To find out the amount of PKP, a reduction is made between net income and PTKP.

Example: 75,000,000 – 54,000,000 (not married) = 19,000,000, then the PKP obtained is 19,000,000.

4. Calculating Income Tax (PPh)

If you have received a PKP, the next step is to calculate income tax. To calculate income tax, it is necessary to know the amount (percent) that has been determined by the Directorate General of Taxes. The following is the calculation of the amount of income tax that must be paid for one year.

Taxable income up to IDR 50,000,000.00 (fifty million rupiah) is subject to a 5% (five percent) rate

Taxable income of more than IDR 50,000,000.00 (fifty million rupiah) to IDR 250,000,000.00 (two hundred fifty million rupiah) is subject to a 15% (fifteen percent) rate

Taxable income of more than IDR 250,000,000.00 (two hundred fifty million rupiah) up to IDR 500,000,000.00 (five hundred million rupiah) is subject to a rate of 25% (twenty five percent)

Taxable income of more than IDR 500,000,000.00 (five hundred million rupiah) is subject to a 30% (thirty percent) rate.

Example: 19,000,000 x 5% (under 50,000,000) = 950,000, then the income tax that must be paid for one year is 950,000.

5. Case examples of calculating Income Tax

Bagus is a father who already has one wife and one child. He earns 96,000,000 per month and has a dependent of 4,000,000 per month. Here’s how to find income taxes.

a) Net income = (gross income – dependents)

= 96,000,000 – 4,000,000
= 92,000,000

b) PTKP (1 wife and 1 child)
54,000,000 + 4,500,000 + 4,500,000
= 63,000,000

c) PKP (net income – PTKP)
92,000,000 – 63,000,000
= 29,000,000

d) PPh (PKP x PPh Percentage)
29,000,000 x 5%
= 1,450,000

Then the income tax that Bagus has to pay is 1,450,000.

F. Formulas and how to calculate PBB

Basically calculating Land and Building Tax (PBB) is tricky. As for how to calculate the PBB, it requires the Selling Value of Tax Objects (NJOP). NJOP can be said as a reference or reference to find out the market price or average price when you want to sell or buy land or buildings.

Actually there are many aspects that affect the NJOP of the earth, such as geographical location, environmental conditions, benefits, and so on. while the NJOP on buildings is determined or influenced by the materials used in the building, location, environmental conditions, and others.

Things that need to be considered when calculating the amount of land and building tax that must be paid are the Value of Taxable Objects (NJOP), Selling Value of Non-Taxable Objects (NJOTKP), and Selling Value of Taxable Objects (NJKP).

To calculate PBB, NJKP is needed. NJKP can be obtained from 20% multiplied by NJOP. After getting the NJKP, the next step is to use the formula commonly used to calculate PBB, which is NJKP multiplied by 0.5%.

G. Case Example of Calculating Land and Building Tax

Pak Bagyo wants to pay the land and building tax and he has a building of 100 square meters and a land area of ​​150 square meters. The price of land in Pak Bagyo’s area is around 4,000,000 per meter, while the price of the building is around 5,000,000. Here’s how to calculate PBB.

a) Land
150 x 4,000,000 = 600,000,000

b) Building
100 x 5,000,000 = 500,000,000

After getting the total value of land and buildings, then look for the NJOP

c) NJOP
600,000,000 + 500,000,000 = 1,100,000,000

d) NJKP
20% x 1,100,000,000 = 220,000,000

e) PBB
0.5% x 220,000,000 = 1,100,000
Then the PBB that must be paid by Mr. Bagyo is 1,100,000

H. Conclusion

Taxes are state revenues that are used to build the country and finance the country. Therefore, as a good citizen it is appropriate to pay taxes on time.

Income Tax and Land and Building Tax are two types of taxes in Indonesia. The two taxes have a different way of calculating either the formula or the percentage of tax that must be paid. Not only is the way of calculating them different, the two taxes also have differences in terms of “tax subject” and “tax object.”

To find out more about Income Tax and Land and Building Tax, you can read these two book recommendations. By reading these two books we will not be confused about calculating Income Tax and Land and Building Tax as well as increasing the desire to pay taxes on time.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

1. Principles of Tax Law

2. Class XII SMK/MAK Tax Administration

3. Taxes & Funding of Indonesian Civilization

Author : Restu Nasik Kamaluddin

Multiplication of Fractions – The teacher’s main goal in learning mathematics is to help students understand mathematics and encourage them to use mathematics to solve problems in everyday life, and enjoy learning mathematics. Learning mathematics is the process of providing learning experiences to students through a series of planned activities, so that students gain competency in the mathematics material being studied.

Learning multiplication of ordinary fractions is a subject that is tricky, because teachers usually teach it directly without the help of the media, and are introduced without knowing the basic concepts. If students do not know the basic concepts, children will forget the material they are learning more quickly.

Learning is the most important activity in the entire educational process in schools. This means that the success of achieving educational goals depends a lot on the learning process taking place effectively. A teacher’s understanding of the meaning of learning will greatly influence the way the teacher teaches.

Gagne and Riggs say that learning is a system that aims to help the student learning process, which contains a series of events that are designed, arranged in such a way as to influence and support the internal student learning process. So, the core of learning is all the efforts made by the teacher so that the learning process occurs in students.

Based on this opinion, it can be concluded that learning is a process of interaction of students with educators and learning resources that is done intentionally, so that it allows students to learn to do or demonstrate certain behaviors as well.

Mathematics is a study material that has an abstract object and is built through a process of deductive reasoning, namely previous truths, so that the linkages between concepts in mathematics are very strong and clear. Mathematics functions to develop reasoning abilities through investigative, exploratory and experimental activities as a means of solving problems through patterns of thinking and mathematical models, as well as a means of communication as symbols, tables, graphs, diagrams, in explaining ideas.

According to Karso, learning mathematics in elementary school (SD) has the following characteristics.

1. Learning Mathematics Using the Spiral Method

The spiral approach in learning mathematics is an approach to learning a concept or a mathematical topic that always relates or relates to the previous topic. The previous topic can be a prerequisite for understanding and studying a mathematical topic.

The new topics studied are the deepening and expansion of the previous topics. Giving concepts begins with concrete objects, then the concept is taught again in a more abstract form of understanding using notation that is more commonly used in mathematics.

2. Gradual Mathematics Learning

Mathematics subject matter is taught in stages, starting from simple concepts to more difficult concepts. In addition, learning mathematics starts from concrete to semi-concrete and finally to abstract concepts. To make it easier for students to understand mathematical objects, concrete objects are used at the concrete stage, then images at the semi-concrete stage and finally symbols at the abstract stage.

According to Karso, the purpose of learning mathematics is to train and develop ways of thinking systematically, logically, critically, creatively and consistently. In addition, this learning is also expected to develop a persistent and confident attitude in solving problems.

The learning theory that underlies the inquiry method, according to Sanjaya (2011: 196) is constructivism learning theory. Constructivism is a theory that explains that humans build or construct their own knowledge through their interactions with objects, phenomena, experiences, and their environment.

Knowledge cannot be simply transferred from one person to another, but knowledge is built by the learner (Suparno, 1997: 28-29 ) . So, the knowledge acquired by students does not come from teachers who impart their knowledge to students, but students themselves who build their understanding through interaction with their environment.

Fractions in Mathematics

sinaumedia friends, have you ever heard the word “fraction”? By the way, do you understand the difference between fractions and integers? Well, this article will discuss further about fractions, especially the multiplication of fractions.

Before we give the multiplication formula for fractions, you must first remember about fractions. In simple terms, fractions are numbers that are not integers and are in the form a/b, both a and b are integers and the value of b is not equal to 0 (zero). Fractions consist of two components, namely the numerator ( a ) and the denominator ( b ).

There are three types of fractions. The first type of fraction is a pure fraction, which is a fraction where the numerator is smaller than the denominator. The second type of fraction is an impure fraction, which is a fraction where the numerator is greater than the denominator. The average impure fraction is simplified to another fraction in arithmetic calculations. The last type of fraction is a mixed fraction, which is a combination of whole numbers and pure fractions.

Here’s a full explanation.

1. Definition of Fractions

2. Types of Fractions

Fractions can be divided into three, namely:

a. Decimal Numbers or Decimal Fractions

If you want to convert the fraction to a decimal, you must divide the quantifier and denominator to 1 : 2 = 0.5. The following table will provide some examples of how to read a decimal number.

Number	How to read
0.5	zero point five
0.75	zero point seventy five
0.025	zero point zero twenty five

b. Ordinary Fractional Numbers

Number	How to read
	half or one by two
	one third or one third
	quarter or one fourth
	one-fifth or one-fifth
	one-sixth or one-sixth
	one-seventh or one-seventh
	one-eighth or one-eighth
	ninth or one-ninth
	two-thirds
	three-quarter

c. Mixed Fractions

The following table will provide examples of how to read mixed fractions.

Number	How to read
	one and a half
	two two thirds
	three three by four

3. Counting Operations in Fractions

Operations arithmetic in fractions, namely addition and subtraction, multiplication, and division.

a. sum

The properties of addition in fractions, namely:

1.  

Examples of its application, namely:

2.   (The direct result is simplified by converting it to a mixed number).

b. Subtraction

The properties of reduction in fractions, namely:

Examples of its application, namely:

c. Multiplication

The properties of multiplication in fractions, namely:

1.  
2.  

Examples of its application, namely:

d. Distribution

The properties of division in fractions, namely:

Fraction Multiplication Formula

If you already understand the explanation of fractions above, now we will continue by explaining the three multiplication formulas for fractions.

1. The Ordinary Fractions Multiplication Formula

This formula is the most basic fraction multiplication formula, which is to calculate the multiplication between ordinary fractions. The formula is as follows:

Take a look at the formula above! You only need to multiply the quantifiers and the denominators in the basic fraction multiplication formula. An example of the question is as follows.

3/4 x 1/2

The steps that you have to take are to multiply the numbers 3 and 1 as co-quantifiers, and multiply the numbers 4 and 2 as common denominators. The solution is as follows.

3/4 x 1/2 = 3/8

Isn’t it very easy, sinaumedia friends? Well, now we will proceed to the second formula.

2. The Formula for Multiplication of Ordinary Fractions with Whole Numbers

So, now we will discuss the multiplication formula for fractions at the next level, namely the multiplication between fractions and whole numbers. Integers are numbers whose values ​​are whole and not in the form of fractions, namely numbers that have been commonly encountered, for example 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and so on.

You only need to multiply the quantifier in the multiplication between whole numbers and fractions. The formula is as follows.

By the way, do sinaumedia friends know the factors that cause us to only multiply the quantifier and the reason for the constant value of the denominator?

The answer is, if an integer is converted to a fraction, the denominator will be 1, for example you will change the number 2 to a fraction, the fraction will be 2/1.

Well, now you have to recall basic arithmetic logic. Any number multiplied by 1 remains the same. Therefore, we don’t need to convert integers to fractions and just multiply the quantifiers in this formula.

Are sinaumedia Friends still confused? In the following, we will provide an example question below so that you can understand it better.

5/4 x 3

If we convert the integer 3 into a fraction, the fractional form will be 3/1. Now, let’s arrange these numbers in the multiplication formula we learned earlier.

5/4 x 3/1 = 15/4

According to the basic fraction multiplication formula, you have to multiply the other numbers in the quantifier and denominator. Therefore, you have to multiply the numbers 5 and 3 to get the number 15. Meanwhile, if we multiply 4 and 1, the result is 4. As you explained before, any number multiplied by 1 will have the same value. .

So, to make calculations easier, if you meet multiplication between fractions and whole numbers, what’s being multiplied is only the numerator.

3. Mixed Fraction Multiplication Formula

The last fraction multiplication formula is used to multiply mixed fractions among other numbers. Remember, mixed fractions are fractions that consist of whole numbers and impure fractions. Multiplication of mixed fractions is actually easy and has the same concept as multiplication of basic fractions. However, a mixed number must be simplified and converted to an improper fraction first.

In the following, we will provide an example question below so that you can understand it better.

1 ½ x 2 ¼

The first step you have to do is change each mixed fraction into an improper fraction. The formula for converting a mixed fraction to an improper fraction is as follows.

To convert a mixed number into an improper fraction, all you have to do is multiply the whole number by the denominator, then add up the result. If applied to the problem, it can be explained as follows.

1 ½ x 2 ¼
= 3/2 x 9/4

Now, if you’ve converted it into an ordinary fraction, all you have to do is multiply the two fractions according to the basic fraction multiplication formula, namely multiplying the same quantifier and denominator. The solution is as follows.

3/2 x 9/4
= 27/8

So the combined product of 1 ½ and 2 ¼ is 27/8. Remember, you still have to simplify the results above because they are still impure fractions!

Examples of Multiplication Fractions Questions and Answers

1. First Exercise

The following section will explain the discussion and answers to the multiplication of two mixed fractions in a book entitled Mathematics Class 5 SD/MI which is the work of Purnomosidi, Wiyanto, Safiroh, and Ida Gannny.

1. 2 2/3 x 5 =
= 8/3 x 5
= (8 x 5)/3
= 40/3
= 13 1/3

2. 1 4/5 x 2 =
= 9/5 x 2
= (9 x 2)/5
= 18/5
= 3 3/5

3. 2 5/8 x 6
= 21/8 x 6
= (21 x 6)/8
= 126/8
= 15 6/8
= 15 3/4

4. 1 5/7 x 4 =
= 12/7 x 4
= (12 x 4)/7
= 48/7
= 6 6/7

5. 1 7/9 x 2 =
= 16/9 x 2
= (16 x 2)/9
= 32/9
= 3 5/9

6. 5 x 1 3/7 =
= 5 x 10/7
= 50/7
= 7 1/7

7. 6 x 1 9/10 =
= 6 x 19/10
= 114/10
= 11 4/10

8. 12 x 1 4/9 =
= 12 x 13/9
= 156/9
= 17 3/9
= 17 1/3

9. 100 x 1 2/3 =
= 100 x 5/3
= 500/3
= 166 2/3

10. 2 2/3 x 1/6 =
= 8/3 x 1/6
= (8 x 1)/(3 x 6)
= 8/18
= 4/9

11. 2 4/5 x 1/8 =
= 14/5 x 1/8
= (14 x 1)/(5 x 8)
= 14/40
= 7/20

12. 1 2/7 x 2/5 =
= 9/7 x 2/5
= (9 x 2)/(7 x 5)
= 18/35

13. 1 2/7 x 2/3 =
= 9/7 x 2/3
= (9 x 2)/(7 x 3)
= 18/21 = 6/7

14. 1 7/8 x 2/5 =
= 15/8 x 2/5
= (15 x 2)/(8 x 5)
= 30/40
= 3/4

15. 2/3 x 1 5/9 =
= 2/3 x 14/9
= (2 x 14)/(3 x 9)
= 28/27
= 1 1/27

16. 2/5 x 1 3/7 =
= 2/5 x 10/7
= (2 x 10)/(5 x 7)
= 20/35
= 4/7

17. 3/4 x 2 3/10 =
= 3/4 x 23/10
= (3 x 23)/(4 x 10)
= 69/40
= 1 29/40

18. 4/5 x 1 7/8 =
= 4/5 x 15/8
= (4 x 15)/(5×8)
= 60/40 = 3/2
= 1 1/2

19. 5/8 x 1 3/4 =
= 5/8 x 7/4
= (5 x 7)/(8 x 4)
= 35/32
= 1 3/32

2. Second Exercise

1. 2/3 x 2/5 = …
2. 3/4 x 5/6 = …
3. 3/5 x 1/2 = …
4. 5/8 x 2/7 = …
5. 5/7 x 7/8 = …
6. 4/9 x 2/3 = …
7. 3/2 x 2/3 = …
8. 4/6 x 5/8 = …
9. 6/7 x 3/6 = …
10 8/9 x 3/4 = …
11. 3/4 x 1/2 x 2/3 = …
12. 1/2 x 5/6 x 2/4 = …
13. 5/7 x 1/3 x 4/5 = …
14. 4/5 x 2/3 x 3/8 = …
15. 1/2 x 1/3 x 1/5 = …
16. 2 1/4 x 3 2/3 = …
17. 3 4/5 x 5 1/6 = …
18. 5 1/2 x 2 2/3 = …
19. 2 5/7 x 3 3/4 = …
20. 4 1/8 x 1 5/7 = …

Answer Key to Multiplication Fractions Questions

1. 2/3 x 1/4 = (2 x 1) / (3 x 4) = 2/12 = 1/6
2. 3/4 x 5/6 = (3 x 5) / (4 x 6) = 15/24 = 5/8
3. 3/5 x 1/2 = (3 x 1) / (5 x 2) = 3/10
4. 5/8 x 2/7 = (5 x 2) / ( 8 x 7) = 10/56 = 5/28
5. 5/7 x 7/8 = (5 x 7) / (7 x 8) = 35/56 = 5/8
6. 4/9 x 2/3 = (4 x 2) / (9 x 3) = 8/27
7. 3/2 x 2/3 = (3 x 2) / (2 x 3) = 5/6
8. 4/6 x 5/8 = (4 x 5) / (6 x 8) = 20/48 = 5/12
9. 6/7 x 3/6 = (6 x 3) / (7 x 6) = 18/42 = 3/7
10 8/9 x 3/4 = (8 x 3) / (9 x 4) = 24/36 = 2/3
11. 3/4 x 1/2 x 2/3 = (3 x 1 x 2) / (4 x 2 x 3) = 6/24 = 1/4
12. 1/2 x 5/6 x 2/4 = (1 x 5 x 2) / (2 x 6 x 4) = 10/48 = 5 /24
13. 5/7 x 1/3 x 4/5 = (5 x 1 x 4) / (7 x 3 x 5) = 20/105 = 4/21
14. 4/5 x 2/3 x 3/8 = (4 x 2 x 3) / (5 x 3 x 8) = 24/120 = 1/5
15. 1/2 x 1/3 x 1/5 = (1 x 1 x 1) / (2 x 3 x 5) = 1/30
16. 2 1/4 x 3 2/3 = 9/4 x 11/3 = (9 x 11) / (4 x 3 ) = 99/12 = 8 3/12 = 8 1/4
17. 3 4/5 x 5 1/6 = 19/5 x 31/6 = (19 x 31) / (5 x 6) = 589/30 = 19 19/30
18. 5 1/2 x 2 2/3 = 11/2 x 8/3 = (11 x 8) / (2 x 3) = 88/6 = 14 4/6 = 14 2/3
19. 2 5/7 x 3 3/4 = 19/7 x 15/4 = (19 x 15) / (7 x 4) = 285/28 = 10 5/28
20. 4 1/8 x 1 5/ 7 = 33/8 x 12/7 = (33 x 12) / (8 x 7) = 396/56 = 7 4/56 = 7 1/14

3. Third Exercise

Examples of Common Fraction Multiplication Problems

Problem 1. Multiply common fractions.
Calculate 1/3 x 1/7 = . . .?

Answer: 1/3 x 1/7 = 1×1 / 3×7 = 1/21

Problem 2. Multiplication of simplified fractions
Find 2/5 x 7/10 = . . .?

Answer: 2/5 x 7/10 = 2×7 / 5×10 = 14/50 = 7/25

Notice, the result is 14/50. The 14/50 value can be simplified by dividing the numerator and denominator by 2 or multiplied by 1/2. Therefore, 14 : 2 = 7, and 50 : 2 = 25, so we get 7/25.

Answer = 14/50 and 7/25 have the same value.

Problem 3. Multiplication of Three Common Fractions
Calculate the product of these 3 fractions 1/2 x 4/5 x 3/8 = . . .?

Answer: The question is a multiplication of three successive fractions.

1/2x 4/5 x 3/8 = 1x4x3 / 2x5x8 = 12/80 = 3/20

Note, the payoff is 12/80. The fractional value can still be simplified to 3/20.

---

Well, that’s a discussion about the meaning, the three formulas for multiplication of fractions, and their understanding that you can learn and use in your daily life. Hopefully useful and see you in the next discussion. Have a good study!

How to Calculate Weton – Currently, the Javanese calendar is used to determine various important activities, such as activities to determine auspicious days for marriage, activities to determine days for circumcision, activities to determine events for death, activities to determine the construction of houses, and activities to determine good days for traveling .

The general public, especially the Javanese, think that they have to determine an auspicious day in advance to carry out various activities, for example wedding activities must be determined in advance on an auspicious day so that future couples who are to be married will not experience bad events, either before marriage or after marriage.

The community views that the Javanese calendar has a sacred value. As for the characteristics of the sacred, it is respected by humans, creates fear, is held in high esteem, is characterized by ambiguity, its benefits are unreasonable, gives strength, and emphasizes the guidance and obligations for its adherents and worshippers.

Related to the existence of belief and also belief in something in the Javanese calendar, it all depends on the views of each individual community who judges. We as editors can only take the positive side of the Javanese Islamic calendar in this contemporary life.

Various social actions carried out by the community in announcing the existence of the Javanese calendar are a folkways (habits) related to problems in social life, a mores (code of conduct) related to social life, and also a tradition (adat).

The Cycle of Market Days in the Javanese Calendar

Symbol of the market cycle in the Javanese calendar.

The Javanese in pre-Islamic times knew weeks that were not only seven days long, but from 2 to 10 days. These weeks are called by the names of dwiwara, triwara, chess, pancawara (pancawara), sadwara, saptawara, astawara and sangawara. The cycles that are still used today are saptawara (seven day cycle) and pancawara (five day cycle), while the others are still used on the island of Bali and in Tengger.

Saptawara or padanan consists of seven days connected with the lunar-earth system. This seven-day cycle coincides with the weekly cycle in the Christian calendar, namely Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and Saturday. The following solah (movement) of the moon towards the earth are the names of the seven days.

• Radite • Ngahad , symbolizing meneng (silence);
• Soma • Senen , symbolizing progress ;
• Hangara • Tuesday , symbolizing retreat ;
• Buda • Rebo , symbolizing mangiwa (moving to the left);
• Respati • Kemis , symbolizing manengen (moving to the right);
• Sukra • Jemuwah , symbolizing muntung (going up);
• Stack • Setu , symbolizes descent (moving down).

The pancawara consists of Kliwon ( Kasih ), Legi ( Sweet ), Pahing ( Jenar ), Pon ( Palguna ), and Wage ( Cebony ) . Pancawara is also commonly referred to as a market . This cycle was previously used by traders to open markets according to existing market days. This is why many market names are now known that use that market name, such as Pasar Kliwon, Pasar Legi, Pasar Pahing, Pasar Pon, and Pasar Wage.

The market days are the patrap (attitude) positions of the months as follows.

• Kliwon • Kasih, symbolizing jumeneng (standing);
• Legi • Manis, symbolizing mungkur (turning backwards);
• Pahing • Jenar, symbolizing madep (facing);
• Pon • Palguna, representing sare (sleep);
• Wage • Gibbous , symbolizes lax (sitting).

Apart from pancawara and saptawara , there is also a six-day cycle called sadwara or paringkelan . Although sometimes it is still used in recording time, paringkelan is not used in calculating the falling time for traditional ceremonies at the palace. Paringkelan consists of Tungle , Aryang , Warungkung , Paningron , Uwas , and Mawulu.

Lunar Cycles in the Javanese Calendar

As in other calendars, the Javanese calendar also has 12 months. These months have borrowed names from Arabic adapted to the Javanese tongue, namely Sura , Sapar , Mulud , Bakdamulud , Jumadilawal , Jumadilakhir , Rejeb , Ruwah , Pasa , Sawal , Dulkangidah , and Besar . The lifespan of each month alternates between 30 and 29 days.

Here are presented the names of the Islamic Javanese months. Some of the month names are taken from the Hijri Calendar with Arabic names, but some of them use names in Sanskrit such as Pasa, Séla, and possibly also Sura, while the names Apit and Besar come from Javanese and Malay.

These names are the names of the lunar months or candra (lunar). The naming of the month is partly related to the big days in the Hijri month, such as Pasa which is related to Ramadan fasting, Mulud which is related to the Prophet’s Birthday in the month of Rabiulawal, and Ruwah which is related to Nisfu Sya’ban when the deeds of the spirit for a year are considered to be recorded. .

No.	Javanese calendar	Day Length
1.	Sura	30
2.	Sapar	29
3.	Mulud or Rabingulawal	30
4.	Bakda Mulud or Rabingulakir	29
5.	Early Friday	30
6.	Jumadil finally	29
7.	Regeb	30
8.	Ruwah (Arwah, Saban)	29
9.	Pasa (Puwasa, Siyam, Ramelan)	30
10.	Early	29
11.	Séla (Dulkangidah, Apit) *)	30
12.	Big (Dulkahijjah)	29/30
	Total	354/355

The names of the months are as follows.

• Warana • Sura, means rijal ;
• Wadana • Sapar, means wiwit ;
• Wijangga • Mulud, means brother ;
• Wiyana • Bakda Mulud, meaning ambuka ;
• Widada • Jumadilawal, means wiwara ;
• Widarpa • Jumadilakir, means rahsa ;
• Wilapa • Rejeb, meaning purwa ;
• Wahana • Ruwah, means being ;
• Wanana • Pasa, means middle ;
• Wurana • Sawal, means form ;
• Wujana • Séla, meaning wusana ;
• Wujala • Big, means kothong .

Information:

The alternative name for the month Dulkangidah is Sela or Apit. These names are a relic of the Old Javanese names for the name of the 11th season which is called Apit Weak . Séla means rock; associated with weak which means “land”.

The appearance of the moon in the Javanese calendar is as follows.

• The 1st of the Javanese month, the moon looks very small-just like a line, this is interpreted as a newborn baby, which gradually becomes bigger and brighter;
• The 14th of the Javanese month is called the full moon sidhi , the full moon represents adults who are married or married;
• The 15th of the Javanese month is called full moon , the moon still looks full, but there is already a sign of size and light is slightly reduced;
• The 20th of the Javanese month is called panglong , this is interpreted as someone who has started to lose his memory;
• The 25th of the Javanese month is called sumup , this is interpreted as someone who has started to be taken care of by other people or returns like a baby;
• The 26th of the Javanese month is called Manjing , this means that humans return to their original place again.
• The remaining four or five days symbolize the time when humans will begin to be reborn into a new worldly life.

The Year Cycle in the Javanese Calendar

One year in the Javanese calendar has an age of 354 3/8 days. For this reason, there is an eight-year cycle known as windu . In one windu there are eight years, each of which has its own name, namely Alip , Ehe , Jimawal , Je , Dal , Be , Wawu , and Jimakir . The years of Ehe , Dal , and Jimakir have a lifespan of 355 days and are known as long years ( Taun Wuntu ), while the remaining 354 days are known as short years ( Taun Wastu).). In this long year, the big month as the last month has a life of 30 days.

In addition, there is a 32 year cycle of four windu, namely the names of the days, markets, dates and months which repeat exactly or are called mash . The four windu in the cycle are named Kuntara , Sangara , Sancaya , and Adi . Each of these windu has its own symbol, namely Kulawu and Langkir . Each symbol is eight years old, so the total cycle of the signs is 16 years old.

Even so, there are still differences in calculations between the Javanese year and the Hijri year. Every 120 years, there will be a difference of one day in the two calendar systems. This is what made at that time the Javanese year was given an additional day. This 120 year period is called khurup .

Until the early 21st century, there were four khurup, namely Khurup Jumuwah Legi/Amahgi (1555 J–1627 J/1633 AD–1703 AD), Khurup Kemis Kliwon/Amiswon (1627 J–1747 J/1703 AD–1819 AD), Khurup Rebo Wage/Aboge (1867 J–1987 J/1819 M–1963 AD), and Khurup Selasa Pon/Asapon (1867 J–1987 J/1936 AD–2053 AD).

The current khurup name refers to the day that falls on the 1st month of Sura in the year Alip . On Khurup Asapon , the 1st of the month Sura of the year Alip will always fall on the Tuesday of Pon for a period of 120 years.

Wuku and Neptu

Related to the Javanese calendar, it is also known that the time period is considered to determine the character of the child being born, just as astrology is related to the Gregorian calendar. This period is called Wuku and the science of calculation is called Pawukon . There are 30 Wuku , each of which has a lifespan of 7 days, so that one Wuku cycle has a lifespan of 210 days which is called the Wuku Kitchen .

Besides Wuku , there is also Neptu which is used to see the value of a day. There are two kinds of Neptu , namely Neptu Dina and Neptu Pasaran .

Neptu Dina is a number used to mark the value of days in saptawara , while Neptu Pasaran is used to mark the value of days in pancawara . These values ​​are used to calculate the pros and cons of a day related to certain activities and the character of someone born on that day.

The Sultan Agungan calendar begins on Friday Legi on 1 Sura in the year Alip 1555 J, or 1 Muharram 1043 H, or 8 July 1633. This event occurs on Windu Kuntara, the Kulawu symbol and is marked by a sengkala moon which reads Jemparingen Buta Galak Iku (arrows of wild giants That).

Since then, the Mataram Sultanate and its successors have been able to hold traditional celebrations in tune with Islamic holidays. Traditional ceremonies such as the Garebeg are not an obstacle to the development of Islam, but instead are used as symbols of the religion itself.

This new calendar system was an attempt by a far-sighted leader to combine the two currents of civilization at that time, a reconciliation between the waves of Islamic culture and pre-Islamic civilizations. The new civilization which is now known as Mataram Islam.

Weton relationship with Javanese Primbon

Weton is used by Javanese people to determine something, be it character, one’s luck, even fate and others. However, a Javanese primbon book is needed to find out these predictions.

Primbon Java is a heritage book from the ancestors of the Javanese people who have an orientation towards the relationship between human life and the universe. Javanese primbon books have also been a source of reference for Javanese people for a long time.

Javanese primbon books have a function as a guide for determining attitudes in an action and one’s life. The contents of this book are predictions, various kinds of Javanese knowledge, magical formulas and a number system that is complicated enough to calculate lucky days and take care of all kinds of important activities such as matchmaking, marriage and others.

To find out the things above or to calculate lucky days, one’s Javanese weton and neptu are needed.

Java Neptu Table and How to Calculate Weton

Based on the table above, each day and market has various values. The way to calculate weton is to add up the value of the birthday with the Sinaumed’s market. Furthermore, see the following explanation for calculating weton with the Javanese neptu table.

The first way to calculate weton is to use neptu days with the Javanese market. in the Javanese neptu table, Sinaumed’s can observe that each day and Javanese market has a different value. In this case, how to calculate the weton can be done by adding up the value of the day and market owned at the weton of birth.

For example, if Sinaumed’s has a date of birth on Saturday with the Javanese kliwon market, it means that Sinaumed’s’ weton is Saturday Kliwon. To calculate the number of wetons, Sinaumed’s can add up the value 9, namely the number of neptu birthdays, namely Saturday, with a value of 8, namely the Javanese kliwon market.

So, 9+8 = 17, the number of neptu weton of someone who was born on Saturday kliwon is 17. With this number, Sinaumed’s can find out a person’s character, calculate luck, how does one get testimony and how to calculate partner compatibility.

In addition to how to calculate the Javanese weton in the first way, there is also a way to calculate the second Javanese weton based on the Javanese month and year.

In contrast to the first method, the Javanese neptu for months and years is usually used to estimate the rainy season, planting season, dry season, pests and diseases of certain plants, amount of harvest, fish catch and so on.

The 12 names of the months in the Javanese calendar are actually not much different from the months in the Islamic calendar. Meanwhile, the names of the years in the Javanese calendar consist of eight types.

In Javanese culture, the Javanese calendar will change every year once every windu. Therefore, every eight years, the name of the year on the Javanese calendar will change according to the order, namely Alip, Ehe, Jimawal, Je, Dal, Be, Wawu and the last is the year of Jim Akhir.

The following is a table of Javanese calculations based on the month and year.

From the table above, Sinaumed’s can calculate a person’s weton with the neptu month and Javanese year. For example, if someone was born in the month of Ruwah and in the year of Wawu, then Sinaumed’s needs to add up the value of 4 in the month of Ruwah and 6 in the year of Wau.

4+6 = 10, the number 10 is the final result of the sum and weton neptu of the Javanese month and year.

Meaning of Neptu Weton Matchmaking Results

After Sinaumed’s knows how to calculate the neptu weton, Sinaumed’s will get a number that functions to find out various things, such as lucky days, character, and even a mate. Usually the neptu weton calculation is more reasonable and commonly used for marriages or arranged marriages. With neptu weton, both candidates can see compatibility between each other, even get an idea of ​​compatibility and when should the wedding day be held.

Here are some meanings of the results of Javanese neptu calculations about a mate or partner.

1. Pegat (1, 9, 10, 18, 19, 27, 28, 36)

From the results of the neptu weton pegat calculation, it means that Sinaumed’s’ relationship with his partner is included in the vulnerable category. Pegat, according to Javanese primbon, is an indication of the possibility that Sinaumed’s and their partners often have problems in life.

2. Queen (2, 11, 20, 29)

If Sinaumed’s gets the results of a neptu weton calculation with the numbers 2,11,20, or 29, then it means that Sinaumed’s is quite lucky. Because, the category of the number of neptu weton Ratu means Sinaumed’s and the couple is a true soul mate. Sinaumed’s will have a very harmonious, happy relationship and even your relationship can make many people jealous because you two look so compatible.

3. Matchmaking (3, 12, 21, 30)

The meaning of the third neptu weton calculation is probably the meaning of the calculation that many couples really want. Because, if Sinaumed’s has a neptu number of 3, 12, 21, and 30, it means that Sinaumed’s and the Sinaumed’s pair are soul mates. More than that, it is predicted that Sinaumed’s and the Sinaumed’s couple will have a harmonious household life at all times.

If you get the results of this one neptu weton calculation, Sinaumed’s might be able to marry his partner without worrying!

4. Topo (4, 13, 22, 31)

The result of the fourth neptu weton calculation is the neptu topo category, namely 13,4,31 or 22. If Sinaumed’s gets the results of the neptu topo calculation, then Sinaumed’s needs to increase vigilance. Because, according to Javanese primbon, the meaning of neptu topo is that Sinaumed’s and his partner will experience difficulties during the early days of being married.

5. Tinari (5, 14, 23, 32)

If Sinaumed’s gets a calculation result of 5, 14, 23, or 32 then the number of neptu weton is included in the tinari, which means that Sinaumed’s doesn’t need to worry and can be calmer. Because tinari means happy news for Sinaumed’s.

The happiness in question is sufficient sustenance when Sinaumed’s builds a household. Apart from that, Sinaumed’s and his family will also be given the convenience of finding sustenance.

6. Solid (6, 15, 24, 33)

In Javanese, solid means arguing which characterizes a bad relationship. As the name implies, the number of neptu weton solid, namely 6, 15, 24 and 33, indicates a bad prediction for the life of the Sinaumed’s household and their partners. Even so, Sinaumed’s can be calmer because the relationship between Sinaumed’s and his partner will not end in divorce.

7. Sujanan (7, 16, 25, 34)

The result of the neptu weton calculation in the seventh match is sujanan with the numbers 7, 16, 25 or 34. If you get the neptu sujanan result, then Sinaumed’s needs to be more careful and alert.

The reason is that according to Javanese primbon, people who are included in the sujanan category are people or couples who are under threat of a big fight in the household caused by an affair.

8. Pesthi (8, 17, 26, 35)

According to the neptu weton mate calculation, people who have a number of pesthi calculations, namely 8, 17, 26, and 35 are people who will have a household that gets along well with their partner. If Sinaumed’s has the number of neptu weton match one, then Sinaumed’s will have a harmonious and harmonious family life.

The Neptu Distribution Still Has Calculations

In addition to the eight categories of neptu weton mate above, there are neptu division results that still leave remnants of the calculations and the meaning of the remaining neptu calculations is related to the luck of Sinaumed’s and his partner. Here’s an explanation.

1. Wasesa Segara or the remaining one, is predicted to have a big heart, have an authoritative character and smooth sustenance.
2. Semi arrears or the remaining two, according to Javanese primbon, means that there will be obstacles in terms of sustenance.
3. Satria Wibawa or the remaining three means that the remaining Neptu calculations are figures who will later be respected and respected in their environment.
4. Sumur Sinaba or the remaining four, according to Javanese primbon, means that Sinaumed’s will be filled with inspiration, live in harmony and become a role model for those around Sinaumed’s.
5. According to Javanese primbon, Satria Wirang or the remaining five will often face various kinds of difficulties in life. However, it was not explained what kind of difficulties Sinaumed’s would face.
6. Bumi Kepatak or the remaining six according to Javanese primbon means that Sinaumed’s will need to work hard in life to achieve his goals and the things he wants in life.
7. Lebu Ketiup Angin or the remaining seven in Javanese primbon, the remainder of this neptu calculation will face a difficulty, especially when Sinaumed’s wants to achieve dreams or aspirations, because Sinaumed’s will have difficulty finding peace.

Apart from calculating the neptu weton of a mate to see the compatibility between Sinaumed’s and their partner, the neptu calculation can also be used to calculate auspicious days based on the Javanese weton. Its function is so that when the wedding is held, the bride and groom and the wedding ceremony will not encounter any obstacles or difficulties.

In order to find out a good day, there is a different formula that Sinaumed’s needs to understand. The formula used is the number of neptu of the two prospective bride and groom, then if the two neptu are added to the auspicious days, then divided by five, the result must leave a number of three.

If the calculation results show more than three, that day is a good day to hold a wedding or other important event.

Also read:

Listen and Know! How to Build Passion Within Yourself – Being an enthusiastic and passionate person in doing something is what most people dream of because enthusiasm and passion make everything we do and the days we spend more colorful. Everyone without exception must have another side to themselves that cannot always be shown to the general public, especially those related to their passion.

It seems that the passion or passion for life that is ingrained in some people cannot always be shown to the surface because one way or another they decide to keep it to themselves even though that passion may be something they really like and are interested in.

Several factors such as job demands, the economy, personality, or even physical conditions are some of the things that prevent some people from closing their passions deeply. However, as we know, opportunities are always there and can come at any time, including to awaken the passion that is within us, whether it’s passion in hobbies, dream jobs, or aspirations that have not been realized so far.

So, therefore, in this discussion, we will try to discuss ways to awaken the passion that is sleeping inside every person who has that passion.

Furthermore, we will review the discussion below!

Definition of Passion

Before we discuss further about how to awaken passion in us, let’s look at the definition of passion itself below!

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), passion means passion, passion, great desire, joy, emotion, anger and anxiety

Basically, the concept of passion is not ambition, desire, dream or wish. However, passion is something that begins with awareness.

Passion because it’s someone’s desire to do something or activity that he likes or thinks is important. Those who already have passion are willing to do various things to achieve something. In fact, they are willing to use their time, energy, and mind to achieve something.

This is something we consider to be a passion. So if you find something or activity that makes you ready to ignite things in your life, it means you have found a passion that you enjoy.

According to Vallerand and Houlfar, passion is a strong tendency to perform pleasurable actions.

Although according to Covey, the definition of passion is a burning desire, a strong belief and desire that can make a person disciplined to achieve his vision.

Pertula also stated that passion is a psychological state characterized by positive and strong emotional feelings, inner desire and high commitment to an activity that is considered meaningful by someone.

Gani and Priambodo stated that passion is a strong desire or passion that is aroused when a person believes that he will achieve pleasant results. Gani and Priambodo also interpret the opinion about passion that he who has no hope also loses passion. Passion or passion also refers to a state of mind, according to Gan and Priambodo.

Augustine gives his opinion about the meaning of passion. According to Augustine, passion is a passionate and passionate spirit to achieve a goal, a great desire and willingness to suffer for that goal. According to Augustine, passion is driven by feelings of love, which then creates passion to achieve goals and desires. Apart from this joy, according to Augustine, there is also suffering in desire.

Passion (from the Greek “suffer, endure” and from the late Latin (particularly Christian) passio “passion; suffering” (from the Latin pati “suffer”; participle: passus)) is a term denoting a feeling of strength and violence. or tendencies or nearly uncontrollability in relation to certain people or things. Passion can vary from a strong interest in, or admiration for, an idea, proposal, or goal; enjoy an interest or activity with enthusiasm; strong attraction, excitement or feelings for someone. It is used primarily in the context of romance or sexual desire, although it usually conveys a deeper or broader range of emotions than the term lust, often including the notions of ecstasy and/or agony.

Denis Diderot (1713-178) described passion as “desire”. We call inclinations, desires, and aversions brought to a certain intensity, by vague feelings of pleasure or pain, caused or followed by the disordered movements of blood and animal spirits, lust. . They can be so strong as to prevent the exercise of all personal liberties, a state in which the soul is somehow passive; hence the name lust. These tendencies, or so-called inclinations of the soul, arise from our understanding that great good or great evil is contained in the object of passion itself.

How to Awaken Passion in Us

Finding or identifying passion is not easy. In fact, it often takes a long time. Even for years. There are many cases where people don’t know their passion until they are alive. As well as encouraging you to do something passionately, we also cover how to build on that.

Here are some ways to generate passion in us:

• Find the motivation behind the decision
• Find your value and what you believe in
• Do some self-reflection
• Look for patterns and themes in the answers to the questions you ask yourself
• Start thinking about what you want to do
• Also think about what activities you’ve always wanted to do
• Set goals
• Don’t commit yourself, commit to “ready but” behavior
• Mind calming exercises
• Be patient with yourself
• Draw a conclusion

1. Ask yourself

The first way is to ask yourself; do you like something? Think about what activities you do and what you really like. You’ve been doing it for a long time. Maybe from childhood. You do it all the time and you love the activity.

2. Find out about topics that interest you by spending time reading

In general, people who like something often know what they like. There are many ways to get information, one of which is by reading. Take a look, so far you often read which topics. Trending topics become the door to discovering what your true passion is.

3. Brainstorm

It’s okay if you can’t imagine anything. You really don’t know what you’ve been doing all this time. Maybe you need to do some brainstorming. The trick is to get out a piece of paper and start jotting down ideas. Write down what comes to mind.

If necessary look around the house. Write down your observations. Everything that comes to mind and is written down on paper becomes material for your own evaluation.

4. Ask about

Asking other people’s opinions is fine. You can ask about your passion to people you trust so far. discuss Find out how others found their passion. What are they doing?

Asking others gives you food for thought. Actually, there are many possibilities.

5. Do not stop working first

This method is mainly for those who are already working. So if you’re already working but don’t know what your passion is, don’t rush to leave. It’s no fun to work without passion, but the decision to leave a job without passion should be considered carefully. If you decide to go out, be well prepared.

6. Try it first

Before you decide to pursue your passion, do some experimenting first. For example, you work, but without passion. Then you think that your passion is not in this job and you are attracted to other tasks that match your passion. You can try a job that suits your passion by taking a side job.

This method is used to determine whether the job is really an interesting field or not. Is it really your passion?

7. Do a lot of research, you need to do a lot of research

The next option is to do as much research as possible. Through research, you can get comprehensive information about what you are interested in. Research can be done as easily as searching for information in books, the internet, magazines and the media. In addition, you can explore through questions and discussions.

8. Practice, practice, and practice some more

Keep practicing until you find your passion. Finding your passion might be hard, but that’s okay. Keep the spirit and practice, ok?

9. Don’t quit

When you can’t find your passion, it must be tiring. However, keep trying and if you still don’t know your passion. Take a short break if necessary. Take a break, but don’t stop trying.

Two Types of Passion

In psychology, Professor J. Vallerand said that passion is divided into two types, namely passion for harmony and passion for obsession. Both differ in their effect on the individual concerned.

Two types of lust are described below.

1. Passion Harmony

Passion Harmony is positive passion. Someone does something out of pleasure, love, and according to your love for something. For example, if you can turn your hobby into a source of income.

With a desire for harmony, you are happier because there is no conflict between your actions and your personal values. The steps taken in practice are more organized, have clear goals, and the results of your work are more organized and can be evaluated with a cool head.

2. Passion full of passion

What is passionate passion? This is based on external factors, such as the obligation to receive a high salary to support the family.

In this passion, you are forced to act, even if it doesn’t match your personal values. In fact, you are like a robot in that you have no ability to control the results and you may not like the results.

Studies show that people who are prone to lust and obsessions are rarely gentle when it comes to problems or challenges in their life. Such people are also often characterized by intolerance towards things that go against their passions and obsessions.

Benefits of Finding Passion for Yourself

Here are 5 benefits of passion that you will get if you do it with passion:

1. Build a strong character

Passion makes a person a strong character. How could that be? So when someone does something with passion, he still tries to reach his goal.

No matter how many people underestimate it. It encourages persistence. This character makes a person a strong person.

2. Teaching about time estimates

A person who knows his passion automatically knows what his goal is. For that, he knows which activities should be prioritized. Don’t waste time on useless things.

3. Increase people’s joy in life and work

There is a big difference between people who recognize their passions and those who don’t. A person who recognizes his desires clearly knows what he wants.

Another case with people who have no passion. He tends to do things for other people or on other people’s orders. Hence, he does not live a contented life because he acts according to the wishes or orders of others.

At the same time, passionate people are satisfied with what they do. He enjoys every process, and even though obstacles often arise, he tries to find a way out. It is believed that passionate people enjoy life and work more.

4. Improve concentration

On the other hand, passion drives a person to do something wholeheartedly. It’s also what separates people who have passion from those who don’t. Someone who doesn’t have passion tends to do something half-heartedly because they don’t do it voluntarily.

Passionate person knows very well what he is doing. What are the goals and objectives. This makes it easier to concentrate. It’s easier to focus on what you want.

5. Reducing stress

Other benefits based on research published in The Annals of Behavioral Medicine. Passion can remember stress. In addition, passion also increases passion and happiness. This is because passion affects the purpose of life. He feels his life is full of meaning.

According to Ika Indriasari and Noni Setyorini, passion is related to work. The benefits described above are generally the benefits of passion. So, Ika Indriasari and Noni Setyorini’s research specifically looks at the impact of passion in work.

Two of the three planned hypotheses are correct, namely passion has a positive effect on work performance. Second, the meaning of work affects morale. The higher the importance, the stronger the relationship between morality and performance.

So the benefits of passion in the world of work are not just a figment of the imagination. Passion affects performance and morale. Therefore, a workplace that supports and supports the morale of employees is very necessary to keep them motivated and excited.

This fact shows the importance of passion in a career. Before you enter the world of work, you must identify your passion from now on. This will make it easier for you later when you graduate and finally go to work, because working with passion is much more fun than working without passion.

Conclusion

That’s a brief discussion of how to awaken passion in yourself. The discussion this time does not only discuss how to awaken passion in oneself but also discusses the definition of passion, then discusses the types and benefits of passion itself. Finding out how to build passion in ourselves really helps us to more easily develop passion in ourselves and how to develop it so that it becomes something positive in our lives.

Thus a review of how to awaken passion in yourself. For Sinaumed’s who want to learn all about how to build passion in themselves and other psychology-related knowledge, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books.

As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest information for you. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Pandu Akram

Related article:

Optimism is Never Give Up: Find Out Its Definition and Benefits

Know the Types of Work

What is Passion & How to Find Passion

10+ Ways to Eliminate Lazy Feelings to Get Excited Again

Optimistic Definition, Characteristics and 5 Benefits

How to Become an Archaeologist – If you love all things related to ancient civilizations, then the archaeologist profession is the ideal job for you. Archeology itself is a science that belongs to the branch of the humanities and the work of archaeologists is none other than to find out how certain people lived in certain historical stages. These archaeologists have a responsibility to research as well as uncover human history and add significant value to society and the economy with their findings.

These professionals will look for patterns to understand why and how human behavior has evolved. Meanwhile, becoming an archaeologist requires a commitment to higher education, training, and persistence in the field. This profession can be useful for those who have a passion for archeology.

As we know, history is a puzzle consisting of millions of pieces, from buildings to bones, from plates to armor. Archaeologists will search for and collect these pieces, then piece them together to create an image of the past.

What is Archeology?

Archeology is a study of human culture from different eras by combining history and geology. Someone who studies this science is called a student majoring in archeology who in their studies will study material on cultural history of various artifacts from time to time, such as inscriptions and also paintings found in various locations. Apart from that, someone who studies in this field of knowledge will also learn about how to dig up ancient artifacts, examine various historical facts behind artifacts, estimate the age of artifacts, how early human evolution moved, and of course will learn about museum organizations.

Archeology or a scientific field that studies related to ancient history is a science that studies human culture in the past through a systematic study of documentary data. This systematic study includes discovery, documentation, analysis, cultural values, customs, norms, customary laws, as well as interpretation of data in the form of artifacts (material culture, such as axes, stones and temples) and ecofac (environmental objects, such as rocks, earth features, and its kind). Fossils and their characteristics (artifacts cannot be separated from their location (archaeological site).

A special research technique is archaeological digging or excavation, although this investigative technique is still archeological in nature. The aims of archeology are quite varied and are the subject of long debate, including what is called capital archeology, compiling cultural history, understanding changes in the attitudes of living things, and also understanding the process of cultural change. Because it has the aim of understanding the culture of living things, including one of them, namely humans, this archeology is classified as a humanities group.

However, various supporting sciences are used, including history, anthropology, geology (with the knowledge of the layers of the earth’s formation as a reference for the relative age of a discovery), archeology), geography, architecture, paleontology and biological anthropology, physics (including carbon c- 14 for absolute dating), metallurgy (for obtaining the elements of metal objects), and philology (study of ancient manuscripts).

Today, archeology covers a wide variety of related fields. For example, the discovery of a buried corpse will arouse the interest of experts from various fields to study the clothing and the type of material used, the shape of the pottery, as well as how it was used, the pattern of distribution, beliefs related to what was buried with the body. Chemists can determine the age of excavations through methods such as measuring carbon-14. Meanwhile, geneticists who want to understand the movements of the first human migrations, they will research their DNA.

Specifically, this science of archeology studies the past, ancient cultures, both in prehistoric times and in historical times. In its development, archeology can also study contemporary culture, as is usual in the study of modern material culture. Because it is based on objects that existed in the past, archeology really needs to preserve these objects as a source of reference data. From there, another discipline developed, namely archaeological resource management (Archaeological Resources Management), or more broadly, cultural resource management (CRM, Culture Resources Management).

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), archeology is the study of ancient life and culture through its remains. Starting from household utensils and also statues. Archeology in English is called archeology. Meanwhile, according to the Encyclopedia Britannica (2015), archeology is the scientific study of the remains of material life and human activities in the past.

According to Paul Bahn, the notion of archeology is a systematic study of the past based on material culture with the aim of uncovering, interpreting, and also classifying cultural heritage, describing the forms and behavior of people in the past and studying human history.

This archeology plays an important role as a major source of knowledge of ancient and possibly extinct cultures. According to A. Nurkidam and Hasmiah Herawaty in their book Archeology as an Introduction (2019), etymologically, the word archeology comes from Greek, namely archeo and logo. Archeo means ancient and logo means knowledge. Meanwhile, from a terminological perspective, archeology can be interpreted as a science that studies socio-cultural aspects of the past through the remains of found materials, with the aim of compiling and describing these events.

Duties of an Archaeologist

Archaeologist himself is someone who is already an expert in the field of archeology. Where these archaeologists are tasked with investigating historical and prehistoric sites and physical remains to understand human relations with the past with the aim of preserving past cultures. The archaeologists will try to find clues about the past. Generally, they use various kinds of extraction or excavation techniques. Tools such as shovels, axes, as well as bulldozers are commonly used to help archaeologists coordinate and participate in field work to try to excavate artifacts, such as ancient tools, pottery, seeds, or animal bones.

In addition, archaeologists are also responsible for the conservation of the artifacts they recover. These activities generally involve bringing the item back to the laboratory where it can be cleaned, recovered, and stabilized. Data collection is the main task of other archaeologists. Before, during, and also after excavations, these archaeologists take notes, drawings, samples, maps, measurements, as well as other information about the archaeological site. Archaeologists are not only tasked with finding information, but also using it to educate. Many archaeologists have professorships and are involved in publishing and teaching.

Requirements to Become an Archaeologist

When you graduate from high school or vocational school, you may have imagined that you plan to continue your studies to college instead of working or being unemployed. This is a good choice, because the higher a person’s education, the easier it will be to improve their standard of living. Job opportunities will also be wider with higher salaries. The courses you take can be adjusted according to your interests and talents. One of the choices of majors that you can choose is the archeology department. This one major is still very rare and only exists in six universities in Indonesia.

However, can this archeology graduate work anywhere? Due to the scarcity of archeology graduates, it makes the job opportunities even more promising. They can work as archaeologists with salaries starting from Rp. 4 million to Rp. 7 million. Meanwhile, for work as an overseas archaeologist, the salary can reach Rp. 800 million. If you are interested in studying archeology, first make sure you have the following characteristics:

1. Have a hobby of traveling. Where those who choose archeology majors will be familiar with traveling to find ancient sites.
2. Curious about life in ancient times or ancient humans. For those of you who want to major in archeology, make sure you have a very high level of curiosity about the life of civilizations that existed in the past. Because, the task of students of this department is to uncover the veil of life in ancient times.

How to Become an Archaeologist

As with most professions in the world, training is key to becoming a good archaeologist. Therefore, it is important to enroll in a university with a major in archeology and take different subjects, be it at the theoretical or practical level. An archaeologist’s job is to study the past by considering the remains found in excavations.

For that, the key is to graduate from the degrees mentioned earlier and take a Master’s degree to specialize in a particular subject in the field of archaeology. A professional in this field must certainly analyze the bones of the teeth or certain tools found in ancient deposits. The goal itself is to develop certain ideas about how civilizations lived in the past.
The following are some of the steps you need to take to become an archaeologist, including:

1. Getting a Bachelor’s Degree

The first step that must be taken by an archaeologist is to complete an undergraduate program in anthropology or a related field such as history or geography. There are many undergraduate archeology programs that provide hands-on experience through laboratory classes and fieldwork programs.

2. Participate in an Internship

Many budding archaeologists prefer to participate in an apprenticeship program, either during or after they have completed their undergraduate program. The internship will provide the fieldwork experience required for many archaeological work. Common places that may offer archeology internships are museums, government agencies, as well as archaeological organizations.

3. Getting a Master’s Degree

While an entry-level archaeologist position may only require a bachelor’s degree, most other archeology jobs will require you to have a master’s degree. A master’s degree here allows students to further develop the technical skills necessary to work as archaeologists and choose which area of ​​archeology they wish to focus on. Common master’s degrees offered for this profession are anthropology and archeology programs.

4. Consider a Doctoral Degree

If you want to work as a college professor of archeology or lead a high-level archaeological project, then you may be asked to have a Ph.D. in archeology or a related field. Doctoral degrees here usually take two to three years to complete in addition to the several months of field research associated with the dissertation.

5. Looking for a Job

Depends on what kind of archaeologist you want and where you want to work. You can start work after you receive a bachelor’s or master’s degree. Finding archeology work as soon as you are qualified is an important thing to do in order to gain experience that will allow you to advance in your career. Entry-level jobs for archaeologists include site excavation technician, research assistant, and also archaeological laboratory technician.

Types of Archaeologist Profession

There are several different areas of archeology that you can specialize in. The field you choose will determine the type of archaeologist you will be. The following are some of the most common types of archaeologists practiced today, including:

1. Underwater Archaeologist

This type of archeology studies underwater remains as well as evidence of shipwrecks, cities buried under water as well as other underwater sites. In addition to the more general archaeological basis, an underwater archaeologist must also have knowledge of the specific techniques needed to carry out underwater exploration. This one field can also be referred to as marine or maritime archeology.

2. Ethnoarchaeologist

Ethnoarchaeologists are very concerned with uncovering clues and insights that explore ethnography or the customs and traditions of people and their culture. An ethnoarchaeologist can study the ancient culture that existed in a certain area by comparing it to the way of life of modern humans in that area. This type of archeology often involves examining groups of modern-day individuals and using the findings to infer how ancient people’s cultures lived.

3. Environmental Archaeologist

Archaeologists in this field focus on studying the relationship between the natural environment and ancient human groups. For example, an environmental archaeologist might try to determine which animals and plants existed during a certain period of time and how people at that time incorporated them into their lives. There are three sub-sections in the type of environmental archeology, namely geoarchaeology, zooarchaeology and archaeobotany.

Archaeological Science Objectives

In the journal Center for Research and Research on Archeology of West Kalimantan (2013) written by Benson Manalu, archeology generally aims to collect accurate data about life in the past. When described, this archeology has three main objectives, including:

– To present the cultural history of society in the past.
– Show how people lived in the past.
– Symbolizes the process of cultural change in the past.

Thus the discussion about what is archeology and how to become an archaeologist. The discussion this time does not only discuss about that, but also some goals and also the types of archeology that you can learn. Understanding the notion of archeology makes us rich in new insights regarding the world’s historical setting and also its developments which are rarely understood by ordinary people.

It also makes us contribute because we are also part of ongoing history. For Sinaumed’s who want to learn all about the notion of archeology and other history-related science, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books. As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest information for you. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

The profession of a pilot is the dream of many people, although it is not easy to achieve because flying and driving an airplane requires a certification or license through an official exam. To become a pilot you have to go to flight school and have high discipline.

But you know, Job opportunities as pilots will always be open, because more than 620,000 new pilots are needed who can fly commercial aircraft in the next 15-20 years.

This is due to the growth of the national and international aviation industry which causes the need for pilots for domestic and international airlines to continue to increase in line with route expansion and an increase in the number of aircraft. So, Realize your goals immediately, but first know about the following ins and outs of the profession. Check these out!

Pilot as a term for a person who drives an airplane. A pilot is responsible for flight security and safety, he has the authority to take various actions to prevent flight security and safety disturbances.

On a flight the pilot will drive the plane according to his flight plan . In his duties in the cockpit of the aircraft, the pilot will be assisted by a co-pilot, and during the flight from the time the door is closed for take off until the first door is opened after landing , the pilot and co-pilot will follow the flight paths that have been registered and programmed through aircraft navigation system assistance as well as information provided by traffic control towers at airports and air traffic service officers along the way.

In a double-manned aircraft, a clear division of tasks must be determined regarding who is the pilot flying  and who is the pilot monitoring . The synergy of task division and work coordination between the two will then result in better, safer and more efficient flights.

On a commercial flight, the pilot and co-pilot are in charge of driving the plane while flight attendants and stewardess are in charge of ensuring the safety, security and comfort of passengers on the flight. Pilots, co-pilots, and flight attendants or stewards (flight attendants) are referred to as flight crew (aircrew) . Conversations conducted by the pilot, co-pilot with traffic service officers and almost all parameters of the existing system are recorded by the black box (flight data recorder).

This book with the title  Civil Aviation Traffic Management contains management and regulation in controlling air traffic and air space dynamically and integrated through the provision of seamless facilities and services. This book will be very important and useful for flight personnel related to aircraft operational activities, especially ATC personnel (ATCO) and pilots as ATCO partners.

How to Become a Pilot

The main requirement to become a pilot is to take pilot education first. Anyone can take this education as long as they meet the requirements and have passed the selection. In order to get into a pilot school, there are high requirements, including:

• Minimum body 160 cm
• Have a healthy physical condition
• Not color blind, and various other requirements.
• Have good English skills.

Majors that can be taken to pursue this profession include Aviation Engineering , Aviation Safety, and Aviation Management . Complete information about the Aviation department can be seen in the Aviation Department.

As a profession that demands expertise or skills in piloting an airplane, a pilot must first take an official written exam and a flight test held by an aviation school and aviation authority.

If passed the test, a pilot will receive a flying certificate or pilot license , which is a letter acknowledging the pilot’s ability (competency to fly an aircraft of a certain type or size. The license itself consists of various types and has different levels. The flight licenses consist of PPL, CPL, ATPL, and ME, Sinaumed’s.

Pilots Duties

The pilot’s duties include:

• Flying an
  
  Airplane Aircraft safety is the responsibility of a pilot because it is his duty to be able to fly an airplane professionally by paying attention to the weather and flight techniques.
• Keeping Passengers Safe
  
  Not only proficient in flying planes, but a pilot is also required to be responsible and guarantee that all passengers boarding the plane will arrive at their destination safely. This task is actually devoted to commercial pilots – pilots who work for airlines and fly planes for pay. Not only that, the pilot must also ensure that the passengers are also very comfortable on the way.
• Maintaining Good Personal Health
  
  Almost all professions engaged in the service sector have the greatest responsibility for consumers. However, even so a pilot also must not forget about his own health. It is everyone’s responsibility, including pilots, to take care of their own health. This is because when on duty the pilot’s body condition must be in a fit condition, because if he is not in a healthy condition it can affect the flight and also the safety of passengers.
• Fully understands his abilities and the limits of his own expertise and also understands the limits of the capabilities of the aircraft he flies

Pilot Profession Provisions

Indonesia has implemented flight hours limits for pilots, which are contained in the Minister of Transportation Regulation No. 28 of 2013. In the appendix to this regulation, it is stated that a pilot and co-pilot are prohibited from flying more than 9 hours in one day consecutively. Not only that, the limit of overtime protection for a pilot. Airlines must also pay attention to the variable duration of pilot work in other periods of time. The variable is not more than 1,050 hours in a calendar year, more than 110 hours in a calendar month and more than 30 hours in 7 consecutive days.

Pilots can work for airlines or commercial aircraft, helicopters for the distribution of goods and information, or small aircraft. Unlike the drivers of other modes of transportation, pilots are bound by more specific rules. Pilot fitness conditions are even regulated in the International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) Council and implemented in International Standards and Recommended Practices or what are commonly referred to as SARPs. ICAO emphasizes the importance of the condition of the pilot or pilot who is free from fatigue.

Pilot Career Path

Aircraft pilot is one of the most coveted job processes in society. A Pilot’s Career Path starts from:

• Second Officer – For novice pilots who have just graduated from pilot school, the experience they have is of course still very minimal. Airlines will not immediately give excessive flight hours to new graduates because they do not want to take risks that might occur. Usually, second officers are only allowed to carry small planes which will be accompanied by a captain.
• First Officer – A first officer is allowed to pilot the aircraft accompanied by a captain. Typically, they assist the captain in controlling the aircraft’s flight in terms of navigation. Sometimes, he also replaces the captain’s position when the captain is absent. The requirements that a first officer must have include having an ATPL and ME license first
• Captain – Captain is the highest career level for a pilot. The pilot captain is in charge of supervising the FO when flying the plane. The captain is also responsible for everything that happens during the flight

Pilot Passcode

After knowing the duties of a pilot, as a pilot candidate you must also know the passwords or codes that pilots often use in their work. What do you think? Here are some of them:

• Doors To Arrival : This first code code is a critical or emergency instruction addressed to stewards or flight attendants to get ready because the plane will be landing soon. The purpose of this password is for cabin crew to immediately deactivate the emergency slide system attached to the door. To prevent it from expanding at the gate. This is because if the emergency slide system is not deactivated, it will automatically inflate when the door is opened.
• Crosscheck : A term used by pilots and cabin crew to mean that they must check the duties of other colleagues. Inside the cabin, stewards or flight attendants check with each other whether tasks have been carried out. For example, to ensure the emergency exit is activated or deactivated as needed.
• All-Call : A direct request to each cabin crew to report via intercom from their respective posts.
• Flight Deck: Synonym of the cockpit or cabin where the pilot and copilot are located.
• Final Approach: Final approach while approaching the runway for landing, when reaching a straight section of the landing strip, or parallel to the runway centerline which does not require additional maneuvering.
• Direct Flight : Airline pilot’s job function. The meaning of direct flight or direct flight is not the same as a non-stop flight which does not stop at all, from takeoff to the final destination. A direct flight means a flight with a route that doesn’t change, but there is a possibility that the plane will stop to transit passengers.

This is information about the duties assigned to a pilot and the codes normally used in the world of aviation. So, if you want to become a pilot, make sure you are mentally prepared, Sinaumed’s.

This book will be very much needed and useful for aviation personnel who are related to the regulation, guidance and control of air space, both civil and military circles, especially for the aviation community, namely pilots, technicians and flight operations officers.

Source: from various sources

How to Become a DPR – In the current era, becoming a member of the DPR is the dream of some people. There are many things that make them want to be part of the DPR, one of which is the salary and benefits they receive.

There were even conversations among the teenagers that their goal was not to become a doctor or engineer like most, but to become a member of the DPR.

However, not everyone can become the DPR. Intense competition and a lot of capital are also required to become a member of the People’s Legislative Assembly. In addition, the way of thinking of a DPR must really have a concept for the people, not only for oneself, the group and their class.

So, how do you go about becoming a House of Representatives? What must be required to become part of the House of Representatives? Then, what are the tasks that must be carried out by a DPR?

So that Sinaumed’s won’t be curious about this for too long, let’s look at the following review!

Main Requirements to Become a Member of the DPR

To become a member of the People’s Legislative Assembly has been regulated in Law Number 7 of 2017 concerning Elections. What are these conditions?

1. Indonesian citizens who are 21 years of age or older as of the date of the establishment of the DCT
2. Have faith in God Almighty
3. Residing in the territory of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia
4. Able to speak, read, and/or write in Indonesian
5. Education at least graduated from high school, Madrasah Aliyah, SMK, Vocational Madrasah Aliyah, or other schools of the same level
6. Physically and mentally healthy, and free from drug abuse
7. Must come from a political party (no independent candidate)
8. Loyal to Pancasila as the basis of the state, the 1945 Constitution, the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia, and Bhinneka Tunggal Ika
9. Never been sentenced to imprisonment based on a court decision with imprisonment of 5 (five) years or more, unless willing to openly and honestly state to the public that he (the person concerned) is a former convict
10. Registered as a voter
11. Willing to work full time
12. Must resign as regional head, deputy regional head, state civil apparatus, member of the Indonesian National Armed Forces, member of the Indonesian National Police, directors, commissioners, supervisory boards and employees of BUMN and/or BUMD, or other bodies whose budgets come from state finances , which is stated by a letter of resignation and can not be withdrawn
13. Willing to practice as a public accountant, advocate, notary, land deed official, or not to do work as a provider of goods and services related to state finances and other work that may cause a conflict of interest with the duties, powers and rights as a member of the DPR, Provincial DPRD , and Regency/Municipal DPRD in accordance with the provisions of laws and regulations
14. Willing not to hold concurrent positions as other state officials, directors, commissioners, supervisory boards and employees in BUMN and/or BUMD and other bodies whose budgets come from state finances
15. Nominated only in 1 (one) representative institution
16. Nominated only in 1 (one) constituency.

Special Requirements to Become an Expert Member of the DPR

DPR members of course have many tasks and are always preoccupied with this. In the office of DPR members, there will usually be 5 Experts (TA) and 2 administrative staff.

It’s not easy to become an expert (TA) member of the DPR, you know … The minimum requirement to become a TA is that you have a master’s degree.

The provisions regarding Expert Staff (TA) for Members of the DPR have been regulated in DPR Regulation Number 1 of 2019 concerning Management of Experts and Administrative Staff for Members of the DPR RI. What are these provisions? Let’s look at the following description!

1. Have an undergraduate educational background (S-2) with a minimum GPA of 3.00 from a public/private or foreign university that has been accredited by an official body; or at least Bachelor Degree (S-1) with at least 5 years work experience
2. Maximum age of 60 years
3. Can operate computer
4. Healthy physically and spiritually, and free from the use of narcotics
5. Never been sentenced to imprisonment based on a court decision with imprisonment of 5 (five) years or more

The salary earned by an expert (TA) and administrative staff for the DPR has been determined and distributed by the Secretariat General of the DPR. Each party has its own mechanism for recruiting these Experts (TA) and administrative staff, and some even provide special training after the recruitment process.

Duties and Authorities of the DPR

With regard to the legislative function, the DPR has the following duties and authorities:

• Preparing the National Legislation Program (Prolegnas)
• Compile and discuss the Draft Law (RUU)
• Accept the bill that has been submitted by the DPD (Regional Representative Council), relating to regional autonomy; central and regional relations; formation, expansion, and merging of regions; management of SDA (Natural Resources) and SDE (Economic Resources); as well as central and regional financial balances
• Discuss bills proposed by the President or DPD
• Establish laws together with the President
• Approving and disapproving government regulations in lieu of laws (those proposed by the President) to be enacted into laws

With regard to the budget function, the duties and powers of the DPR are as follows:

• Approval of the Bill on the State Budget (submitted by the President)
• Paying attention to the DPD’s consideration of the Bill on the State Budget and the Bill on taxes, education and religion
• Follow up on the results of audits on the management and accountability of state finances submitted by the BPK (Financial Supervisory Agency)
• Give approval to the transfer of state assets and to agreements that have a broad impact on people’s lives regarding the burden on state finances

With regard to the oversight function, the DPR has the following duties and authorities:

• Supervise the implementation of laws, state budget, and government policies
• Discuss and follow up on the results of supervision submitted by the DPD regarding the implementation of the regional autonomy law; formation, expansion, and merging of regions; management of natural resources and natural resources, implementation of the state budget, taxes, education, and religion

The other duties and powers of the DPR include:

• Absorb, collect, accommodate, and follow up on people’s aspirations
• Give approval to the President to

a) declare war or make peace with another country

b) appoint and dismiss members of the Judicial Commission (KY)

• Give consideration to the President on the following matters:

a) Granting amnesty and abolition

b) Appoint ambassadors and accept placement of other ambassadors

• Select members of the BPK by taking into account the considerations of the DPD
• Give approval to the Judicial Commission (KY) regarding the candidates for Supreme Court judges to be determined by the President
• Choose 3 (three) constitutional judges to be submitted to the President

The Rights and Obligations of the DPR

In addition to their obligations in carrying out their duties and functions, each member of the DPR also has rights and obligations attached to himself for the benefit of the people. These rights and obligations are as follows:

The rights of members of the DPR

1. The right to submit proposals related to the Bill
2. The right to submit an opinion
3. The right to convey suggestions and opinions
4. The right to vote and be elected
5. Right of self-defense
6. The right of immunity (the right to freely speak and express one’s opinion without fear of retaliation or certain political motives)
7. Protocol rights (Right to obtain respect in relation to his position)
8. Financial and administrative rights
9. Supervision rights
10. The right to propose and fight for electoral development programs
11. The right to socialize the Act

Parliament’s obligations

The obligations of DPR members are as follows:

1. Hold fast and practice Pancasila
2. Implement the 1945 Constitution and comply with statutory provisions
3. Maintain and maintain national harmony and integrity of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia
4. Prioritizing the interests of the state above personal, group and group interests
5. Fighting for the improvement of people’s welfare
6. Adhering to the principles of democracy in administering the state government
7. Adhere to the rules and code of ethics
8. Maintain ethics and norms in working relations with other institutions
9. Absorb and collect constituent aspirations through regular working visits
10. Accommodate and follow up the aspirations and complaints of the community
11. Provide moral and political accountability to constituents in their constituencies

What special rights do DPR members have?

1. Right of Interpellation

Namely the DPR’s right to ask the Government for information regarding government policies that are important and strategic and have a broad impact on the life of society, nation and state.

2. Right of Inquiry

Namely the right of the DPR to conduct an investigation into the implementation of a law or government policy relating to important, strategic matters, and which have a broad impact on the life of society, nation and state which are suspected of contravening statutory regulations.

3. Right to Express Opinion

In this special right, DPR members can express their opinions on the following matters:

• Government policies or extraordinary events that occur in the country or in the international world
• Follow up on the exercise of the right of interpellation and the right of inquiry
• Allegations that the President and/or Vice President have violated the law, whether in the form of betrayal of the state, corruption, bribery, other serious crimes, or disgraceful acts; and/or the President and/or Vice President no longer fulfill the requirements as President and/or Vice President

How is the Decision Making System in the DPR?

The decision-making system is carried out in DPR meetings which are carried out by way of deliberation to reach consensus, but if the results are not met, then it is carried out in a second way, namely based on the majority vote.

In making decisions by consensus, it can be done after the meeting members are present and they will be given the opportunity to express opinions and suggestions regarding the issues discussed.

Decisions based on consensus will be considered valid if the members present at the meeting reach a quorum (minimum number of members present at the meeting) and are approved by all present.

Meanwhile, decision-making based on majority vote will be carried out if decision-making by consensus does not bring maximum results.

In this case, the voting will be done behind closed doors in writing, without including the name and signature of the voter, in order to guarantee its confidentiality.

So, that’s how to become a member of the DPR and its duties and responsibilities. Is Sinaumed’s interested in becoming a member of the DPR and ready to serve for a better life for the Indonesian people?

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Source:

https://www.dpr.go.id/

Excel Ranking Formula – Microsoft Excel is a type of Microsoft that is widely used by people in this world. Apart from Microsoft Word and Microsoft Power Point, Microsoft Excel is also very helpful for someone in completing their work.

There are many formulas that can help you in Microsoft Excel, one of which is the IF formula. Maybe ordinary people will be confused with this term. However, for people who have been in Microsoft Excel for a long time, they must be familiar with the formulas in it. There are still many people who don’t know about the use and types of this one formula.

See the following explanation about the type and use of this formula.

Definition of Microsoft Excel

Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Office Excel is a worksheet application program created and distributed by Microsoft Corporation that can run on Microsoft Windows and Mac OS. This application is part of Microsoft Office.

This application features calculations and graphing using Microsoft’s aggressive marketing strategy, making Microsoft Excel one of the most popular computer programs used on microcomputers to date. This program is the most widely used spreadsheet program by many parties, both on Windows-based PC platforms and Macintosh-based Mac OS platforms, since version 5.0 was published in 1993.

Excel offers many interface advantages compared to the spreadsheet programs that preceded it, but its essence is still the same as VisiCalc ( the first popular spreadsheet software ): Cells are arranged in rows and columns, and contain data or formulas with absolute or relative references. other cells.

Excel was the first spreadsheet program that allowed users to define how the spreadsheet they edited would look like: font, character attributes, and the appearance of each cell. Excel also offers intelligent cell recalculation, where only cells related to the cell will be updated (where other spreadsheet programs will recalculate the entire data or wait for a special command from the user). In addition, Excel also offers excellent graph processing features.

When it was first bundled into Microsoft Office in 1993, Microsoft also redesigned the interface used by Microsoft Word and Microsoft PowerPoint to match the appearance of Microsoft Excel, which at that time was the most popular spreadsheet application .

Following are some of the Microsoft Excel extensions:

• *.xls, is the default Microsoft Excel format prior to Excel 12. It is still based on the BIFF format and can store VBA macros .
• *.xlt, is a format for Microsoft Excel worksheet templates prior to Excel 12. Still based on the BIFF format and can store VBA macros .
• *.XML, or what is known as an XML Spreadsheet . Not capable of hosting VBA macros .
• *.xla, is the format for Excel Add-in prior to Excel 12. It is still based on the BIFF format and can store VBA macros, given that the goal is to add Microsoft Excel capabilities.
• *.xlsx, is the default worksheet format for Microsoft Excel 12, which is based on XML. Unable to save VBA macros , due to security reasons. It is actually a compressed archive in ZIP format with a document structure consisting of XML text documents. Is a replacement for the .xlsold format.
• *.xlsm, is a Microsoft Excel 12 worksheet format , which is based on XML, but can store VBA macros .
• *.xlsb, is a Microsoft Excel 12 worksheet format , which is based on XML, but is encoded in binary form. This format has the advantage of being faster to open and more efficient, considering that the purpose of this format is to handle very large worksheets consisting of tens of thousands of rows or hundreds of columns.
• *.xltm, is a format for Microsoft Excel 12 worksheet templates , which are based on XML but are capable of storing VBA macros . It is a replacement for the format .*.xlt
• *.xlam, is a format for Excel Add-in to increase the capabilities of Excel 12. By default it is able to handle VBA macros , considering the goal is to add Excel capabilities.

Benefits of Excel Formulas in the World of Work

Excel formulas in the world of work basically often use these two formulas. For simple data using formulas, while the function formula for large-scale data.

The benefits of function formulas make it easier for users in terms of:

• Gets accurate calculation results from lots of data.
• Help presentation needs on data visualization.
• Tidying up large amounts of data so that it is neatly arranged.
• Save time when processing data.
• Processing big data becomes easier and more practical.

Description of the Ranking Formula in Excel

According to the explanation on Microsoft’s page , this formula returns the rank of a number in a list of numbers. The rank of a number is the number’s magnitude relative to other values ​​in the list (if you are sorting the list, the rank of a number is its position).

For more information about this new function, see RANK.AVG function and RANK.EQ function .

—

Syntax

Writing the RANK formula follows the following rules.

RANK(number,ref,[order])

The RANK function syntax has the following arguments.

• Number (required), which is the number whose rank you want to find.
• Ref (required), which is an array of, or a reference to, a list of numbers. Nonnumeric values ​​in refs are ignored.
• Order (optional), which is a number that determines how ranks are assigned.
  • If the sort is 0 (zero) or omitted, Microsoft Excel ranks the numbers as if the ref were a list sorted in descending order .
  • If the order is a nonzero value, Microsoft Excel assigns the rank as if the ref were a list sorted in ascending order .

Information

• RANK ranks the same for duplicate numbers. However, the presence of duplicate numbers affects the ranking of subsequent numbers. For example, in an ascending list of integers, if the number 10 occurs twice and has a rank of 5, the number 11 will have a rank of 7 (no number has a rank of 6).
• For some purposes, you may wish to use a ranking definition that takes similarity into account. In the previous example, you wanted a revised 5.5 rating for the number 10. This can be done by adding the following correction factor to the value returned by the RANK function. This correction factor is appropriate for both cases where ratings are computed in descending order (order = 0 or omitted) or ascending order (order = non-zero value).
  • Correction factor for the same rank=[COUNT(ref) + 1 – RANK(number, ref, 0) – RANK(number, ref, 1)]/2.
  • In the following example, RANK(A2,A1:A5,1) equals 3. The correction factor is (5 + 1 – 2 – 3)/2 = 0.5 and the revised rank that takes equality into account is 3 + 0.5 = 3.5. If a number appears only once in the ref, the correction factor is 0, because the RANK function does not need to be adjusted for the same rating.

Example of Rank Function in Microsoft Excel

First Example

Using the table example above, try writing the following Excel formula in cell D2:

=RANK(C2;$C$2:$C$11,0)

In the Excel formula, the value that we will look for is cell C2 (90) with the value list reference $C$2:$C$11. Why is there a $ sign in Excel formulas? This is so that when we copy the formula down, the data range or list of values ​​does not change.

After writing the Excel formula, copy or use auto fill for the cells below it (D3 to D11).

The result will be like the image below:

Second Example

Copy the sample data in the following table and paste it into cell A of a new Excel worksheet. To make the formula show the result, select the data, press F2, and then press Enter. If necessary, you can adjust the column width to see all the data.

Data
7
3,5
3,5
1
2
Formula	Description (Result)	Results
=RANK(A3,A2:A6,1)	Rating 3.5 in the list above (3)	3
=RANK(A2,A2:A6,1)	Ranked 7th in the list above (5)	5

You can always ask experts in the Excel Tech Community or get support in the Answers Community .

Source

• “ Rank (Rank Function) ”. Microsoft . Retrieved December 2, 2022.
• ” Excel Rank Formula, Searching for and Determining Rank Rating Values ​​in Excel “. Excel class . Retrieved December 2, 2022.

—

Those are the descriptions, functions, and how to use the ranking formula in Microsoft Excel that you can use to complete various jobs. If you have questions, suggestions or criticism, please write in the comment box below. Also share this article on social media accounts so that your friends can also get the same benefit.

To get more information regarding the Excel Ranking Formula, Sinaumed’s can also read books available at sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight and knowledge, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithMemreading information . Hope it is useful! Regards!

Also read regarding the Excel Ranking Formula:

How Do Rainbows Appear? – Pelangi is very famous for its beauty that can make us continue to see it. Even hope that the rainbow does not disappear soon. The beauty of the rainbow comes from its distinctive colors which are known as “mejikuhibiniu”.

Usually, a rainbow will appear when it rains or after the rain is over. The appearance of the rainbow is generally in the form of a semicircle. Rainbows do not just appear there is a process of occurrence and the factors that cause rainbows to appear.

It will be lacking if we only enjoy the beauty of the rainbow, but don’t know the process of its occurrence and the factors that cause it. To find out about these two things, let’s look at the reviews as follows.

Before discussing how the process of rainbows occurs, we should first identify what a rainbow is.

Meaning of Rainbow

The definition according to some experts is similar but not the same. The following is the meaning of the rainbow, which is expressed by several experts.

1. Nancy Thompson

Isaac Newton said that a rainbow is a spectrum resulting from bending or deflection of light entering a prism.

2. Donald Ahrens

An explanation of the rainbow was written by Donald Ahrens in his book Meteorology Today . In his book, Donald Ahrens says that the rainbow is never parallel to the location of the sun. Based on this opinion, it can be said that the location of the rainbow will always be opposite the sun.

3.Lord Rayleigh

According to Lord Rayleigh, the rainbow is a process of refraction of light that gives rise to a light effect with various colors. In this process, water vapor particles surrounding the light distort the light itself to create a beautiful blend of colors to behold.

Whereas in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) a rainbow is a curved spectrum in the sky, visible due to the refraction of sunlight by raindrops or dew.

Inventor of the Theory of the Rainbow Appearance

Al-Qarafi is a scientist who was born in 1228 AD and was born in Bahnasa, Egypt. He is also known as someone who is an expert on kalam as well as one of the Islamic jurists who belongs to the Maliki school of law.

The process of the occurrence of a rainbow is written in Al-Qarafi’s scientific work. This scientific work is in the form of a book with the name Al-istibar fi ma Tudrikuhul Al-Abshar. The meaning of the name of the book is “About What the Eyes Catch”.

In his scientific work, Al-Qarafi explains that the appearance of a rainbow in the sky is caused by the reflection of sunlight on the smoke or vapor in the sky. The explanation explained by Al-Qarafi can be said to be the same as that of a philosopher, namely Ibn Sina.

According to Al-Qarafi, the rainbow has two colors, namely the color of smoke and the sun and the colors that are composed of these two elements. Not only about the colors of the rainbow, he also explained that the color of an object will not be the same when it is reflected in the mirror. The color of the object and the mirror will bring out the color that comes from the reflection of the mirror.

Many scientists make Al-Qarafi’s theory a basis or guideline for discussing rainbows.

Factors Causing Rainbows

1. Light

Light has various properties that can help the rainbow process. Because of this, light is a factor that causes rainbows.

a. The properties of light

1)  Straight vines

The first characteristic of light is that it propagates straight. Light that propagates straight can be seen when the light passes through an intermediate medium.

One example is when the flashlight is turned on and pointed forward, the flashlight will point straight in the desired direction.

2)  Can be bounced

The next property of light is that light can be reflected. Reflected light can be said to be the process of returning light from objects or objects that are exposed to light. Reflected light has two properties, namely regular reflection and diffuse reflection.

One example of the nature of this light is a mirror that is directed at the sun will cause the reflection of light coming from the sun’s rays.

3) Can be deflected / refracted

The next property of light is that light can be bent or refracted. Light refraction (refraction) is the deflection of the direction of propagation of light when it enters another medium with a different optical density.

One example of light can be bent or refracted, namely when we dip a pencil in water in a glass, the pencil will look like it is broken or bent.

A pencil that looks broken when placed in water is caused by the refraction of light from air as a tenuous medium to water, which is a denser medium.

4)  Light can be deciphered

The next property of light is light can be described. Basically, the decomposition of light has occurred naturally. We can see the decomposition of light in the appearance of a rainbow.

When a rainbow appears, you will see various colors even though the basic color of the rainbow is white. This white color is obtained from sunlight. This white light will decompose after it is refracted by rainwater, giving rise to various colors.

5)  Light can experience diffraction

The next property of light is that light can experience diffraction or bending. Bending in light occurs when light has to pass through a narrow area. After the light has experienced bending, the light will be fragmented so that it can bring out new light properties.

Diffraction itself is divided into two, namely single slit diffraction and lattice diffraction. The parable of light diffraction can be done by placing a ball or other object on the surface of the water. Then the surface of the water will produce vibrations (split light). Meanwhile, the ball can be said to be a new source of light

6) Light can penetrate transparent objects

The last characteristic of light is that light can penetrate clear. On clear objects the light will be translucent and able to transmit light. However, on dark objects, light can only form a shadow because it cannot penetrate dark objects.

Light can penetrate clear objects by burning wood, paper, leaves, etc. only with a magnifying glass. The fire to burn the goods comes from the sun’s rays which are directed with glass (clear).

Those are the properties of light. All of these properties have their respective functions. Therefore, the use of light will be maximized if it uses light according to its function.

Light itself is an energy in the form of waves that can be seen by our eyes and has a wavelength of about 380-750 nm.

Meanwhile, in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) light means light or light (from something that shines such as the sun, moon, lamp) that allows the eye to catch the shadows of objects around it.

In some studies, light has a speed of about 186,282 miles per second in a vacuum. In fact, no one has yet been able to exceed the speed of light. If you could travel at the speed of light, it would be like 7.5 times around the earth.

Light for everyone is a necessary component, just like the lamp and the sun. When the lights go out, we usually complain because we can’t get any light. Meanwhile, if there is no sun during the day we will be confused about how to dry clothes.

The Nature of Light That Causes Rainbows

After knowing the properties of light, it can be said that almost all the properties of light can cause a rainbow to occur, such as the nature of light can be described, with the nature of this light, the colors in a rainbow can appear.

White sunlight actually consists of several colors. The ability of light to separate its colors is what causes the rainbow process to occur. White is a collection of various colors. So also white light, white light is polychromatic alias can be separated into other colors

The decomposition of white into several other colors is called dispersion. Dispersion arises because there is a difference in the index of refraction between each light so that when it passes through a light medium, several colors similar to a rainbow come out.

In addition, the nature of light can be deflected can be regarded as a factor in the appearance of a rainbow. In the process of the occurrence of a rainbow, the nature of this light appears when light (sunlight) passes through water droplets originating from the earth’s atmosphere.

2. Water

Another component that causes a rainbow is water. The water in question is not just rainwater, but water that can come from anywhere. In other words, as long as there is water and light, rainbows can form.

The size of the raindrops that light passes through affects the complete color of the sun. The size of small raindrops is only about 0.01 millimeters while for large ones it is 2 millimeters. The larger the size of the water droplets that are passed, the more complete the rainbow colors that appear. Meanwhile, if the grain is small, the colors that appear will overlap and even fade. So, if we see a beautiful rainbow, it means that the water droplets passing through are large.

The rainbow process

1. Refraction of sunlight

The formation of a rainbow is caused by the process of refraction of light (sunlight) which is deflected so that it moves from one medium to another with the help of water droplets originating from the earth’s atmosphere.

2. Sunlight passes through water droplets

After sunlight passes through the water droplets, what will happen is that the light (sunlight) will be bent or bent so that the colors of the light will separate from each other and give rise to new colors.

3. Light deflection

Every color that comes out of the deflection of light usually has a variety of colors. These colors are what we know today as the rainbow.

4. The appearance of rainbow colors

If we have ever heard the term “mejikuhibiniu” it means that indirectly we have the order of the colors of the rainbow from end to end. In other words, red is the last color to be deflected, while purple is the first color to be deflected.

The rainbow is known to be very beautiful with its distinctive colors because these colors can make our eyes want to keep seeing it.

Behind the beautiful colors of the rainbow there is a very complicated process. This complicated process causes rainbows to be rarely seen by us. That’s why when a rainbow appears before us, we will feel very happy because we rarely see a rainbow appear.

There is a fact that says that the appearance of a rainbow at or shortly after it falls is more likely to occur. Therefore, when we were children, we would always wait for a rainbow to appear when it started to rain.

Rainbow Types 

1. Primary Rainbow

The rainbow that we often see is the primary rainbow. The formation of the primary rainbow is due to the process of refraction and reflection of light that enters the raindrops.

The colors that will appear after the refraction process are purple, blue, green, yellow, orange, and red. The red color of the rainbow forms an angle with sunlight, that angle is approximately 42 degrees.

2.Secondary Bow 

A secondary bow type rainbow is a rainbow in the form of a secondary arc. This type of rainbow is included in a rare type of rainbow. Why can it be said to be a rare type of rainbow? This is because the appearance of the secondary bow rainbow can only be seen after the primary rainbow appears

Thus, this secondary bow rainbow is included in the secondary rainbow. The colors in the secondary rainbow appear dimmer compared to the primary rainbow.

3. Waterfall Rainbows

Waterfall rainbows or what we usually know as rainbow waterfalls. Waterfall rainbows are rainbows that only appear or can be seen above a waterfall. In general, the appearance of waterfall rainbows occurs because of the fog on the waterfall that enters or mixes with the airflow around it. Continuously.

4. Lunar Rainbows

Did you know that there is a type of rainbow that is caused by the light coming from the moon? Rainbows caused by light from the moon are known as lunar rainbows .

Basically, the process of appearing lunar rainbows is almost the same as that of primary rainbows. The thing that distinguishes the lunar rainbow is the light source.

Rainbow types of lunar rainbow will look brighter when the full moon appears. Why is it only during a full moon that the lunar rainbow appears brighter? Because the light on the full moon is brighter than other months.

5. Sundogs

A rainbow of sundogs can be said to be a rainbow that only appears in winter and when the weather is sunny. The appearance of rainbow sundogs generally occurs when sunlight shines through ice crystals that are very high in the atmosphere.

Conclusion 

All the beautiful colors in the rainbow are very beautiful. All that beauty cannot be separated from the factors that cause rainbows to appear. Water and light are the two main factors that cause a rainbow.

Author: Irma Tri Handayani & Restu Nasik Kamaluddin

sinaumedia.com

Book Title: Rainbow and Rain: Between Memories and Wishes

ebooks.sinaumedia.com

Book Title: Rain and Rainbow

Book Title: A Million Rainbow Colors

• What is Flora and Fauna? This is the full explanation
• Understanding Coal and Its Importance for Life
• Negative Impacts of Air Pollution & Solutions
• Soil Pollution: Causes, Impact, Examples and Solutions
• Distribution of Flora and Fauna in Indonesia and in the World

How Fish Sleep – Has Sinaumed’s ever observed fish movements, either in an aquarium or in a pond? When observing these movements, has it ever occurred to Sinaumed’s whether fish are sleeping or not?

The answer is of course yes! Fish, like other living things, also sleep. Fish both need rest, but the way they sleep is certainly different from other living things. How does it feel to sleep underwater…

Then, how about sleeping from a fish because its eyes never blink and close. Is it true that the fish sleeps deliberately widening its eyes, aka literate?

So, so that Sinaumed’s isn’t curious, let’s look at the following review!

The Process of Sleeping Fish

Please note that most fish do not have eyelids, except for sharks. Therefore, if you pay close attention, the fish will always open their eyes so it will be difficult to tell which fish are asleep or not.

Most of these fish lack a neocortex (a set of cortical layers of the cerebrum, usually in mammals, that is used in higher-order brain functions) and an eyelid. By not having these two parts of the organ, it causes the side of the fish’s brain to close and their eyes cannot close.

In fact, when a fish is asleep it is not really asleep, but only half awake. In fact, the fish’s tail can still be moved to ensure that the flow of water is maintained towards the gills. This is done so that the fish do not lack oxygen and keep breathing.

Not sleeping the fish is also to avoid himself from all threats of danger or attacks from other fish which can later cause him to be injured to death. So, it can also be said that fish sleep in a state of alert.

When in an aquarium or pond, the fish will fall asleep by floating their bodies in the water. However, when in the ocean, fish will fall asleep in their hiding places, namely behind coral reefs so that they are not caught by bigger fish.

Even unique, some types of fish will sleep by pretending to be dead fish by laying their bodies on the bottom of the water.

Different types of fish, different ways of sleeping. Sharks that have eyelids even sleep without closing their eyes, accompanied by slow swimming movements. If a comparison is made, then the sleep of the fish is almost the same when humans are daydreaming.

Then there is also a type of parrot fish or parrot fish that has a “sleeping bag” in the form of a slimy jelly. The “sleeping bag” seems to wrap around his body and become his bedroom when he sleeps so that he can be free from predators.

When Do Fish Sleep?

In general, most of the fish are diurnal. Contrary to nocturnal, diurnal is a term for animals that carry out activities during the day and sleep when night falls. Almost the same as humans huh…

This is because during the day the habitat will definitely get a supply of sunlight as lighting, making it easy to find food.

However, the exact time the fish sleeps depends on the fish species. Some sleep during the day, but some sleep at night. There are also some fish that can only sleep for a certain time, for example during migration.

Then, there are also those who don’t even sleep at all until they are adults, for example tilapia fish. Tilapia fish will usually sleep when they are more than 22 weeks old. If the ornamental fish are usually placed in the aquarium, then they tend to sleep when the aquarium lights are turned off.

Characteristics of a Sleeping Fish

If Gramed is still curious about the characteristics of a sleeping fish, let’s look at its special features:

• Pause the movement of fish when swimming more regularly, especially at certain times.
• Fish become “inactive” for quite a long time.
• Fish in a calm posture, as if resting.
• His sensitivity to external stimulants decreased.

Fish Bed

If placed in an aquarium and there are rocks as decorations, the fish will usually hide behind the rocks. However, it is possible that fish can also sleep like swimming as usual. When in an aquarium, fish tend to be “relaxed” in sleeping behavior because there are not so many disturbances or threats from predators.

Meanwhile, when fish are in the ocean, they will behave especially at night by choosing nests with a distinctive shape, such as holes or crevices in caves, under ledges, in sponges, and some even bury themselves in the sand.

Unique Ways of Fish When Sleeping

There are many species of fish, so that between species, one with another, of course, has a unique way of behaving in sleep. What are the fish that have a unique way of behaving in their sleep? Come on, see the following reviews!

1. Loach fish

The loach fish, which belongs to the order Cobitidae , turns out to have a unique way of behaving when it sleeps, namely by turning or stretching its body, as if it were dead.

If you keep this type of fish, then suddenly its body flips over, don’t panic. He could just be sleeping to rest his body.

2. Coral Fish

There are many types of reef fish that can be consumed, ranging from Serranidae (grouper), Caesionidae , (Yellow Tail/Banana-Banana), Scaridae (Cockatooo/Mogong), Balistidae (Poge/Trigger), Pomacanthidae (Enjel/Goat), and Siganidae (Baronang/ Keakea/ Lingkis).

Well, this time we will discuss one of these types of reef fish, namely the Damselfish. The distinctive feature of this fish is its bright color, so many people are interested in keeping it.

When sleeping, Damselfish tend to hide between coral branches. This is also a way to avoid predators that will prey on it.

3. Cockatoo Fish

The Cockatoo Fish or often referred to as the Parrot Fish also has a unique way of behaving when sleeping, namely by wrapping its body using a kind of slimy jelly-shaped bag.

The slimy sac is produced by the Cockatoo Fish through its mouth. Not only used as a “sleeping bag”, it turns out that the slimy bag can also protect it from Gnothi Isopods attacks .

Gnothi Isopods are a type of sea-sucking shrimp. If in the sea, these shrimp can be referred to as “sea mosquitoes”, and it turns out they are a type of fish parasite.

4. Sharks

Surely Sinaumed’s is no stranger to this big fish, right? Yep, this fish is feared by many other fish because of its sharp teeth and is the most ferocious predator in all of the oceans. Not only prey on fellow fish, but also humans.

The unique way sharks behave when they sleep is to sleep for a while, even just blinking their eyes a few times. Remember, that some fish don’t have eyelids, except for sharks.

There is even research on sleep behavior patterns in these sharks. When sleeping, sharks tend to stay still, with their eyes continuously open and their pupils still monitoring the movements around them.

There are even several species of sharks that can sleep and not move at all, for example the Lemon Shark, Caribbean Reef Shark, Wobbegong Shark, and others.

5. Dolphins

It should be understood that dolphins are not actually fish, because they do not have gills as breathing apparatus and the breeding process is not by laying eggs. Instead of using gills, dolphins have lungs that can be used as a breathing device and when the process of reproduction is by giving birth. Therefore, dolphins are included in the type of mammal.

Many people misunderstand that dolphins are a type of fish because of their habitat in water, when in fact dolphins are aquatic mammals.

By making the lungs a breathing apparatus, of course the dolphins have to hold their breath for 15 minutes and then “jump” to the surface to take a breath. Then dive back into the ocean.

Even when sleeping, dolphins “unknowingly” will also push their bodies to the surface to take a breath. If not done, the dolphins will run out of breath and may die.

Fish Unique Facts

This type of animal that relies on gills as a breathing device and lives in water is very familiar with everyday human life. Not only useful as pets, but also can be consumed as side dishes that have high nutrition.

Then, what are the unique facts about fish that not everyone knows? Come on, see the following reviews!

• Through evidence in the form of fossils, states that fish have lived on this planet Earth for approximately 530 million years ago.
• There are more than 32,000 species of fish spread all over the world. This number is even more than the number of all types of vertebrate animals.
• Many types of marine animals are often mistaken for fish when they are not, such as octopuses, starfish, jellyfish and crayfish.
• Orca whales are the most ferocious type of fish in the ocean and can live for 80 years.
• The brain of a dolphin is about the size of a human brain. Therefore this fish is a smart animal.
• Dolphins can dive more than 500 meters even though they rely on their lungs as a means of breathing.

• Fish don’t have eyelids, except for sharks. Therefore, when sleeping, they tend not to close their eyes.
• This type of herring fish can communicate with other fish using its farts.
• Even though they live in water, it turns out that fish can see 70 times farther in the air than in water.
• This type of Goldfish fish if placed in a dark place, the color will disappear. In addition, these fish can also see the presence of infrared radiation that humans cannot even see.
• There is a type of Climbing Gourami (Climbing Gourami) which is able to jump out of the water and then breathe oxygen. Even this fish can also walk using its fins, at close range.
• The blobfish actually has a shape like a normal fish, but its shape will change if it is lifted from a very deep sea. This is because his body loses air pressure when lifted.
• Fish can cough.
• The stingray’s eyes are on top of the body making it difficult to find prey swimming under its body.
• Fish that live in polluted places will lose their sense of smell.
• The Frilled Shark is a relic fish from the Cretaceous period and is one of the most primitive shark species still alive today.
• The most primitive types of fish that are still alive today are the Lamprey Eels and Hagfish.
• In the Greenland region, there are sharks that can even eat polar bears and live up to 200 years.
• Most of the stingray’s body is made of cartilage, which makes it more flexible when moving in water.

• The smallest fish in the world is Paedocypris Progenetica which lives in the forest swamps of Sumatra Island. When mature, this fish only has a size of 7.9 millimeters.
• The technique of salting fish to become salted fish was first carried out in Northern Europe which then spread to other regions.
• All Clownfish are born male. However, it can also change its sex to female when “needed” for reproduction.
• One of the shortest fish in the world is the Pygmy Fish from the Philippines which has the size of rice.
• The Mola Mola (Sunfish) does not have a tail.
• Catfish have more than 27,000 taste buds. While humans only have 7000 spots.
• This type of Mudskipper fish is able to spend time outside the water and can even walk using its fins. When on land, this fish will breathe through the pores of its skin.
• The electricity generated by the Electric Catfish is around 350 volts and can cause numbness for a few moments when it is stung.
• Mustache or antennae on catfish serve to determine the condition of the place and look for prey at night. It should be noted that catfish are nocturnal animals.
• Betta fish are able to heal damaged fins on their own, especially after fighting with their opponents.
• This type of fish, Tigerfish Goliath, is capable of eating small crocodiles or juvenile crocodiles.
• Sardine is not a fish species name, but a trademark name for canned fish. While the types of fish used are Herring and Pilchard fish.

• The phenomenon of raining fish is when a tornado lifts fish from the ocean towards the land, so it looks like it’s raining fish.
• This type of fish, Salema Porgy, can cause hallucinations when consumed.
• Puffer Fish (Puffer Fish) will inflate its body when it feels threatened. Even so, this fish also contains a deadly poison, namely tetrodotoxin. If you want to consume it, must be prepared by someone who is reliable.
• The Tetrodotoxin poison in the Pufferfish’s body is considered 1,200 times more deadly than cyanide and is capable of killing around 30 people.
• Seahorses are a type of fish and are the slowest fish, even barely moving at all.
• The heaviest fish is the Blue Whale. They can weigh up to 200 tons, which is equivalent to 23 elephants, 230 cows, or 1800 people.
• Piranha fish have sharp teeth and the notion that they prey on humans alive is wrong. However, they can prey on human carcasses.
• Fish can also drown. If the body does not have enough oxygen, it can cause the fish to suffocate.

Well, that’s an explanation of how fish can fall asleep. It’s the same as humans when they fall asleep, try not to disturb their resting process . If the fish in your aquarium show signs of sleeping fish, it’s better to let them be. Fish is also one of the choices for side dishes recommended by health experts because it has high nutrition.

Also Read!

1. Classification and Examples of Insects
2. Types of Natural Resources and How to Preserve Them
3. Definition of Animal Food Ingredients
4. Prayer for Slaughtering Animals
5. Definition and Classification of Vertebrate Animals
6. Definition of Hibernation and Examples of Animals That Do It
7. What are Mammals?
8. Animal Names in English
9. Examples of Minimalist Fish Pond Designs
10. Differences between Animal Cells and Plant Cells

The process of the rainbow – A natural phenomenon that usually occurs when after the rain has stopped, the rainbow can be categorized as one of the most beautiful natural wonders. The beauty lies in the colors that are displayed in bright and varied colors. The rainbow is one of the moments that is quite iconic when we see it directly with the naked eye because this natural phenomenon cannot take place every day and doesn’t even always appear after the rain stops.

Rainbows are usually present when there is refraction of light emitted through sunlight in direct contact with gas, water, and light molecules at the same time. Therefore, not every day we can see the rainbow phenomenon in our daily lives because it turns out that there are several other natural factors that participate in the process of rainbow occurrence.

For some people, they may just enjoy the rainbow when they see it, but rarely know the triggering factors and the process of rainbow occurrence. Then, what are the trigger factors for the rainbow? How does the rainbow process occur? You can find the answer below. However, it’s good for us to learn together about the meaning of the rainbow first.

Meaning of Rainbow

A rainbow is a rare weather event caused by the reflection, refraction and bending of light in water droplets that create a spectrum of light in the sky. Rainbows often form an arc of colored circles. Rainbows caused by sunlight are always present in the gaps in the sky that meet directly with the sun.

A rainbow can be a perfect circle. But unfortunately, people who saw would generally only see the arc created by the grains of light on the ground, and focus on the straight line from the sun to the eyes of the people who were looking.

In the main rainbow, the bows are red on the outside and purple on the inside. This rainbow is caused by light that is refracted when it enters the drop, then is reflected to the back of the drop and is refracted when it exits.

In a twin rainbow, the second ray is visible outside the primary ray, and the order of the colors is reversed, with red on the inside. This is because light is reflected twice inside the drop before leaving it.

Rainbow Form

Rainbows are not necessarily at a certain distance from the viewing public, but are caused by an optical illusion effected by water droplets looking at a certain angle to a light source. So, the rainbow is not an object and is inaccessible in its gross form.

This is because one cannot see a rainbow at any angle other than 2 degrees away from the light source.

Furthermore, if one observer looks at another observer who appears “below” or “at the corner” of the rainbow, the other observer will only see a different, farther rainbow from the same angle as the first observer.

A rainbow has a continuous range of colors. However, all the bands are not always the same as they appear in the human color vision illusion, and no bands of any kind are visible in a black and white image of a rainbow. In other words, just subtle gradations with intense degrees to optimal, then thinning to other angles.

As for the color combinations seen by the human eye, the most frequently cited and remembered sequences are the seven mentioned by Isaac Newton: red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo and purple, when repeated with an acronym, it becomes mejikuhibiniu.

Rainbows can be created due to the various forms of water molecules in the air. This situation includes not only rain, but also fog, condensation processes, and air evaporation.

Rainbow Time

The time a rainbow occurs is usually when there are water droplets in the air and the sunlight is behind the observer at high and low angles. For this reason, a rainbow is often seen in the western sky at dawn and in the eastern sky at dusk.

The most extraordinary rainbows occur when part of the sky is still dark with clouds during rain and the observer is in a position with the sky brightly lit towards the sun. The result is a bright rainbow that stands out against a dark background.

Under conditions of good visibility, a spare rainbow that is more gigantic in size but weaker when observed. Backup rainbows occur about 10 degrees from the boundary of the main rainbow and are in reverse color order.

The effects of rainbows are also often seen near waterfalls or fountains or the effect, can be created artificially by dispersing water droplets in the air on a sunny day. Although rare, rainbows, or moonlight rainbows at night, can be seen on moonlit nights. Due to human’s poorer color perception in low light, moon signs are usually white.

Main Trigger Factors for the Appearance of Rainbows

The main trigger factor for the occurrence of a rainbow is the position of the sun must be right on the horizon. Sunlight should not be blocked by clouds, mountains or anything else. Then, the position of the sun must also be slightly lower. If we are in the same position as the horizon, then the sun must be at an angle of 2 degrees to be able to see the rainbow from where we are.

In addition, you must remember that a rainbow always appears in the part of the sky that faces the sun. So when you see a rainbow, the sun will be behind you. Then, the air on the other side of the sky from you must contain lots of water droplets, for example after rain.

Rainbows don’t just appear after rain, but can form as long as they meet the requirements. For example, throwing water into the air at a waterfall or on a beach near a cliff and at this location you can see a rainbow.

Another trigger factor is refraction. Rainbows that occur due to refraction are caused by the sun refracting its light on water droplets, thus creating a very amazing color combination. When refraction occurs, light will travel from air to water.

In each combination the rainbow colors will be bent in different parts, finally reflecting the amazing rainbow colors. The first color to appear to fold is purple, while the last color to fold is red.

Therefore, the rainbow will show beautiful colors, namely red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. As many people know that rainbows are most often seen when sunlight falls on raindrops.

In general, this rare phenomenon occurs in the morning or evening. When the sun is too far from the horizon, the rainbow is not visible. However, when the sun is lower in the sky, part of its arc will be visible. When the sun is low enough and at a high enough position, such as on a mountain or hill, a rainbow will appear circular

The Rainbow Process

Rainbow is a rare natural event and is an optical process. The process of forming the sun has 3 stages, namely reflection or reflection, scattering or dispersion, and refraction.

Reflection or Reflection

The first process is reflection. Water droplets in the air can act as tiny mirrors. When sunlight hits water droplets, most of the light is reflected back. When it rains, the air contains many water droplets that form curtains, and each of these tiny water droplets will reflect the shining sunlight. However, you must be wondering. Sunlight is white, why is the rainbow colored? The answer to this question concerns the second process, namely dispersion.

Scattering or Dispersion

Light scattering is the phenomenon of light dissolving. Sunlight looks white, but when sunlight hits and is reflected by water droplets, the light will be scattered and expanded to produce rainbow colors.

Refraction of light

The third process is light refraction. When sunlight enters water droplets and reflects in a slightly different direction, it is called light refraction. Each color will be refracted in a different direction. The difference in the direction of this light is affected by each wavelength of each light.

Because that’s what causes the rainbow light to spread and widen like a fan. Red light has the longest wavelength, which is 650 nanometers. Red will appear as the outermost color of the rainbow arc. Meanwhile, purple has the shortest wavelength, which is 00 nanometers.

Why is a rainbow synonymous with beautiful color combinations?
“If the sunlight is clear, why is the rainbow colored?” Such a question may be in the minds of some people.

The occurrence of beautiful color combinations in a rainbow is because this is related to the dispersion process, especially the phenomenon of light dissolution. Sunlight looks white, but when sunlight hits or is reflected by water droplets, the light will be scattered and expanded, resulting in beautiful colors or better known to us as a rainbow.

During refraction, sunlight passes through water droplets and is reflected in a slightly different direction. This is called light refraction. Each color will generally experience refraction in a different direction. The difference in the direction of light is affected by the wavelength of each light.

This rainbow light wave will usually expand to form a fan. The red color in the rainbow is estimated to have a wavelength of light of 650 nanometers. While the purple color is estimated to have a wavelength of about 00 nanometers.

Why Do Color Combinations Occur in a Rainbow?

Why do rainbow colors look so good? The colors of the rainbow are beautiful due to the mixing of light refraction. In addition, there is reflection of sunlight from water droplets in the atmosphere. The angle of the light rays that reach the eye from the point of contact with the fall must be within a certain distance and the correct distance, so that the rainbow can have various color combinations.

The variations in rainbow colors are caused by the refraction of “white light” from the sun as it enters the droplets. Then, sunlight has a pool of all the colors that blend out of the visible spectrum, which are actually white in their natural form.

The best time to find a rainbow is right after the storm has passed. Indeed, during thunderstorms, clouds tend to block sunlight. However, when the storm ends, the water droplets that have not fallen to the earth when it rains will quickly evaporate. Of course, you also need the reflected light of the sun to see a rainbow. The sun should be behind you. If you can see your own shadow, a rainbow will appear towards that shadow.

Why is the shape of a rainbow like a half circle?

A rainbow is shaped like a semi-circle because we only see the curved light reflected from the water droplets. The center of the rainbow circle is called the antipolar point which is directly opposite the sun. The rainbow only looks like a half circle because the other half of the light hits the ground, so it looks like there’s no rainbow.

However, if you are on the top of a very high mountain or hill, you can see the sun in a perfect circle. For example while on a plane, or on the edge of a very high cliff.

Rainbow Types

Classic Rainbow

The classic rainbow is the rainbow we see most often. Rainbows are formed from internal refraction and reflection of light rays that enter the raindrops. The primary rainbow colors from the inside out include purple, blue, green, yellow, orange and red. The red band makes a 2 degree angle to the sun, while the other color bands make a smaller angle.

Rainbow Reserve

Meanwhile, another rainbow that looks less intense is the secondary rainbow or reserve rainbow. This type of rainbow is one of the few because it will only appear when the primary rainbow appears first.

The secondary rainbow will display colors that are dimmer than the primary rainbow and will display colors that are reversed from the primary rainbow. If you’ve ever seen two rainbows with different color intensities, it could be a type of secondary rainbow.

Moon Bow Rainbow

As the name implies, a moon arc rainbow will look like an arc that usually appears at night. The rainbow, also known as the lunar rainbow, is a rainbow that is much more difficult to find.

In order to appear, rainstorms usually have to occur during a full moon. When the storm has passed, Moonbows will be visible if the full moon’s brightness is not obscured by clouds.

Moon Rainbow

Rainbows are not only created by the sun but also by the moon. This type of rainbow is called a lunar rainbow. A rainbow only needs water droplets and a light source, such as a bright full moon. Light can be refracted by raindrops when they occur in sunlight.

Red Rainbow

Unlike other types of rainbow which have many colors, this type of red rainbow is mostly red. A red rainbow usually appears in the morning and at dusk in the evening. The thickness of Earth’s atmosphere filters out the blue, which then appears redder as the orange light droplets reflect and refract the water. The end result is a rainbow with a red end of the spectrum.

Sun Rainbow

This type of rainbow usually appears in winter and sunny weather. Solar rainbows are common when the sun shines through ice crystals high in the atmosphere. Solar rainbows often show reflections of light red on the inside and purple on the outside, followed by the other colors of the rainbow. If the concentration of ice crystals in the air thickens, then the rainbow-colored structures that appear also thicken.

Mist Bow Rainbow

The appearance of a foggy rainbow or fogbow is difficult to see when compared to other types of rainbows. Because, this kind of rainbow will only occur if some parameters are adjusted to create a fog arc rainbow. For example, the light source should be behind the viewer and grounded. In addition, the layer of fog behind the observer must also be very thin for sunlight to shine through the thick fog ahead.

Rainbow Waterfall

Waterfall rainbow or can be called cascading rainbow is a type of rainbow that we rarely see because it can only be seen above the waterfall. Waterfall rainbows are usually found when the mist from a waterfall mixes with air currents that have a constant atmospheric constant.

Conclusion

Seeing a rainbow is really fun especially when you see it in an unusual place. So, when was the last time you saw a rainbow? So a brief discussion of the phenomenon of how the rainbow process occurs. Hopefully all of this discussion can be useful for Sinaumed’s.

For Sinaumed’s who want to learn all about the process of rainbow formation , the various types, characteristics, and other natural sciences, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books.

As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest information for you. Reading lots of books and articles will never hurt you, because Sinaumed’s will get #MoreWithReading information and knowledge.

Author: Pandu Akram

Also read:

Hours in English with Examples and How to Read It – Reading hours is one of the basic vocabulary that is often used in conversation, both in Indonesian and English.

Therefore, if You wants to master English, especially proficient in conversation in English, he needs to master the vocabulary of hours and how to read them in English.

Before knowing the clock in English, You also needs to know that in English, there are various ways to read the clock.

In accordance with the function and conditions required. In order for You to be proficient in reading hours in English, watch this article until the end!

Hours in English, Examples and How to Read It

AM is short for “ante meridiem” which is used to show or mention the time or hour between 00.00 and 12.00 midnight. Meanwhile, PM is an abbreviation of “post meridiem” which is used to show or mention the time or hour between 12.00 noon to 00.00 at night.

How to read the clock using AM and PM is the easiest way and is widely used by many people. However, as previously explained, there are several ways to read hours in English. Here’s a further explanation.

The Formal Way to Read the Hours in English

There are four ways that can be applied to read hours formally in English. Here’s an explanation.

a. Using o’clock

The first formal expression of hours in English is to use o’clock. The use of o’clock is used when the long hour hand points at 12.

In Indonesian, o’clock can also be interpreted as ‘accurate’, namely showing the exact time at a certain time. The way to read formal hours using the o’clock is to follow the clock in front of it, followed by the o’clock.

Example: At 08.00 then read eight o’clock. 09.00 is read nine o’clock. At 10.00 is read as ten o’clock and so on.

b. Using quarter past

The second formal way of expressing time is by using the quarter past which can be used to show the hour when the long hand is at 3.

The way to read it is slightly different from how to read it when the long hour hand points exactly at number 12. Namely the quarter past first, then the hour number in question.

Example: 4.15 then read quarter past four. 5.15 read quarter past five. 6.15 read quarter past six and so on.

c. Using quarter tos

As with using the quarter past, the use of quarter to is used when the long hand of the clock shows the number 9 and how to read it is not much different from reading the quarter past.

For example, at 10.45 in English it is read as quarter to eleven or a quarter to eleven. This means that the hour hand at that time showed 11 to 15 minutes or 10:45.

d. Using half past

The last way to express hours or time in a formal way is to use the half past. The use of this half past can be used if the long hour hand shows the number 6. Here’s an example.

Example: 7.30 then in English it is read as half past seven which means seven over 30 minutes. Another example, when the clock shows the number 12.30 then in English it is read half past twelve which means 12 o’clock 30 minutes past.

How to Express Hours by Using Past, To, After and Before

It should be noted, to express the hour by using past, to, after, and before is a non-formal way of expressing the hour in conversation. So, if you want to use this method, it is better to look at the context of the conversation or the other person first.

Past, to, after and before mean more and less in Indonesian. This way of expressing hours is fairly new and you can see the difference by adding the word minutes, except to show hours which are multiples of the number 5. How? Does You understand? If not, consider the example below.

a. Examples of using past in hours

• 10.20 read twenty past ten.
• 9.15 is read as fifteen past nine.
• 10.05 read five past ten.
• 15.15 is read as fifteen past fifteen.

It should be noted, when using past to indicate hours, the word minutes that passed is mentioned first, followed by the word past, then the hour is mentioned.

So that the use of the word past to indicate the hour information can be formulated as follows. Minute + past + hour or minutes + past + hour.

b. Examples of using to in hours

Just like using the past, when mentioning hours using to, the minute of the hour is mentioned first, then to, then the hour. To in Indonesian means less, and is commonly used to refer to hours whose minutes are less than the 31st minute to the 59th minute. The formula that can be used is minute + to + hour or minute + to + hour. Here’s an example.

• 12.35 is read twenty five to one, meaning 1 hour minus 25 minutes.
• 03.40 is read twenty to four, meaning 4 hours to 20 minutes.
• 02.45 is read as fifteen to three, meaning 3 hours to 15 minutes.
• 03.50 is read as ten to four, meaning 10 minutes to four.
• 06.55 is read seven to five, meaning 5 minutes to seven.

c. Examples of using half past in hours

To use half past, note that this usage can only be used to express hours past 30 minutes. Here’s an example of its use.

• 11.30 read half past eleven (11 o’clock 30 minutes)
• 12.30 read half past twelve (12 hours and 30 minutes)
• 08.30 read half past eight (8 hours and 30 minutes)
• 05.30 read half past five (5 hours and 30 minutes)
• 03.30 read half past three (3 hours and 30 minutes)
• 04.30 read half past four (4 hours and 30 minutes)

If you look at the example above, the use of half past to express hours is like using after and to. The difference is, You doesn’t need to mention the minutes. So, the following formula can be used half past + hour.

Note that using before is the same as using to. As for the half past, it’s the same as using after.

In conclusion, the use of past, after or half past can be used to indicate hours showing 1 to 30 minutes. As for before, and to indicate hours showing 31 to 59 minutes.

Easy Ways to Say Hours in English

Apart from the two ways above, there is also an easy way to express hours in English. It should be noted, that an easy way to express this hour is a non-formal way. To use the easy way of expressing hours, numbers or hours need to be expressed sequentially.

Here’s an example of its use.

• 02.49 read two forty nine.
• 09.17 read nine seventeen.
• 05.55 read five fifty five.
• 06.23 read six twenty three.
• 07.59 read seven fifty nine.
• 05.05 read five oh five.

From the example above, it can be seen that the number 0 when denoting the hour is also read. But the zero when mentioning the minutes in the hour is read with oh and not zero.

How to Express the Time Using AM and PM

As previously explained above, am stands for Ante Meridiem while pm stands for Post Meridiem. The use of am and pm is very commonly used in everyday conversations to indicate hours.

Different from Indonesian, expressing hours in English only uses the 12 hour format. AM can be used to show hours starting in the early hours of the morning, ie from 00.00 to one minute before the clock hands show 12 noon or 11.59.

Meanwhile, PM can be used to express the hour starting at 12 noon until one minute before the clock shows midnight or 11.59.

How to reveal hours using AM and PM is quite easy. So that You can understand and apply how to read AM and PM hours more easily. The following is an example of how to express hours with AM and PM

• 08.30 AM is read in English eight thirty AM or half past eight AM
• 10.15 AM is read as ten fifteen AM or fifteen past three AM or quarter past three Am
• 11.15 PM read eleven fifteen PM

To say the hour in English, You can choose the previous non-formal way then add PM or AM You are also allowed to use the easy way, which is simply to mention the hours and minutes and add AM and PM information

Now. Those are four ways to express adverbs of time in English. To make it even clearer, here’s how to express hours in English when applied in a conversation. Pay attention to the placement of each use, You!

Examples of Conversation by Expressing Hours in English

1. A : What time is it? We are going to be late! (what time is it? We’re going to be late!)

B : It’s still nine o’clock, don’t panic, we are on time. (It’s still nine, don’t panic, we’re on time.)

A : I thought we should be there by nine thirty because of the meeting. (I guess we should get there by 9:30 because there is a meeting.)

B : That’s true, but we will be there soon, see we are close to our office now. (That’s right, but we’ll be there soon, look we’re close to our office now.)

2. A : What time does your plan take off? (When will our plane leave?)

B : I’m not sure, but I think it’s at twenty five to one. I will call the airline to confirm my flight schedule. (I’m not sure, but I think it’s 12:35. I’ll call the airline to confirm the flight schedule.)

A : Why didn’t you do that earlier? (Why not do that earlier?)

B : I do not know, you are just asking it now. (I don’t know, you’re just asking that now.)

A : Okay call the airline now while I am getting ready. (Okay call the airline now while I’ll get ready.)

3. A : What time does the bus leave to the airport? (what time does the bus leave for the airport?)

B : I don’t really know, it used to leave for every half an hour, but I think they reschedule it. (I don’t really know, but the bus used to leave every half hour, but maybe they changed the schedule.)

A : So, do you know the telephone number? I want to make sure. (So ​​do you know a phone number to call? I want to be sure.)

B : OK the number is 7- 4700. (OK the number is 7- 4700.)

A : Yeah I’m gonna call them. (pause) They don’t seem to answer my call. (Yeah I’ll call them. (pause) They don’t seem to be picking up my calls.)

B : Maybe because it’s too early. It’s still seven to five AM, try it later. (Probably because it’s still too early. It’s still 6:55AM, try again later.)

4. A : When shall we meet tomorrow? (When will we meet tomorrow?)

B : You mean about the party tomorrow? (You mean about tomorrow’s party?)

A : Yeah, We really need to plan better this time about the party. You remember what a mess it was at the last party? (Yeah, we really should plan the party better now. You remember how messed up the last party was?)

B : Yeah I sure do, I hope we will do much better this time. (Yeah of course I remember, I hope we’ll do better now.)

A : That’s why, we are going to meet tomorrow at your house. How to say seventy PM to you? (Because of that, we will meet at your house. How about 07.30 PM?)

B : Yeah it’s fine, see you tomorrow. (yeah that’s fine, see you tomorrow.)

Those are some examples of hour disclosures when applied in a conversation.

So, until the end of this article, did You understand how to express hours in English? Starting from the formal, non-formal, easy way to the common way?

Hooke’s Law – If we learn about physics, of course we will find various kinds of laws that apply. Just as when we are studying the elasticity of an object, of course we will find about Hooke’s law. This is one of the laws in physics that often appears in daily questions, tests or national exams.

Therefore, it is important for you, especially those who are still in high school, to learn about hooke’s law in depth. So, in this article, we will discuss Hooke’s law more fully and with a simple discussion that is easy to understand.

What is Hooke’s Law?

Hooke’s law is a law or provision regarding forces in the field of physics that occur due to the elastic properties of a pear or spring. According to Robert Hooke, a scientist who discovered Hooke’s Law, objects are divided into two types, namely plastic objects and elastic objects. Where a plastic object is an object that changes when subjected to a force and the object cannot return to its original shape after the applied force is gone. Meanwhile, elastic objects are objects that change when subjected to a force and the object can return to its original shape when the force is removed. For example, bows, peers, rubber bands, and catapults.

Robert Hooke conducted an experiment to observe the relationship between the changes that occur between elastic objects and the force exerted on them. From these experiments, Hooke found a law about the relationship between force and changes in spring force which is now known as Hooke’s law. The magnitude of the hook force will be proportionally proportional to the distance the spring travels in its initial position. If explained through a mathematical formula, it can be described as follows:

F = -kx

Information:

F is the force or units of newtons
k is the spring constant or newtons per meter
x is the distance the spring travels from its normal position or units of meters

The ability of an object to return to its original shape when an external force is removed. If a force is applied to an elastic object, the shape of the object will change. For rubber and springs, what is meant by a change in shape is the increase in length of the two objects. Objects that are elastic also have a limit of elasticity. There are two kinds of objects, namely elastic objects and inelastic objects or often called plastic.

History of Hooke’s Law

Robert Hooke is a scientist who was born in Freshwater, Isle of Wight, England on July 18, 1635. He was an inventor, mathematician and chemist, philosopher, and architect. Hooke was a pastor’s son. Where his father named John Hooke who works as a curator at the All Saints Church museum. When he was small, Hooke often studied with his father, because his parents were poor, so Hooke was not free to choose where he studied. Finally, Hooke became interested in art and then he was sent to London to begin studying with a painter named Peter Lely.

Hooke then changed his interest and decided to enroll at Westminster school to study classics as well as mathematics. Then, he studied at Robert Boyle University because of a recommendation from a Chemistry Professor named Thomas Willis who tutored Hooke. At that time, Thomas Willis had just come from Oxford and was looking for an assistant who he wanted to make as a partner to help in making air pumps. At the time, it had taken Robert Hooke at Boyle two decades to make any quite remarkable advances in mechanics.

Then in 1662, Hooke was accepted as a member of the Curator of the Royal Society whose main task was to propose and also make various kinds of experiments to be submitted at the group’s weekly meeting. Two years later, Hooke won a position as professor of geometry at Gresham College. He replaced the position of Isaac Borrow who had previously appeared in that position. In the midst of his busy life as Curator of the Royal Society in 1665, Hooke managed to publish a book entitled Micrographia. The book is a book in biology which is the only book made by him. But it also contains a number of beautiful and unusual things from someone who has drawing skills.

Hooke’s expertise as a versatile scientist was displayed in 1666, during the great fire in the City of London. Hooke, who has the ability to draw like an architect, makes master plans and plans for rebuilding buildings that have been damaged by fire. After that, the City Council finally chose Hooke to become the city’s development planner under the auspices of Sir Christopher Wren. It was he who became a close friend of Hooke and discovered the important role of oxygen in the respiratory system.

Hooke’s law that was found has a formula with a sign (-) reveals that the direction of F is opposite to the direction of change in the length of x. According to Hooke, in the presence of x which is measured using the balance position of the spring, the sign (-) will indicate that the spring is stretched (L> 0). Vice versa, when pressing the spring (L<0), the spring force is in the positive L direction while k is referred to as the spring constant having a dimension of length or force.

Robert Hooke himself has considerable attention in scientific fields, ranging from astronomy to geology, the law of conservation or elasticity which still bears his name. Hooke made several significant contributions toward explaining the motion of the planets by suggesting that the orbits of the planets were caused by a combination of inertia descending in a straight line and the gravitational pull of the sun. Robert Hooke can also be said to have an unhappy life. Where he is easily offended, especially when he is suspicious of someone who is thought to be stealing his idea. He was also often sick and unable to sleep, in fact he only slept for three to four hours. Hooke also suffered from chronic illnesses, namely his feet were inflamed and he became blind in 1702 and exactly one year later, Robert Hooke died.

 

Hooke’s Law formula

The increase in length that appears will be directly proportional to the applied tensile force. This was first investigated in the 17th century by an architect from England named Robert Hooke. At that time, Hooke observed the relationship between the tensile force exerted on a spring and the increase in length of the spring. Hooke found that the increase in length of a spring occurs in direct proportion to the applied force. In addition, Hooke also found that the increase in length of the spring is very dependent on the characteristics of the spring itself.

A spring that stretches more easily, such as a rubber band, will experience a greater increase in length even though the force exerted is relatively small. Vice versa, a spring that is difficult to stretch, like a steel spring, will experience a relatively small increase in length, even though it is given a large enough force. The characteristics that exist in each of these springs are expressed by the force constant of the spring itself. Springs that stretch easily, such as rubber bands, have a smaller force constant. Vice versa, a spring that is difficult to stretch will have a greater power constant.

In general, what Hooke discovered can be stated as follows:

F = k. x

Information:

F is the force applied to the spring (N)
k is the setting of the spring force (N/m)
x is the increase in the length of the spring (m)

Spring Potential Energy

The amount of potential energy that is in a spring can be calculated from the graph of the relationship that works on the spring with the increase in the length of the spring itself: Here is the formula:

Ep = ½ F . x
= ½ (k . x) . x
Description:
Ep = spring potential energy (joules)
k = spring force constant (N/m)
x = spring extension (m)

Elasticity Modulus

Modulus of Elasticity is a comparison between strain and stress. This modulus is known as Young’s modulus.

a. Voltage or Stress

Stress is the force per unit cross-sectional area. Where the unit of stress is N/m2.

b. Strain or Strain

Stretch is the comparison between the increase in length in a rod compared to the beginning if the rod is subjected to force.

Hooke’s Law sounds

After discussing a little description of Hooke’s law and also various things related to elasticity in an object. Now, we will discuss about the sound of Hooke’s law. So, according to Hooke’s law, the greater the force exerted on an object, the longer the spring will be.

The following is Hooke’s law:

“If the tensile force exerted on a spring does not exceed the elastic limit of the material, the increase in spring length is directly proportional or proportional to the tensile force.”

After reading Hooke’s law above, do you understand more? So, we can conclude that the purpose of Hooke’s law is that when the force we apply exceeds the elastic limit, the object cannot return to its original shape.

 

Hooke’s Law Application

In everyday life, we will often encounter objects related to Hooke’s law. The application of Hooke’s law will be closely related to objects that have a working principle by using an elastic spring.

There are various examples of applications related to Hooke’s law, including:

1. A microscope that has the function of seeing various kinds of objects that have small properties or micro-organisms that are very small and cannot be seen using only the naked eye.
2. A clock that uses a peer to set the time.
3. Swings that have spring properties.
4. A gauze clock or chronometer used to determine the direction or position line of a ship in the middle of the sea.
5. An instrument for measuring the acceleration of gravity of the earth.
6. Connection of a gear stick to a vehicle such as a car or motorcycle.
7. Tools such as telescopes are useful for being able to see objects that are far away so that they look closer.

So, basically the idea of ​​Hooke’s law will have a positive impact on ourselves.

Hooke’s Law Magnitude

Hooke’s law also has a quantity that you can learn, including:

1. Voltage

Tension is a condition of an object that experiences an increase in length when an object is given a force at one end, while the other end is held. The following is the voltage formula:

σ = F/A

F is the force (N)
A is the cross-sectional area (m2)
σ is the stress (N/m2 or pa)

2. Stretching

Stretch is a comparison between the increase in the length of the wire in x meters and the normal length of the wire in x meters. The appearance of a stretch because there is a force given to the object or wire that is removed. So that the wire will return to its original shape.

The following is the strain formula:

e = ΔL/ Lo

e is the stretch
AL is the increase in length (m)
Lo is the initial length (m)

3. Modulus of Elasticity

The modulus of elasticity is the ratio between the stress and strain experienced by a material. It is formulated by:

E = p/e

E is the elastic modulus (N/m)
σ is the stress (N/m2 or Pa)
e is the strain

4. Compression

Compression is a condition that is almost the same as strain. The difference is only in the direction of movement of the object’s molecules after being given a certain force. When compressed, the object’s molecules will be pushed inwards.

5. Relationship Between Tensile Force and Modulus of Elasticity

If written mathematically, the relationship between tensile force and elastic modulus is as follows:

Information:
F = Force (N)
E = Modulus of elasticity (N/m)
e = Strain
σ = Stress (N/ m2 or Pa)
A = Cross-sectional area (m2)
E = Modulus of elasticity (N/m)
ΔL = Length gain (m)
Lo = initial length (m)

6. Exemption Law

Hooke’s law states that if the tensile force does not exceed the elastic limit of the spring, then the length of the spring will be proportional to the tensile force. If written mathematically, it would be like this:

Information:
F = external force exerted (N)
k = spring constant (N/m)
Δx = addition of spring length from its normal position (m)

Hooke’s Law for Spring Arrays

a. Series order

If two springs that have the same spring constant are in series, then the length of the spring is 2 times. Therefore, the spring equation is as follows:

Note:
Ks = spring equation
k = spring constant (N/m)

While the equation for n springs whose settings are also arranged in series, will be written like this:

Description:
n = Number of springs

b. Parallel Arrangement

If the springs are arranged in parallel, the length of the spring remains as it was at the beginning, while the cross-sectional area is doubled from the beginning if the spring is composed of two pieces. For spring equations arranged in parallel are:

Note:
Kp = Equation of a parallel arrangement of springs
k = Spring constant (N/m)

While the equation of n springs with the same settings and arranged in a parallel system, it will produce a stronger spring. Because the settings become larger. The spring equation can be written as follows:

Description:
n = Number of springs

Example of Hooke’s Law Problem

A spring has an increase in length of 0.25 m after a force is applied. If the spring reads 400 N/m. How much force is exerted on the spring?

known :
x = 0,25 m
k = 400 N/m
asked F….?

Answer

F = k . x
F = 400 N/m x 0,25 m
F = 100 N

So the force exerted on the spring is 100 Newton.

 

History and Types of Betawi Traditional Houses – Betawi is one of the most diverse tribes in Jakarta. This is because the community is made up of various ethnic groups in Indonesia. So it is not surprising that the people there have a very high tolerance for other people.

This is realized or characterized through the building of traditional houses which are rich in meaning. There are many interesting things about the Betawi traditional house, starting from its history, building philosophy, and the various types of buildings. To find out more, see the following review of the Betawi traditional house.

History of the Betawi Traditional House

History is an important thing that should be studied. Especially for the history of the Betawi traditional house. This Betawi traditional house is also closely related to the existence of the Betawi people themselves. Betawi itself comes from the word Batavia, which became the nickname of the city of Jakarta in the past.

When the Dutch colonial government conducted a population census in 1930, it was only recently that Betawi was known to exist. Betawi became a separate ethnic group in Indonesia at that time. They are referred to as the ethnic group that inhabited Batavia at that time.
Actually, the Betawi ethnicity is a combination of residents from various regions. Among them are Java, Bali, Makassar, Sunda and Sunda which were previously imported by the Dutch government. In the end, the inter-ethnic marriages that inhabited Batavia became ethnic Betawi residents.

If you look again, this Betawi traditional house is influenced by cultural acculturation. Where there were several tribes in the Batavia area, they merged with each other. As a result, you can see the architecture of the Betawi traditional house.

There are two cultures that merge in the traditional house, including international and local culture. From its appearance, you can see the shape of the Betawi house is almost similar to the typical Joglo house in Central Java.
Then you will also see some of the characteristics of the Sundanese stage houses there. Then, international culture is also involved in the Betawi traditional house. Ornaments and ornaments used by the Betawi people, such as in the manufacture of doors and windows, are adopted from foreign cultures, such as Arabic, European and Chinese.

Types of Betawi Traditional Houses

Each region certainly has more than one traditional house. In addition to being the result of the culture of a region, these kinds of traditional houses are also characteristics of people’s lives. In Betawi itself, only the Kebaya house is officially registered as a traditional house. However, besides that there are still several types that are also there. Among them are Stage houses, Joglo houses, and Warehouse houses.

Although not officially recorded, these houses still exist in Betawi and have been preserved by residents until now. So that its existence is also quite influential on the culture of the local community. For more details, see the following reviews of the four Betawi traditional houses:

1. Kebaya House

Kebaya may be better known as traditional custom clothing. Yes, perhaps the name of the Kebaya house is not well known to the wider community. In fact, this type of house has been officially recognized as a Betawi traditional house.

Why is it called Kebaya? Because the shape of the roof of this house is similar to a folded saddle. Then if you look at it from the side, the folds will look like the folds on a kebaya cloth.

In this Kebaya house there are also certain rules in the division of space. Usually, homeowners divide space into 2 areas, one for semi-public (receiving guests, etc.) and the other for private space. Public areas are generally placed at the front, namely as a terrace and living room. If you visit the Kebaya house, you can come and sit freely in that area.

Meanwhile, there are various private areas of the Kebaya house, such as the bathroom, bedroom, dining room, kitchen and yard. This area is usually only allowed to be seen by certain people, can be relatives or close relatives.

There is also a special room for guests in this house, named paseban. As a tribute to guests who stay, this room will be decorated and made as good as possible. The doors are carved, or the roof is laced like a kebaya. But this paseban can also be used as a place of worship if there are no guests staying overnight.

2. Warehouse

The second Betawi traditional house is the Gudang house. Usually this type of house will be found in the interior. As already explained, several types of houses are formed based on the location and culture around it. So, there are rules that only allow people in remote areas to build these Warehouse houses.

The shape of the Warehouse house is elongated like a rectangle. The roof has a gable structure on top of which is equipped with jurai and shield ornaments. Then the horse structure is used for the roof structure of the barn house.

In the warehouse house there are two divisions of space with different functions. The front room is used to receive guests, then the middle for the kitchen and bedroom. Warehouse houses generally don’t have a back, because the back room will be combined with the living room.

3. Stage House

The next traditional house is the stage house. This house is similar to Si Pitung’s house. These buildings are usually located in coastal areas. This high stilt house has been adapted to the coastal area, so if there is a high tide the house is still safe and not submerged in water.

Most of the materials used in the construction of stilt houses are wood. Apart from being easy to shape, in the past wood materials were much easier to find.

If you visit a stilt house, you will find simple and unique Betawi ornaments. Usually the ornaments used are geometric carvings, such as squares, diamonds, or circles. The installation also varies, there are doors, windows, and other parts.

4. Joglo House

Apart from being known as a Javanese traditional house, the joglo house is also known as a Betawi traditional house. Even so, the two certainly still have differences. If the Central Javanese Joglo house has a roof like a trapezoid, the Betawi joglo house has a roof like an overturned boat. Then if the Javanese Joglo is known for its buffer or pillar, then that is not the case with the Betawi joglo.

The Betawi Joglo traditional house has a square shape and the building is made elongated. Then, the house is divided into three rooms. First the front room, then the middle room, and the back room. As usual, the vestibule is used to receive and entertain guests.

Then the living room is filled with living room and bedroom, the place is more private than the front room. Then the back room is used for the bathroom and kitchen. This joglo house has a wider architecture than other houses.

So that those who have Joglo Betawi houses are usually people with high social status. Apart from its architecture, the wood material is also quite expensive, and these houses are usually located on the outskirts of the city.

The Philosophical Meaning of the Betawi Traditional House

Betawi traditional house consists of several types. One of the characteristics attached to Betawi houses is the wide terrace. This terrace is intentionally made wide, its philosophical meaning is as a place to receive guests and to gather and relax with family members.

This is quite different from modern homes where the family room is usually on the inside. However, this traditional house is different, even with a wide terrace it can make them more comfortable to have fun together.

On the terrace, you will usually place a bale-bale chair made of rattan, bamboo or teak wood, which is called an amben. The terrace floor uses gejogan, which shows respect for guests who come to the house. For the Betawi people, it turns out that this gejogan is quite sacred. The reason is because it is directly related to the entrance to the house which is named balaksuji.

Apart from that, the wide terrace of the house also means that the people of the house or Betawi people are very open to the arrival of guests. Moreover, the Betawi people are also known to highly value pluralism or differences between ethnic groups and religions. This is very reasonable, considering the history of the Betawi people who came from the association of several tribes in Indonesia.

There is also another meaning for the fence built on the front of the Betawi house. It turns out that there is a certain philosophical meaning from the existence of a fence that surrounds the house on the front. This fence for the community is interpreted as a barrier to negative things from the outside that can enter the house. So hopefully, with a fence, the atmosphere in the house always has a positive aura. Because negative things have been blocked by the existence of a fence.

Then some Betawi people also made a well in front of the house and made a grave next to the house. The tradition of making graves beside the house is an old tradition for the Betawi people. Therefore, from the past, the Betawi people were known to own large tracts of land and land.

Each division of space in the Betawi traditional house also has its own philosophical meaning. Here are the characteristics of the space:

• The front porch of the house, as a place to receive guests. It will always be cleaned every day as a tribute if guests come at any time.
• Paseban or rooms that are specifically for guests who will spend the night. In addition to guests, paseban is also often used as a place of worship.
• Pangkeng or a place to gather with family. Usually there is also in the middle, which serves to gather with family.
• There are usually quite a lot of bedrooms in Betawi houses. The most extensive main section will be devoted to homeowners
• Srondoyan or kitchen, which is a large place at the back. This place is used as a cooking room, as well as a place to eat.

Unique Characteristics or Uniqueness of Betawi Houses

Like other traditional houses, the Betawi traditional house also has characteristics that distinguish it from other traditional houses in other regions. Here are some of its characteristics:

1. Does not have a bathroom attached to the main building

The first uniqueness is the absence of a bathroom in a traditional house. The Betawi people have certain principles that are trusted and upheld by the people. One of them is to say, all dirt must be removed from the main building or buildings where they live.

This is intended so that the occupants of the house or anyone who lives in the house remain clean both physically and mentally. Therefore, not every Betawi traditional house has a bathroom attached to the main building. Generally they put the bathroom behind the house, separate from the main building.

2. Using carvings and ornaments that have meaning

Then the second is the number of carvings or ornaments inside and outside the house that contain meaning. Each display in the Betawi traditional house has its own meaning. Apart from being a decoration to beautify the room, there is also a meaning that is expected. Here are the meanings of some of the carvings and ornaments commonly found there:

• The carving of jasmine flowers, which means that the owner of the house must have feelings and a fragrant heart like when jasmine flowers bloom. This is symbolized through carvings of jasmine flowers, which have a fragrant smell. Usually this carving is displayed on a pole.
• Sunflower carving, which means every home owner’s life must be an inspiration for local residents. Its meaning is as a light, which can illuminate the hearts and minds of family members in the house. Usually this sunflower carving is installed on the living room door.
• The carvings of gunungan or tumpal, which symbolize the forces of nature, namely the universe or macrocosm, human or microcosm, and the unseen world or metacosm.
• Other carvings have the meaning of elegance, such as the Kim Hong flower which means tenacity, then the deer means agile and responsive, and there is a peacock which means splendor.
• Gigi balang ornament, which is an ornament of wooden planks in the form of inverted triangles lined up. Usually this ornament is installed under the roof of the house or on the skirting board. The meaning of this display is that the Betawi people must live in honesty, must be diligent, tenacious, and patient. This is likened to a locust, which can only break plants if it is tenacious, continues to work even though it takes quite a long time.

3. Has a low fence with a wide terrace

As previously explained above, the traditional house there has a wide terrace. The pavilion or terrace is usually equipped with seats as well as benches or places to lie down. All of that is prepared to entertain guests who come. This means that the Betawi people are indeed very open to various new people, and do not look at ethnicity, religion, or race.

In addition, the fence that is made around the front of the house is generally not too high. The fence is made low about 80 cm with a thickness of about 3 to 5 cm. The material is made of wood. The meaning of this low fence is that there is a boundary between the outside world and the house.

The hope is that the house can be protected from negative things outside the fence. Then the entrance to the house also has a meaning, namely for guests who come should have good manners. When entering the house must go through the front, not the back.

The Influence of Hinduism and Buddhism in Indonesia – It is no stranger to Hindu and Buddhist culture and religion having existed in Indonesia for a long time. In fact, it has been around since the 5th century to the 15th century. The arrival of Hindu and Buddhist culture and religion resulted in an acculturation of culture with Indonesian culture. Therefore, there are many historical buildings in Indonesia that are Hindu and Buddhist.

Acculturation of Hindu and Buddhist culture with Indonesian culture can occur because the mixing of cultures does not eliminate the original Indonesian culture. In fact, until now there are many Indonesian scientists and people who really want to know more about this cultural acculturation.

The acculturation of Hindu and Buddhist culture with Indonesian culture has had an influence on the lives of Indonesian people. In the following, we will explain more about the influence of Hinduism and Buddhism in the life of Indonesian society.

 

Hindu-Buddhist Influence on Indonesian Society

We can see Hindu-Buddhist influence from various kinds of buildings, works, or even activities that can be applied in everyday life.

 

1. Building Arts (Architecture)

Historical records say that in Indonesia there were many ancient kingdoms with Hindu and Buddhist backgrounds. Therefore, there were many buildings built at that time with Hindu and Buddhist styles. Until now, we can still see some of the buildings built during the Hindu-Buddhist kingdom.

The buildings built in the Hindu-Buddhist kingdoms were usually in the form of a temple. Each temple building that has a Hindu-Buddhist style has a different function. There are temple buildings that function as places of worship, burials, and some as holy baths.

The temple that functions as a tomb is a Hindu temple. While the temple that serves as a place of worship is a temple with a Buddhist style. If you look at the building with Hindu-Buddhist style, it can be said that the Hindu and Buddhist kingdoms were very victorious in their time.

Basically the temple is divided into several parts, namely the foot of the temple, the body of the temple and the top of the temple. The foot of the temple is called bhurloka which means the realm of the mortal world. The body of the temple is called bhurwaloka which means the realm of cleansing the soul, and the top of the temple is called swarloka which means the realm of the holy soul. However, the existence of cultural acculturation makes the temple buildings adapted to the uniqueness of Indonesian culture.

Sinaumed’s, have you ever compared the temples in Central Java with the temples in East Java? The temples in the two regions have several differences, namely:

a. Temple in Central Java

In general, temples in Central Java have a chubby shape decorated with kalamakara or giant faces. Kalamakara decorations are generally located at the entrance to the temple.

The top of the temple in Central Java has a characteristic with the shape of the stupa and the main material is andesite stone. The direction of this temple is facing east.

b. Temple in East Java

Temples located in Central Java usually have a slimmer shape and have simpler decorations compared to the kalamakara at the entrance. If the temples in Central Java are in the shape of a stupa, then the temples in East Java are in the shape of a cube.

The main material for making temples in East Java is brick. Meanwhile, the direction of this temple is more towards the west.

 

2. Fine Arts and Carving

Based on historical records, Indonesian people have been able to make paintings or drawings. This ability appeared before the influence of Hindu-Buddhist culture. In addition, the oldest painting in Indonesia is located on a cave wall in Maros Regency, South Sulawesi. In fact, dr. Maxime Aubert from Griffiths University of Australia said that the paintings in Maros Regency are more than 38-40 thousand years old.

Before the entry of Hindu-Buddhist influence, Indonesian people already had a habit of painting or drawing with very simple patterns. After the entry of Hindu-Buddhist influence into fine art, then the Indonesian people developed pictures or paintings with more difficult motifs and were influenced by Indian culture.

In addition to having an influence on the fine arts, Hindu-Buddhist also had an influence on carving, sculpture, relief and makara. The form of Hindu-Buddhist art has always developed in its time, so there are lots of motifs.

a. Statue

Basically the people of Indonesia have known the art of very large stone carvings, such as menhirs and sarcophagi. From the carvings of menhirs and sarcophagi, it can be said that Indonesian people already have a habit of making statues with human-like shapes. Usually the statues made by ancient Indonesian people functioned as stones of worship.

The art of making these statues is growing, especially when Hindu-Buddhist entered Indonesia. In the Hindu period, every statue made was placed in the temples. Usually the statues at this time were divided into two forms, namely three-dimensional and half- tridimensional .

Sculptures with tridimensional shapes give the meaning of gods, humans, and animals. Therefore, the form of a three-dimensional statue is inside the temple. The creation of three-dimensional statues serves to pay homage to the kings who have died. Meanwhile, statues with half- tridimensional shapes are generally found in the temple reliefs.

While the statues at the time of the Buddha were generally in the form of the Buddha. Statues of the Buddha are usually made with the position of the hand that is pointing in a certain direction of the compass.

 

b. reliefs

Relief can be said as one of the elements in the temples in Indonesia. The reliefs that we usually see are pictures that appear on the walls of the temple. However, the reliefs in Indonesian temples always have meanings in the form of religious teachings, daily life, and stories of the gods.

The reliefs in Hindu-style temples generally explain stories originating from holy books or literary works. The literary works used, such as Mahabharata , Ramayana, Sudamala, Kresnayana , and Arjunawiwaha . You can see examples of reliefs with Hindu motifs that tell the story of Ramayana in the Prambanan temple.

While the reliefs of Buddha, usually tell about the story and life journey of the Buddha, Sidharta Gautama.

c. Makara

In Hindu-Buddhist mythology there is a living creature named Makara. Makara is the embodiment of a large sea animal and is always identified with sharks, crocodiles and dolphins, so it is often used as temple motifs.

With this makara motif, it can be seen that there is a mixture of Indian carving and Javanese carving. The purpose of making makara is to prevent bad traits from entering the temple and to give a sign that this temple is a sacred place.

 

3. Performing Arts

The influx of Hindu-Buddhist influence can not only be seen from the style of the building, but we can see it through several performing arts. Performing arts that experienced development during the Hindu-Buddhist era, such as wayang, dance, and music.

a. Puppet Art

Before the Hindu-Buddhist era, the performance of wayang art functioned as a form of worship ceremony for ancestral spirits known as Hyang and the arrival of wayang was a form of ancestral spirits.

In the Hindu-Buddhist era, wayang performances were developed according to the times by bringing stories from India, such as the Ramayana and Mahabharata. Even though they come from India, there are several figures from Indonesia who appear in wayang performances.

 

b. Dance Arts

As with wayang performing arts, dance also existed before the Hindu-Buddhist era entered. The art of performing dance is usually used to express gratitude to the Creator for having been given enough crops. In addition, the process of appointing tribal chiefs usually uses dance performances as well.

Performing arts caused by the influence of Hindu-Buddhist, until now its preservation but well maintained. By preserving the art of dance, it indicates that Indonesia’s cultural heritage will not be easily lost. Dance performances with Hindu-Buddhist influences can be seen in the Ramayana ballet which is held at the Prambanan temple during the full moon.

c. Music Art

JLA Brandes said that gamelan is one of the original performing arts owned by the Indonesian nation. This could be because the Indonesian people already think that gamelan music is the oldest musical art in Indonesia.

The development of gamelan music is growing rapidly, especially when Hindu-Buddhist entered Indonesia. Information about the art of gamelan music can be found in temple reliefs, books, and literary works.

4. Literary Arts and Script

The Hindu-Buddhist era is often known as the beginning of the emergence of script in Indonesia. The oldest script in Indonesia was found in Kutai, East Kalimantan and is located on the Yupa stone inscription. The Yupa inscription is written in Pallawa letters and Sanskrit.

At the beginning of its emergence, the Pallawa script was used to write things on stone inscriptions and in literary works. After experiencing various developments, the Pallawa script developed into the Hacaraka script. The Hanacaraka script is used to write Javanese and Balinese scripts.

With the Pallawa script and Sanskrit language that is often used, it makes people move to develop local literature. Broadly speaking, every literary work in the Hindu-Buddhist era was heavily influenced by the Ramayana and Mahabharata literature from India.

Stories originating from India are combined with Indonesian culture, resulting in stories that are meaningful and of course interesting to read. Literary works in the Hindu-Buddhist era were usually in the form of books compiled by Mpu Panuluh and Mpu Sedah with the title Bharatayudha

 

5. Belief System

The belief system that existed during the Hindu-Buddhist era had three very important elements. First , in the pre-literate period, a belief system originated from community groups or tribal chiefs which was marked by the existence of a ritual. These rituals are believed to be a form of respect to the gods.

Second, there is a belief in heirlooms which are considered to have magical powers in them. In the Hindu-Buddhist era, belief in heirlooms was very strong, so many people believed in the power that existed in these heirlooms.

Third , in the Hindu-Buddhist era, religious leaders always had a respected place in society. In addition, religious leaders are highly respected by the community.

From these three historical facts, it can be said that the Hindu-Buddhist influence did not eliminate the original beliefs of the Indonesian people. In fact, the development of Hindu-Buddhist religions can be said to have combined original beliefs or local beliefs that had existed before.

 

 

6. Social System

In the Hindu-Buddhist social system, the social roles and functions of community members are grouped based on their degree level.

a. Brahmin

At this level, someone will have the role of being an adviser to the king and religious educator.

b. Knight

At this level, someone will become the administrator and administrator of the government system which aims to maintain royal power. Knights also play a role as defenders of the kingdom, such as the king’s assistants and soldiers.

c. Vaishya

At this level, a person is categorized as an ordinary person who has a profession, such as a trader, farmer, fisherman and artist.

d. Sudras

At this level, a person is categorized as a society that has the lowest degree. Usually someone who gets the rank of Shudra, such as lowly workers, laborers, slaves, and servants.

 

7. Government System

Before the entry of Hindu-Buddhist, Indonesian society adhered to a system of government in the form of a group leader or tribal chief. In the tribal chief government system, each leader is elected based on who has the most influence on the group.

However, after the entry of Hindu-Buddhist, the tribal government system changed to a royal system. The leader of a community group is in the hands of a king. A king has the right to inherit his throne from generation to generation.

In this royal system, shamans are appointed as advisers and have the title of Brahmin and their position is under the king. Meanwhile, the position of the people remained as waisya and the slaves remained in their position, namely as sudras.

 

8. Calendar System

In prehistoric times, people always counted days using astronomy. Astronomy is believed to be able to determine the direction of the wind, especially when sailing. In fact, in determining the time of harvest also uses astronomy.

However, the entry of Hindu-Buddhism into Indonesia has had an impact on Indonesian society in the form of time calculations based on the Saka calendar. The Saka year calendar has a total of 365 days. While the Saka year with the Christian year has a year difference, which is 78 years.

 

Hindu-Buddhist Entrance Path

Hindu-Buddhist influence entered Indonesia through trade routes and was brought by traders and priests from India and China. The entry of Hindu-Buddhist influence through two types of trade routes, namely land routes and sea routes.

1. Land Line

The land route became the route for Hindu-Buddhism to be brought to Indonesia, so that when in Indonesia there was cultural acculturation. This overland route was made by traders via the silk route. The route of this route is divided into two parts, namely the northern silk route route and the southern silk route route.

The northern silk route route started from India to Tibet, then headed north until it reached China, Korea, and Japan.

Meanwhile, the Silk Road route started from North India to Bangladesh, then headed to Myanmar, Thailand, the Malay Peninsula, and headed to Indonesia.

2. Sea Route

In addition to land routes, the spread of Hindu-Buddhist through the sea. This sea route is very synonymous with merchant ship groups and usually sea route travel routes starting from India, then to Myanmar, Thailand, the Malay Peninsula, and the last stop in Indonesian territory.

 

Conclusion

The entry of Hindu-Buddhist influences the lives of Indonesian people and mixes Hindu-Buddhist culture with Indonesian culture. Even though it has an influence on the life of Indonesian society and culture, it still does not reduce the authenticity or values ​​of Indonesian society and Indonesian culture. The acculturation of this culture shows that Indonesian society is open to new cultures.

Understanding Hess’s Law – Enthalpy is a state function, which only depends on the initial and final state of each reaction and the reaction products without regard to the path from changing the substance of each reaction to the reaction product. In the previous enthalpy calculations, the enthalpy can be determined by calculating the heat of reaction at constant pressure.

However, not all reactions can be clearly known by the amount of heat of reaction at that time. In 1840, a chemist from Russia, named Germain Henri Hess, manipulated thermochemical equations in order to calculate the ΔH contained in a law called Hess’s law or the law of addition of heat. Gerrmain Henry Hess states that:

“If a reaction takes place in two or more reaction steps, then the enthalpy change for the reaction will be equal to the sum of the enthalpy changes for all the stages that occur.”

Hess’s Law sounds

“The enthalpy of a reaction does not depend on the course of the reaction, but on the end result of the reaction.”

From  Hess’s Law  which was mentioned earlier, it is possible to calculate the enthalpy change for a reaction based on the enthalpy change for another reaction whose value is known. This can be done so that researchers do not have to do experiments every time.

Hess’s law can be described in a schematic way, namely as follows.

Given the Hess diagram for the reaction A → C

Diagram Hess.

The change from A to C can take place through 2 stages, namely:

Stage I (directly)

A → C → ∆H₁

Stage II (indirectly)

Based on Hess’s Law, the price ∆H ₁  = ∆H ₂  + ∆H ₃

A → B		∆H2
B → C		∆H3
A → C		∆H 2  + H 3

Many reactions can take place based on two or more steps.

Example:

The reaction of carbon and oxygen needed to form CO ₂  can take place in one step (direct way) or can also take place in two stages (indirect way).

1) One level:	C(s) + O2(g) → CO2(g)		∆H = –394 kJ
2) Two levels:	C(s) + ½ O 2 (g) → CO(g)		∆H = –110 kJ
	CO(g) + O 2 (g) → CO 2 (g)		∆H = –284 kJ
	C(s) + O2(g) → CO2(g)		∆H = –394 kJ

Hess’s law can also be expressed in the form of cycle diagrams or energy level diagrams. The cycle diagram for the carbon burning reaction is based on the previous example as follows:

Carbon burning reaction cycle diagram.

Based on the reaction cycle previously described, carbon burning can go through two pathways, namely path-1 which can directly form CO ₂ , while pathway- 2 , initially forming CO, then becoming CO ₂ . So, ∆H ₁  = ∆H ₂  + ∆H ₃

Energy level diagram:

Energy level diagram for the reaction of carbon using oxygen and forming CO 2  according to two paths.

Hess’s law can be used to determine the heat based on a reaction which cannot be known in a direct way. Consider the following example.

Example:

½ N2(g) + O2(g) → NO2(g)	ΔH1 = x kJ = + 33,85 kJ/mol		1 level
½ N2(g) + ½ O2(g) → NO(g)	ΔH2 = y kJ = + 90,37 kJ/mol	+	2 levels
NO(g) + ½ O2(g) → NO2(g)	ΔH3 = z kJ = – 56,52 kJ/mol
½ N2(g) + O2(g) → NO2(g)	ΔH 1  = ΔH 2 + ΔH 3		x = y + z

According to Hess’s Law:

ΔH ₁  = ΔH ₂ + ΔH ₃  or x = y + z

The change that occurs from N 2  g) and O 2  g) to NO(g) is accompanied by an enthalpy change (ΔH 1 ) of +33.85 kJ/mol, even though the reaction has been defined as one step or two steps, ΔH 1  = ΔH 2 + ΔH 3 .

Problems example

Problem 1

Determine the enthalpy of burning charcoal into a gas of carbon dioxide and also water vapor.

Answer :

The reaction of burning charcoal can be written as follows.

C(s) + O ₂ (g) → CO(g)

Not all changes that occur in enthalpy can be determined by conducting experiments. For example, in a combustion reaction of carbon (graphite) which turns into carbon monoxide. The enthalpy change for the reaction of burning carbon to pure CO tends to be more difficult to do because CO is flammable. What if we react carbon with excess oxygen, CO will immediately burn and turn into _CO2 . Meanwhile, in a limited amount of oxygen, a mixture of CO and CO2 will be _formed .

However, the enthalpy change that occurs in the formation of CO can be determined based on the reaction enthalpy change which can easily occur. The reaction that occurs more easily is a reaction of burning carbon and turning into carbon dioxide and burning of carbon monoxide which turns into carbon dioxide.

The enthalpy value of this reaction is unknown. The enthalpy value of the charcoal burning reaction can be determined by using a reaction whose enthalpy value is known beforehand. It is known that the enthalpy of formation of CO ₂  = –393.5 kJ mol ^–1  and the enthalpy of combustion of CO = –283 kJ mol ^–1 .

Based on these two enthalpy data, using Hess’s law the enthalpy of burning carbon that turns into carbon monoxide can be calculated in the following way.

The thermochemical equation that results in the formation of carbon dioxide (CO ₂ )

(1) C(s) + O₂(g) → CO₂(g) = -393,5 kJ/mol

The thermochemical equation that results in the combustion of carbon monoxide (CO)

(2) CO(g) + 1/2 O₂(g) → CO₂(g) AH = -283 kJ/mol

In order to obtain the equation for the reaction of burning carbon which turns into carbon monoxide, reaction (2) can be reversed and can then be added using a reaction (6).

C(s) + O2(g) → CO2(g)		∆H = – 393,5 kJ
CO 2 (g) → CO(g) + O 2		∆H = + 283 kJ
C(s) + O2 (g) + CO2 (g) → CO2 (g) + CO(g) + ½ O2(g)		∆H = – 110,5 kJ

Disposal of two substances that are the same on both sides will be able to produce a reaction equation, namely:

C(s) + ½ O₂ (g) → CO(g)     ∆H = -110,5kJ

Based on the sum of the two stages of the reaction, the enthalpy change for the burning of carbon that turns into carbon monoxide can be determined in a way that tends to be easier, namely by adding up the enthalpy changes for the two stages of the reaction that have occurred.

The determination of the number of enthalpy changes in this way was discovered by a chemist from Russia, namely GH Hess (1840). Through a series of experiments he has done, Hess made a statement that the enthalpy change depends only on the initial and final states of a reaction and does not depend on the course of the reaction.

So, if a chemical reaction takes place through several reaction steps, the enthalpy change is determined by adding up the enthalpy change for each step. This statement from Hess later became known as Hess’ law (or also often referred to as the Law of Addition of Heat). The application of Hess’ law makes it easy to determine the enthalpy change for a reaction which is difficult to determine when conducting experiments.

The thermochemical equation is prepared in such a way that the result of the sum is the reaction whose enthalpy change will be determined. Often, several equations must be multiplied by suitable coefficients to obtain a required thermochemical equation.

This calculation method is in accordance with Hess’s law which states that the enthalpy of the reaction absorbed or released by a reaction does not depend on the course of a reaction. Some of the principles of calculating thermochemical equations according to Hess’s law that need to be considered are:

a. If a reaction equation must be reversed, then change the sign of ∆H. For example,

Reaction : H ₂ (g) + O ₂ (g) → H ₂ O ₂ (l) ∆H = –187.8 kJ

Reversed: H ₂ O ₂ (l) → H ₂ (g) + O ₂ (g) ∆H = +187,8 kJ

b. If in the addition of the reaction there is a substance that appears on both sides of the equation with the same substance phase, then the substance can be removed. Examples are:

H2(g) + ½ O2(g) → H2O(g)		∆H = +241,80 kJ
H2O(l) → H2(g) + ½ O2(g)		∆H = –285,85 kJ
H 2 O( l ) → H 2 O(g)		∆H = –44,05 kJ

The calculation of the ∆H _{of the reaction}  can also be carried out using the basic data of the standard heat of reaction of formation (∆H _f °). The standard heat of formation is a heat of formation of compounds based on their elements. Look at the general equilibrium reaction equation below.

aA + bB → cC + dD

∆H_reaksi = (c × C + d × D) – (a × A + b × B)

= ∆H° _{f  products}  – ∆H° _{f reactants}

So, in general the ∆H of _{the reaction}  can be determined using the formula:

∆H _reaction  = ∆H° _{f products}  – ∆H° _{f reactants}

Information :

∆H° _{f product}  : is the total enthalpy of standard formation based on the product substances.
∆H° _{f reactants}  : is the total enthalpy of standard formation based on the reactants.

Problem 2:

Determine the ∆H value _{of the reaction}  for the decomposition reaction of SO ₃  according to the following reaction equation.

SO₃(g) → SO₂(g) + ½ O₂(g)

Solution :

From the table it is known:

∆H°_f SO₃ = –395,2 kJ mol^-1,

∆H°_f SO₂ = –296,9 kJ mol^-1

∆H _reaction  = ∆H° _f  product  – ∆H° _{f  reactant}

= {1× (–296.9 kJ mol ^-1 ) + ½ × 0} – {1 × (–395.2 kJ mol ^-1 )}

= –296.6 kJ mol ^-1  + 395.2 kJ mol-1

= +98.6 kJ times ^-1

So, the decomposition of SO ₃  is +98.6 kJ mol ^-1 .

Question 3 :

Carbon forms two types: graphite and diamond. The enthalpy for burning graphite is –3939.5 kJ while the enthalpy for burning diamond is –395.4 kJ.

C(grafit) + O₂(g) → CO₂(g) ∆H = -393.5 kJ

C(intan) + O₂(g) → CO₂(g) ∆H = -395.4 kJ

Calculate the ∆H used to turn graphite into diamond.

Solution :

What we need is ∆H for the reaction:

C (graphite) → C (diamond)

C (grafit) + O₂ (g) → CO₂ (g) ∆H = -393.5 kJ

CO₂ (g) → C (intan) + O₂ (g) ∆H = +395.4 kJ

C (graphite) → C (diamond) ∆H = +1.9 kJ

By using the law of the conservation of energy, we can also use it through the form of energy diagrams in a reaction. An example of burning methane is useful to produce gaseous H ₂ O and then condensing gaseous H ₂ O to the solid state. Based on the energy diagram it looks as shown in the following.

Diagram of the enthalpy change for the combustion reaction of methane.

So, to find out the reaction enthalpy is:

CH₄(g) + O₂(g) → CO₂(g) + 2H₂O(l)

The value will be equal to ∆H ₁  = ∆H ₂  + ∆H ₃

To find the enthalpy of a reaction:

CH₄(g) + O₂(g) → CO₂(g) + 2 H₂O(g)

The value will be equal to ∆H ₂  = ∆H ₁  – ∆H ₃ 

To find the enthalpy of a reaction:

2 H ₂ O(g)) → 2 H ₂ O( l )

The value will be equal to ∆H ₃  = ∆H ₁  – ∆H ₂

Question 4 :

Known Hess cycle diagram

Determine the standard enthalpy for the formation of CO2 _gas !

Solution :

According to Hess’s Law

∆H₁ = ∆H₂ + ∆H₃ = –222 + (–566) kJ = –788 kJ

maca ∆H _f ° gas CO ₂  = – (788/2) = –394 kJmol ^–1

Question 5 :

The energy level diagram is known as follows.

Determine the standard enthalpy for the formation of CO2 _gas !

Answer :

According to Hess’s Law

∆H₁ = ∆H₂ + ∆H₃ = –222 + (–566) kJ = –788 kJ

maca ∆H _f ° gas CO ₂  = – (788/2) = –394 kJmol ^–1

The value of ∆H for the reaction can be calculated using the data on the change in standard enthalpy of formation (∆H _f °)

Formula :
∆H _reaction  = ∆H _product  – ∆H _reactant

Problems example :

Is known :

∆H_f° CH₄ = –79,3 kJ

∆H_f° CO₂ = –393,52 kJ

∆H _f ° H ₂ O = –296.0 kJ

Determine ∆H _c ° gas CH ₄ !

Answer :

Required reaction: CH ₄ (g) + 2 O ₂ (g) → CO ₂ (g) + 2 H ₂ O

∆H _reaction  = ∆H _f ° (CO ₂  + 2 (H ₂ O)) – ∆H _f °(CH ₄  + 2 (O ₂ ))= (–393.52) + 2(–286) – (– 79.3) kJ
= (–965.52 + 79.3) kJ
= –886.22 kJ
Practicum for Determination of Enthalpy Change based on Hess’s Law
In this experiment, we will observe the ∆H of the reaction between solid NaOH and 0.5 M HCl solution using two ways.

Method 1:
Solid NaOH is first dissolved in water, then the NaOH solution will be reacted using HCl solution.

Method 2:
Solid NaOH will be immediately dissolved using HCl solution.

Work steps:

Method 1:
• Weigh 2 grams of NaOH, then store it in a closed container. Prepare 50 mL of water, and measure the temperature. Enter the NaOH into the water, then stir and record the maximum temperature. Calculate the ∆H of the reaction from dissolving NaOH (∆H ₁ ).
• Prepare 50 mL of 1 M HCl and measure the temperature.
• Measure the temperature of 50 mL of NaOH solution that has been made before.
• React the NaOH solution using HCl solution, then record the maximum temperature. Calculate ∆H for the reaction (∆H ₂ ).

Method 2:
• Weigh 2 grams of NaOH, then store it in a closed container.
• Prepare 100 mL of 0.5 M HCl solution, measure the temperature.
• React solid NaOH with HCl, record the maximum temperature
. Calculate ∆H for the reaction (∆H ₃ ).

Questions:
1. Calculate ∆H ₁ , ∆H ₂ , and ∆H3 for each mole of NaOH!2. Write the equation of the thermochemical reaction in:
a. dissolving solid NaOH substance to become a solution of NaOH substance (aq),
b. neutralization reaction of NaOH (aq) with HCl (aq),
c. neutralization reaction of NaOH (s) with HCl (aq).

3. Make a reaction diagram in the previous experiment!
4. According to Hess’s Law, namely ∆H ₁  + ∆H ₂  = ∆H ₃

Does your experimental data agree with Hess’s Law? If not, state three factors that cause it!
From the experiment above you will be able to find the result ∆H ₁  = ∆H ₂  + ∆H ₃ .

•  

The difference between Entrepreneurs and Entrepreneurs – Does Sinaumed’s often hear about the professions of entrepreneurs and entrepreneurs? Many people think that entrepreneurship and entrepreneurship are the same profession and have the same meaning. However, these two professions are different. What’s the difference?

Check out the following explanation of the difference between entrepreneurship and entrepreneurship, Sinaumed’s!

Definition of Entrepreneur and Entrepreneur

Before discussing the differences between entrepreneurship and entrepreneurship, it is better for Sinaumed’s to know the meaning of entrepreneurship and entrepreneurship first. In general, entrepreneurship is a form of courage and readiness possessed by someone to take the risks that they will bear for the work they are engaged in. The work in question is a person’s business to run a business with the facilities, labor and capital that he has himself.

Entrepreneurship in general can also be interpreted as a form of someone’s ability to manage creativity into an innovation with jelly. Where someone who has this ability forms an opportunity to build a business venture.

In addition to the general understanding of entrepreneurship, several experts also expressed opinions about entrepreneurship.

According to Lupiyoadi, entrepreneur is someone who has the ability to create creativity as well as the ability to innovate. Which of these abilities does he have, he can use them to improve his own welfare and be able to prosper society and the environment.

Robbins and Coulter define entrepreneurship as an effort owned by a person or group to make the business he runs run in an organized manner. The purpose of the business they run is to create value or fulfill market demand.

Meanwhile, Dewanti argues that an entrepreneur is someone who has a role and responsibility for challenges and the ability to be able to take advantage of an opportunity.

Sjahbandi argues that entrepreneurship is a person’s ability to manage a business that he runs alone. He also said that there are several factors that can influence someone in making entrepreneurial decisions.

One of them is personal judgment, especially with regard to background and experience. So that the success or failure of a person as an entrepreneur is marked by the skills, experience and competence that a person has.

So it can be concluded that an entrepreneur is someone who has the readiness, courage and thought to run a business that can affect himself and even the surrounding environment.

Meanwhile, self-employment is a type of work that is of course different from entrepreneurship. Even though both of them have the same prefix, namely entrepreneurship, entrepreneurship and entrepreneurship are different. The word wira itself comes from the Javanese language which is absorbed from Sanskrit which means brave, gallant and exemplary.

According to the Directorate of General Secondary Education (1982: 65) entrepreneurship is a type of work or someone who does work independently and is not determined by a superior, because an entrepreneur does not have a boss.

In the book Entrepreneurship written by Muhammad Dinar, et al, entrepreneurship is an activity or business carried out by a group or person that aims to provide added value to a product and provide more customer satisfaction. The added value of the entrepreneur in question is something that has a new nature or that has never existed before.

In general, an entrepreneur can also be defined as a person who has the courage to think, act or act to create various kinds of jobs and lead an independent career.

From the definition of entrepreneur and self-employed above, does Sinaumed’s already know the difference between these two types of work? If you only look at it at a glance, it might be difficult to tell the difference between an entrepreneur and an entrepreneur. In order not to get confused, here is an explanation of the differences between entrepreneurs and entrepreneurs.

Differences between Entrepreneurs and Entrepreneurs in General

It should be noted that the term self-employed first appeared in the 1970s. Initially, the term entrepreneur was defined based on neoclassicalism. When it first appeared, the definition of an entrepreneur was as follows.

1. People who have the ability to think, behave and act based on the ability and courage they have to carry out their own work, work or behave independently and earn their own money.
2. People who have the urge to make things in a way that is different from the others by using time and activities followed by capital and the possibility of failure as well as receiving remuneration and satisfaction with free authority over the business he is doing.

Meanwhile, the term entrepreneur only emerged when there were developments regarding modern economic theory and is defined as follows.

1. Someone who creates a creation and innovation
2. Someone who has a long term vision
3. Someone who can master expertise in the fields of marketing, production, supervision and provision of capital.

Then along with the times, the term entrepreneur has changed or is more popular with the term entrepreneur. For the millennial generation, the term entrepreneur tends to shift and the term entrepreneur is more popular. Even so, the term entrepreneur does not just disappear.

As previously explained, that entrepreneurs and entrepreneurs have differences. Here’s an explanation.

1. Differences in the focus of his business

When viewed from the focus of his business, entrepreneurship and entrepreneurship certainly have quite clear differences. The focus of an entrepreneur’s efforts covers all the time in his life. Meanwhile, the focus of an entrepreneur’s business is only part time.

An easy example, someone who works as an office worker owns a laundry or laundry business so that he can be said to be an entrepreneur. Because he not only has a focus on business, namely laundry, but also has a focus on getting a salary from the office where he works. The business he does, is only done part time.

Meanwhile, if a person has no ties with other parties and all of his time is only used for the business he owns, then that person can be included in the category of an entrepreneur.

2. Differences in asset ownership

The difference that is quite significant from the second entrepreneur and self-employed is the ownership of assets owned by these two types of professions. The assets in question are the ownership of capital funds and the role they have in making decisions in business operations.

A person is called an entrepreneur when he is relatively involved in business operational activities only. Meanwhile, an entrepreneur has his own assets.

3. The scope of business of the two professions

A business actor has a greater possibility of being involved in a business and even being involved in more than one field. That way, someone will be included in the entrepreneur category when he has a fairly broad business scope or business scope. For example, when he offers travel services that are also equipped with photography services that he has.

Meanwhile, someone who is classified as an entrepreneur cannot apply his business knowledge to other types of business and can only focus on one business scope. For example, if he has a laundry business, he can only do laundry business.

4. Planning ahead

The fourth difference between entrepreneurs and entrepreneurs is regarding business development plans. An entrepreneur has a sufficiently deep and solid understanding to always update his business approach according to the latest technological approaches.

Meanwhile, an entrepreneur tends to have a more traditionalist mindset and is more easily satisfied with the short-term targets they have.

5. The mindset of entrepreneurs and self-employed people

When viewed from the mindset of entrepreneurs and entrepreneurs, of course these two types of professions have different mindsets. It can be understood that an entrepreneur is someone who opens a new and independent business.

An entrepreneur can see several opportunities that he can take advantage of, so he will benefit from these opportunities. Meanwhile, an entrepreneur, has the mindset that only by continuing an existing concept, he can get a bigger profit.

For example, nowadays many entrepreneurs can be seen through the emergence of many startup companies. These entrepreneurs usually have their own concept and are able to develop their company. While entrepreneurs, in general, can run something that already exists and can take profit from it.

Those are the five differences between entrepreneurs and entrepreneurs. If summarized, these two professions have the following differences.

• Entrepreneur is someone who has the skills to create added value to a product, or can provide a sense of satisfaction to customers. He also has a focus on running one area of ​​business. An entrepreneur is able to act and think according to the ability and courage he has to make money independently.
• Entrepreneur is someone who is skilled in utilizing, managing and developing a business. He has the ability to focus on running several businesses at once. An entrepreneur can also innovate and be creative and have a long term vision.

Differences between Entrepreneurs and Entrepreneurs from Their Characteristics

Sinaumed’s can also tell the difference between entrepreneurship and entrepreneurship through their characteristics. By knowing the characteristics of these two types of profession, it will be easier for Sinaumed’s to know the difference. Here’s an explanation.

1. Entrepreneurial characteristics

a. Dare to take risks

An entrepreneur has a characteristic that is quite distinctive, namely a brave attitude. In general, an entrepreneur is someone who dares to take risks. Because of this courage that he has, he is able to tackle all things to make the business he creates grow and progress.

b. Have high self-confidence

The second characteristic possessed by an entrepreneur is self-confidence which is quite high. With this confidence, he is sure that the business he builds and runs will achieve success one day.

c. Have special skills in the field of management

An entrepreneur generally has special abilities in the field of management. Because at first he started a business or business alone. With his management skills, he is able to manage multiple tasks at once without feeling tired or short on time.

d. Have a leadership spirit

An entrepreneur must work independently to earn money, without a boss giving orders or guidance. Therefore, an entrepreneur usually has a leadership spirit. Not only to lead others, but also himself. He is able to embrace and guide his team.

e. Original or able to innovate

An entrepreneur is someone who has originality, meaning he is someone who is innovative, flexible and creative. They are able to make something that already exists into something new or create something new. This original characteristic is the basic difference between an entrepreneur and an entrepreneur.

f. Have an out of the box mindset

One characteristic of entrepreneurship is having an out of the box mindset. With this mindset, he is able to present original things according to market demand. Entrepreneurs have an out of the box mindset that can arise from solving problems, presenting new products or even advertising concepts to market their products.

g. Oriented to tasks as well as results

Someone who is an entrepreneur, usually focuses on the tasks and results he will get. Therefore, entrepreneurs have a long-term plan for the business they are running. Entrepreneurs are also more future-oriented.

That is, they believe that a good future will come and they will manage to achieve the coveted success. Even so, in general, an entrepreneur is able to control his emotions, so they will not focus on past failures, but make these failures as a lesson.

h. A problem solver

Besides having a leadership spirit, an entrepreneur is someone who is able to solve problems without the need to create new problems. The solutions presented are usually made depending on their knowledge, insight and experience. With the experience he had, he was able to provide a complete solution to the problem he was facing at that time.

2. Entrepreneurial characteristics

a. Understand the passion he has

An entrepreneur is someone who understands his passion or ability. So that he will pursue the field of business that he is good at, apart from that usually the entrepreneur will also take up the field of business that he likes. An entrepreneur knows what passion he has and will always try to improve his skills in that field.

b. A person who is disciplined and has high dedication

An attitude of discipline is certainly needed by an entrepreneur, because he will work independently part time. In addition, he must be able to separate and be disciplined in doing his work in the office or business without mixing it up. So that the attitude of discipline is needed, because the entrepreneur has two roles at once. High dedication is another characteristic of an entrepreneur. Because if someone doesn’t have high dedication to get the job done and take good care of business, then the two things he does will fall apart.

c. Have plans for the future

The third characteristic is that an entrepreneur generally has plans for the future. Although usually an entrepreneur tends to have short term plans and not long term plans like an entrepreneur.

That’s a review of the most basic differences between entrepreneurship and self-employment. Is Sinaumed’s interested in becoming an entrepreneur or self-employed? If you are interested in doing one of these types of work, then Sinaumed’s must pursue and study it well so that the business being run can grow and not stop in the middle.

Herbivores are – If we classify animals, it can be done by the food they eat. The grouping is divided into three, namely herbivores, carnivores, and omnivores. However, in this article, we will discuss herbivores, starting from their definition to the types of animals. So, what are you waiting for, immediately read this article until it’s finished, Sinaumed’s.

Definition of herbivore

Herbivore is a term for animals that eat plants or animals and do not eat meat. Herbivore consists of two words, namely herb which comes from Latin which means plant, while vora comes from Latin namely  vorare which means to eat or eat. Meanwhile, in a shorter sense, herbivores are organisms that eat plants or protein from plants.

In general, animals that belong to the herbivore group usually live in places where there is a lot of grass growing, such as meadows, forests and rice fields. In addition, herbivorous animals also live in groups according to their type. Herbivores are forms of animals that consume or eat plants, fungi, and so on.

This is because herbivorous animals are animals that are mostly tame. Therefore, herbivorous animals often become prey for meat-eating or carnivorous animals.

Characteristics of Herbivorous Animals

Plant-eating animals or herbivores have their own characteristics or are different from meat-eating animals. In the country of Indonesia itself there are many types of animals and you need to know the characteristics of herbivorous animals. Here’s the explanation:

1. In general, the main food of herbivorous animals is grass or other plants such as vegetables.
2. Herbivorous animals reproduce by giving birth or viviparous.
3. Herbivorous animals are included in the category of mammals or animals that suckle.
4. Most herbivorous animals live or live on land.
5. Herbivores belong to the class of warm-blooded animals.
6. Has wide molars.
7. Most herbivorous animals have 4 legs.
8. Herbivores are animals that have a backbone.
9. Herbivorous animals often become prey for carnivorous animals.

Types of Herbivorous Animals

Now, after knowing the meaning of herbivores, then in the following discussion, we will discuss various types of herbivorous animals. Here are some types of herbivorous animals along with a brief explanation.

• Goat

Goats are one of the most common animals in Indonesia and are the choice of Indonesians for livestock. In addition, goats are among the species that have been raised the longest, both from milk, meat, fur and skin throughout the world.

Goats are grass or leaf-eating animals that are of medium size and goats reproduce by giving birth. K

Male or female goats have a pair of horns, but the horns of male goats are bigger. In general, goats have a beard, a convex forehead, an upward tail, and straight, coarse hair.

• Buffalo

Do you think that buffalo are similar to cows? In fact, this buffalo is different from a cow and this buffalo is one of the animals that is quite common in Asia.

Buffaloes are tough working animals so that until now they are used to pull carts and plow fields. Buffalo is the domestic wild buffalo which you can still find in Pakistan, India, Bangladesh, Nepal, Bhutan, China, Vietnam, the Philippines, Thailand, Taiwan and Indonesia.

Buffaloes not only produce meat that can be consumed by humans, but also produce milk that can also be consumed by humans which can be processed into yogurt.

Buffaloes have horns that can be used as home decorations. Not only that, buffalo horns can also be used as raw materials for crafts, such as smoking pipes, rakes, leather puppet clamps and many more. Even buffalo dung can be used as fertilizer and fuel when it is dried.

• Rabbit

This cute little animal is a mammal from the Leporidae family which can be found in various countries. Breeding in this rabbit is viviparous or giving birth. Until now, several types of rabbits have become one of the choices as pets and meat animals.

Rabbits have many types. Continental Giant is the largest type of rabbit in the world that can be used as meat and as pets. Not only that, this type of rabbit is the largest rabbit in the world with a height or length of 4 feet + 4 inches or 132 cm and a weight of about 3.5 stones or 22.2 kg.

When viewed from the type of fur, this type of rabbit has short and long hair. The color is slightly yellowish, and in winter the color turns gray. In addition, rabbit meat can be consumed and has many health benefits for the body.

• giraffe

Giraffe or scientific name Giraffa Camelopardalis is a mammal that has a higher height than other animals in general. The height of a male giraffe can reach 4.8 – 5.5 meters and can weigh up to 1,360 kilograms. On the other hand, female giraffes are usually slightly shorter, reaching 4.5 meters and have a lighter body weight.

Giraffes are mammals that have even nails endemic to Africa. Giraffes have long legs and irregular brown skin. The long neck can flex. Giraffes have a nearly half a meter long tongue and can help the giraffe to trace leaves as high as six meters from the ground.

• Elephant

This long-nosed animal is a large mammal from the Elephantidae family and the Proboscidea order.

The proboscis or proboscis can be used for many things, especially as a tool for breathing, sucking water, and picking up objects. Then, the incisors of the elephant grow into canines which are useful for protecting themselves and can be used as weapons and tools to move objects or dig the ground.

The large ears can be used to regulate body temperature. While the African elephant species has larger ears and a concave back, it is different from the ears of the Asian elephant which has a smaller body size and a convex back.

Elephants are herbivorous animals that can be found in savannas, forests, deserts and swamps. Female elephants tend to live with family groups. They consist of a single female and her young or several related females and their young. This group is led by an individual elephant called a matrix which is the oldest female.

Male elephants will leave the group at puberty, they will live alone or with other males. The adult male interacts with the family group again when searching for a mate and enters a testosterone-boosting stage that can help achieve his productive success.

The calf is the center of attention of the family group and is dependent on its mother for nearly three years.

Elephants can live for 70 years in the wild and communicate through touch, sight, smell and sound. Intelligence possessed by elephants has self-awareness and has a sense of empathy for other elephants.

• Rhinoceros

The next herbivorous animal is the rhinoceros. The characteristics possessed by rhinos are different from other animals. Rhino weighs more than one ton. If there are two of them, then one of them is located in front of it. The skin of this horned animal is approximately 1.5 to 5 cm where the skin comes from a layer of collagen.

• Zebra

Zebras or commonly referred to as striped horses are herbivorous animals from Africa which are famous for having a unique body, namely black and white stripes. The stripes on the zebra’s body are a characteristic that is easy to recognize. Each zebra has a distinctive pattern of stripes. Zebras live in eastern and southern Africa.

Zebras can also be found in various types of habitats such as savannas, grasslands, forested areas, scrubland, and mountainous areas. Usually, zebras become food for lions.

However, zebras can also bite and kick. Zebra species also have different behavior. Zebras can communicate with a wide variety of sounds, body postures and facial expressions. Social care is useful for strengthening the bonds that exist between individuals in other zebra species.

• may

Camels are herbivorous animals with two species of even-toed hoofs that live in dry areas such as deserts in Asia and North Africa. The average life expectancy of a camel is 30-50 years. Camel can be used to get its milk which contains higher nutrition than cow’s milk, its meat can be consumed and can be used as working animals.

In addition, they were able not to eat or drink for several days. The camel’s hump can help him to adapt which can store special fat and can be converted into water with the help of oxygen resulting from respiration. One gram of fat in the humps can be converted into one gram of water.

In fact, its adaptability is its respiratory system which leaves very few traces of water vapor coming out of the lungs and then being reabsorbed by the body. In fact, camels can survive temperatures up to 41 degrees Celsius. If it is more than this temperature, the camel will sweat. Evaporation from sweat comes off on his skin not on his hair.

Camels can survive with a mass loss of about 20 – 25% when they sweat. Even though the camel loses quite a lot of fluids in the body, its blood remains hydrated up to 25%.

• kangaroo

Kangaroo belongs to the category of herbivores. Kangaroos have pouches known as marsupials. This typical Australian animal is a mammal that has two strong hind legs, large soles which are useful for jumping at speeds of 20-25 km/hour. In fact, kangaroos can jump up to 70 km per hour.

Kangaroo can live approximately 9-18 years, but some can live up to 28 years. Kangaroos have strong forelimb muscles, and these muscles can be used for fighting.

• grasshopper

Grasshoppers are herbivorous insects that can fly. This grasshopper has an antenna that is shorter than its body size. The sound made by grasshoppers is produced by rubbing their hind femurs with their wings or abdomen, or by flapping their wings while flying.

The body size of female grasshoppers is generally larger than that of male grasshoppers. Grasshoppers prefer open nature such as valleys with lots of grass and other small plants. Many species of locusts live in the grasslands, so they often attack the surrounding farmer’s fields which will make farmers lose money.

• Cow

Cows are included in the class of grass-eating animals or herbivores. Cows are kept because they have good benefits for humans. The milk and meat are rich in high nutrition, so the cow is one of the most frequently kept animals, such as goats.

Not only milk and meat, but other parts of the cow such as skin, viscera, horns and even its dung can be used as a driving force for transportation, processing of planting land (plow), and other industrial tools (such as sugar cane crusher).

In addition, cow power is also used by humans as a traditional tool for plowing fields. Based on its benefits, cattle are classified as beef cattle, dairy cattle, and working cattle.

Currently, the cattle business can be said to be quite lucrative. This is not without reason because the cow itself has many benefits for humans. For example, meat that can be consumed, milk that can be drunk, and so on. In addition, usually cows that many people glance at are fat cows.

Maybe some of us have felt burning and pain in the chest. Sinaumed’s need not panic. This condition is normal and common. However, if it occurs repeatedly to the point that it interferes with daily activities, it must be taken seriously by professionals.

Launching from the Alodokter.com page, heartburn is pain in the pit of the stomach that occurs in the middle of the chest or just above the stomach. This discomfort is often accompanied by the appearance of a bitter and sour taste in the mouth. These symptoms have the potential to become worse after a large meal or while lying down.

Please note that hearburn is not related to the heart ( heart ). The cause of hearburn is stomach acid rising into the esophagus. That, which causes a burning feeling in the upper abdomen or lower chest.

Heartburn occurs when the ring-shaped muscle ( sphincter ) that is part of the valve between the esophagus and stomach cannot tighten or close normally. Which, this muscle ring should be able to contract after food from the esophagus enters the stomach.

Summarizing from the Alodokter.com page, heartburn triggers include the following.

• Eat in an amount that exceeds the capacity of the stomach.
• Eating spicy food.
• There is pressure on the stomach, usually due to pregnancy, constipation, or obesity.
• Consuming caffeine, make citrus, alcohol, or chocolate.
• After eating immediately lie down.
•  
• Take certain medications, such as aspirin or ibuprofen.
• Stress and lack of sleep.

Symptoms of heartburn vary from person to person. However, the most common signs are a burning sensation in the chest and throat. Launching from the Hallosehat.com page, here are the common symptoms of heartburn.

• Feeling pain or burning in the chest. This condition usually occurs after eating or at night.
• Pain in the chest when lying down, bending down, or eating.
• Bitter or sour taste in the mouth.
• Often awakens from sleep.
• Burning feeling in the throat.
• There is liquid that feels like it will come out of the throat.
• Very extreme chest pain.
• Difficulty breathing
• Difficulty swallowing when eating.
• Excessive headache.
• Heartburn occurs several times a week.
• Nausea and vomiting, even after taking over-the-counter medications.
• Vomiting blood, or passing blood when urinating.
• Decreased ability to taste, causing weight loss.

Pain in the chest that indicates a hearburn and a heart attack is difficult to distinguish. Both have similar markings. The age of the sufferer is also similar, that is, both in adulthood or people with excess body weight.

To differentiate between a hearburn and a heart attack, Sinaumed’s can look at the areas of the body where the pain is. When the pain is only felt under the ribs and the top of the stomach, it is included in heartburn.

Other symptoms that often occur are a sour taste in the mouth, wanting to vomit, or a burning feeling in the throat, especially after eating. Meanwhile, symptoms of a heart attack can be felt starting from cold sweats, shortness of breath, dizziness, and chest pain that is pressing and radiating to the shoulders, neck or back.

Causes of Hearburn

Under normal conditions, there is a muscle under the esophagus that acts as a barrier for stomach acid to go up into the esophagus. The muscle works by expanding and closing when swallowing food or drink.

However, when these muscles weaken, stomach acid can rise back up into the esophagus, causing a burning sensation in the chest. This condition can cause heartburn. Launching from the Hallosehat.com page, here are the causes of heartburn.

1. Food and Drinks

Food and drink have an influence on the strength of the lower esophageal muscles. Preferably, Sinaumed’s avoid spicy, fatty and sour foods.

2. Burden or Pressure on the Stomach

When the stomach and esophageal muscles are stressed, they have the potential to weaken and cause stomach acid to rise. Sinaumed’s need to be careful when doing strenuous exercise, coughing too hard, being overweight, and pregnant. These things can trigger excess burden or pressure on the stomach.

3. History of Disease

The state of health of each individual also affects the occurrence of heartburn. Several diseases such as hiatal hernia, diabetes and other autoimmune diseases (scleroderma, CREST syndrome and Raynaud’s phenomenon) are associated with heartburn.

4. Body Position

When lying down, the lower esophagus muscles will weaken. Especially after eating. This can trigger stomach acid to flow back into the esophagus more easily.

5. Lifestyle

An unhealthy lifestyle has the potential to cause heartburn. Such as smoking, drinking drinks that contain alcohol, often consuming caffeine, and other things that trigger stomach acid to rise to the esophagus.

6. Certain Drugs

Several types of drugs have the potential to weaken the performance of the muscles below the esophagus. When Sinaumed’s is undergoing heart, asthma, blood pressure treatment, the risk of experiencing heartburn will be higher.

Foods and Drinks that Trigger Hearburn

Every food and drink that enters the body affects the health of the body. Launching from the Hallosehat.com page, here is a list of foods that can trigger heartburn.

1. Spicy Food

Spicy foods contain capsaicin which can slow down the digestive process and increase the risk of heartburn. Not only that, spicy food can also injure the esophagus. This can make chest pain worse.

2. Fatty Foods

Fat in food can weaken the lower esophageal muscles by stimulating the release of the hormone cholecystokinin (CCK). This has the potential to cause stomach acid to easily rise.

3. Mint

The notion that peppermint and spearmint can relieve digestive problems is a misconception. In fact, research has shown that consuming too much mint can injure the esophagus and worsen heartburn.

4. Food and Beverages Containing Citrus

In a study involving 400 heartburn sufferers, it was shown that 73% felt heartburn symptoms after drinking orange juice. However, there is no further explanation regarding the link between citrus and can cause heartburn.

5. Fizzy Drinks

Drinks or foods that contain soda can increase stomach acid levels and weaken the esophageal muscles.

6. Chocolate

Chocolate contains caffeine, serotonin, and theobromine which have the potential to cause the lower esophageal muscles to weaken.

7. Coffee

Coffee contains high caffeine. This can trigger an increase in stomach acid and heartburn.

8. Bombay onions

The increase in stomach acid is not only caused by food or drinks that contain caffeine or soda. Onions can also increase stomach acid levels. This is due to the presence of fiber contained in onions.

9. Alcohol

Alcohol can trigger stomach acid to rise, especially wine and beer. Both types of drinks can increase stomach acid levels and injure the esophagus.

Hearburn Treatment and Prevention

When Sinaumed’s visits the doctor to check for heartburn , he will usually be advised to change his diet, certain diets, lifestyle, or be prescribed certain drugs. However, if you are not sure whether your hearburn is acute enough and injures other organs, several tests will usually be carried out.

Launching from the Hallosehat.com page, here are several types of tests carried out to see if there is damage to other organs.

1. Gastrointestinal Endoscopy

Gatrointestinal endoscopy is performed by inserting a small camera through the mouth. The goal is to see the state of the esophageal wall. This test will show the causes and complications of heartburn.

2. Esophageal manometry

An esophageal manometry test is performed to determine if the function of the esophagus is normal or not. This test will be done when the endoscope test does not show any complications. However, the patient still complained of pain.

3. X-ray

X-ray images are used to see the esophagus and chest clearly.

4. Ambulatory Acid Probe

An ambulatory acid probe is performed to detect the time it takes for stomach acid to rise up to the esophagus.

Handling heartburn can use several types of drugs including the following.

• Antacids to neutralize stomach acid quickly.
• H2–receptor antagonists (H2RA) or H2 receptor antagonists can reduce the amount of stomach acid produced and relieve pain.
• Proton pump inhibitors (PPIs) or proton pump inhibitors such as lansoprazole and omeprazole.

Sinaumed’s can prevent heartburn through a healthy lifestyle. Here are some tips for maintaining fitness and body health.

1. Maintain Weight

Controlling body weight so as not to be obese is one way to prevent heartburn. One of the ways is to run a diet that is safe and according to doctor’s recommendations.

2. Avoid Overeating

It’s better to eat small portions and often than to eat large portions once in a while.

3. Wear clothes that are not too tight

Shirts and pants that are too tight can put excess pressure on the stomach. This has the potential to cause stomach acid to rise and a burning feeling in the chest.

4. Sports

Exercise helps to control weight and maintain overall health.

5. Avoid Eating Before Bed

A stomach that is too full before going to bed can cause stomach acid to rise into the esophagus.

6. Changing the Meal Menu

Avoid fatty, spicy foods, soft drinks, coffee, chocolate, and so on.

7. Don’t lie down after eating

After eating do not lie down. At least wait until 3 hours after eating if you want to lie down. The digestive process will be disrupted if you lie down immediately after eating, let alone eat large portions.

8. Avoid Smoking and Alcoholic Beverages

Cigarettes and alcoholic beverages can trigger stomach acid to rise. Therefore, avoiding cigarettes and alcoholic beverages can suppress heartburn and maintain a healthy body.

Stomach Acid and Heartburn are Different

When the pit of the stomach hurts, it does not only indicate heartburn. This could indicate stomach acid or gastroesophageal reflux disease  (GERD). GERD itself is a condition that can cause pain in the pit of the stomach,  heartburn,  and various other symptoms in the lower chest and stomach area.

A person with GERD will experience mild acid reflux, at least twice a week. Meanwhile, they also have the potential to experience severe disturbances, at least once a week. Therefore, medication and/or lifestyle changes are needed to reduce the intensity of stomach acid.

In general, a person who experiences increased stomach acid is characterized by a sour or bitter taste in the mouth, a burning or burning sensation in the chest and solar plexus. These symptoms will get worse when the patient bends over, after eating, or lying down.

Launching from the  Alodokter.com page. GERD symptoms do just that. Here are some other symptoms that can accompany GERD.

• Respiratory problems, such as coughing and shortness of breath. People who have asthma will often relapse when GERD symptoms recur.
• Hoarseness.
• Nausea and vomiting.
• Sore throat.
• Expulsion of stomach contents involuntarily.
• Difficulty swallowing or feeling like you have a lump in your throat.
• Sleep disorders.
• Bad breath.
• Tooth decay due to frequent exposure to stomach acid.

GERD is often confused with a heart attack. This is because both of them cause a burning sensation in the chest and pain in the pit of the stomach. However, the two can still be distinguished.

A heart attack is characterized by heartburn or chest pain that is so severe that it radiates to the neck, arms or jaw, and appears after physical activity.

Meanwhile, GERD is characterized by heartburn accompanied by a sour taste in the mouth. It is not exacerbated by physical activity. It also doesn’t spread to the neck or arms, and it gets worse when you lie down.

Meanwhile, how to deal with stomach acid or GERD, as published on the  Alodokter.com  page as follows.

• Lose weight, if you are overweight.
• Do not smoke.
• Elevates head while sleeping.
• Do not lie down or sleep for at least 2 to 3 hours after eating.
• Avoid foods or drinks that trigger acid reflux, spicy and fatty foods, chocolate, mint and coffee.
• Don’t wear clothes that are too tight.

 

Health Effects of Benzene – Benzene is an organic compound with the chemical formula C ₆ H ₆ . The benzene molecule is composed of six carbon atoms bonded in a ring, with one hydrogen atom attached to each carbon atom. Because benzene contains only carbon and hydrogen atoms, it is classified as a hydrocarbon.

Benzene is a natural constituent of crude oil and one of the essential petrochemicals. Because the ring has continuous pi bonds between the carbon atoms, benzene is classified as an aromatic hydrocarbon, [n]-anulene ([6]-anulene). Benzene is sometimes abbreviated as PhH. Benzene is a colorless, highly flammable and sweet-smelling liquid. Its presence gives a distinctive aroma at gas stations.

Its main use is as a precursor to manufacture chemicals with more complex structures, such as ethylbenzene and cumene, which are produced annually by billions of kilograms. Because benzene has a high octane number, gasoline (bbm) contains its aromatic derivatives such as xylene and toluene up to 25%. Benzene itself has been limited to less than 1% in gasoline because it is known to be a human carcinogen. Its non-industrial applications have been limited for the same reasons.

Benzene is found in trace amounts in petroleum and coal. It is a by-product of incomplete combustion of most materials. For commercial use, until World War II, most of the benzene was obtained as a by-product of coke production for the steel industry.

However, in the 1950s, when there was increasing demand for benzene, especially from the growing polymer industry, it became necessary to produce benzene from petroleum. Today, most of the benzene comes from the petrochemical industry, with only a small part being produced from coal.

Use of Benzene

The main use of benzene is as an intermediate for making other chemicals, most notably ethylbenzene, cumene, cyclohexane, nitrobenzene and alkylbenzenes. More than half of benzene production is processed into ethylbenzene, the precursor to styrene, which is used to make polymers and plastics such as polystyrene and EPS.

Some 20% of benzene production is used to make cumene, which is required in the production of phenol and acetone for resins and glues. Cyclohexane accounts for about 10% of world benzene production; mainly used in the manufacture of nylon fibers, which are processed into textiles and engineering plastics.

Small amounts of benzene are used to make several types of rubber, lubricants, dyes, detergents, drugs, explosives, and pesticides. In 2013, the largest benzene consuming country was China, followed by the United States. Benzene production is currently expanding in the Middle East and Africa, while production capacity in Western Europe and North America is stagnant.

Toluene is currently often used as a substitute for benzene, for example as a fuel additive. The dissolving properties of the two are similar, but toluene is less toxic and has a wider range of liquid phases. Toluene is also processed into benzene.

Benzene Health Effects

Benzene is classified as a carcinogen, which increases the risk of cancer and other diseases, and is also a major cause of bone marrow failure. A large body of epidemiological, clinical, and laboratory data links benzene to aplastic anemia, acute leukaemia, bone marrow disorders, and cardiovascular disease. Specific haematological malignancies associated with benzene include acute myeloid leukemia (AML), aplastic anemia, myelodysplastic syndromes (MDS), acute lymphoblastic leukemia (ALL), and chronic myeloid leukemia (CML).

The American Petroleum Institute (API) stated in 1948 that “it is generally considered that the only absolutely safe concentration of benzene is zero”. There is no safe level of exposure; even a small amount can cause damage. The US Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) classifies benzene as a human carcinogen.

Long-term exposure to excessive levels of benzene in the air causes leukemia, a potentially fatal cancer of the blood-forming organs. In particular, acute myeloid leukemia or acute nonlymphocytic leukemia (AML & ANLL) are undoubtedly the result of benzene exposure. The IARC ranks benzene as “known to be carcinogenic to humans” (Group 1).

Because benzene is ubiquitous in gasoline and ubiquitous used hydrocarbon fuels, human exposure to benzene is a global health problem. Benzene attacks the liver, kidneys, lungs, heart and brain and can cause damage to DNA strands, damage to chromosomes, etc. Benzene causes cancer in animals, including humans. Benzene has been shown to cause cancer in both sexes in several species of laboratory animals exposed by various routes.

Benzene exposure

According to the Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease Registry (ATSDR) (2007), benzene is a chemical that is produced anthropogenic and occurs naturally from processes including volcanic eruptions, wild fires, synthesis of chemicals such as phenol, production of synthetic fibers, and manufacture of rubber, lubricants, pesticides, drugs, and dyes.

The main sources of exposure to benzene are tobacco smoke, car service stations, motor vehicle exhaust and industrial emissions. However, benzene can also be ingested and absorbed through the skin due to contact with contaminated water. Benzene is metabolized by the liver and excreted in the urine.

Measurement of benzene levels in air and water was carried out by collecting them through activated charcoal tubes, which were then analyzed by gas chromatography. Measurement of benzene in humans can be done through urine, blood and breath tests. However, all of these have limitations because benzene is metabolized rapidly in the human body. Exposure to benzene can progressively cause aplastic anemia, leukemia, and multiple myeloma.

OSHA regulates benzene levels in the workplace. The maximum permissible amount of benzene in the workspace air for an 8-hour workday, 40-hour week is 1 ppm. Because benzene can cause cancer, NIOSH recommends that all workers wear special breathing equipment when they are likely to be exposed to benzene at levels in excess of the recommended exposure limit (8 hours) of 0.1 ppm.

Benzene Exposure Limits

The United States Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA) has determined the maximum contamination level (MCL) for benzene in drinking water to be 0.005 mg/L (5 ppb), as promulgated through the US Primary Drinking Water Regulations.

This regulation is based on the prevention of benzene leukemogenesis. The maximum contaminant level goal (MCLG), a non-enforceable health goal that will allow an adequate margin of safety for the prevention of adverse effects, is a zero concentration of benzene in drinking water. The EPA requires reporting a minimum of 10 pounds (4.5 kg) of benzene spills or accidental releases into the environment.

The U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) has set a permissible exposure limit of 1 part benzene per million parts air (1 ppm) in the workplace for an 8-hour work day, 40 hours per week. The short-term exposure limit for benzene in air is 5 ppm for 15 minutes.

These legal limits are based on research showing strong evidence of health risks for workers exposed to benzene. The risk of exposure to 1 ppm for years of service has been estimated as 5 excess leukaemic deaths per 1,000 exposed employees (this estimate has no threshold for the carcinogenic effect of benzene). OSHA has also set an action level of 0.5 ppm to encourage lower workplace exposures.

The US National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) revised the Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health (IDLH) concentration for benzene to 500 ppm. The current NIOSH definition of an IDLH condition, as given in the NIOSH Respirator Selection Logic, is one that poses a threat of exposure to an airborne contaminant when that exposure is likely to cause death or immediate or delayed permanent health effects or prevent escape from an environment [NIOSH 2004].

The purpose of assigning IDLH values ​​is (1) to ensure that workers can escape from a contaminated environment in the event of failure of respiratory protective equipment and (2) to be considered the maximum level above that permitted only for highly reliable respirators providing maximum worker protection. . [NIOSH 2004].

In September 1995, NIOSH issued a new policy to develop recommended exposure limits ( RELs ) for substances, including carcinogens. Because benzene can cause cancer, NIOSH recommends that all workers use special respirators when they are susceptible to exposure to benzene at levels exceeding the REL (10-hour) 0.1 ppm. The NIOSH short term exposure limit (STEL – 15 minutes) is 1 ppm.

The American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) adopted Threshold Values ​​(TLV) for benzene at 0.5 ppm TWA and 2.5 ppm STEL. Regulation of the Minister of Health of the Republic of Indonesia No. 70 of 2016 concerning Standards and Requirements for Industrial Work Environment Health requires a Threshold Value (NAV) for benzene of 0.5 ppm TWA and 2.5 ppm STEL.

Benzene Toxicology

1. Exposure Biomarkers

Several tests can determine exposure to benzene. Benzene can be measured by inhalation, blood or urine, but such tests are usually limited to the first 24 hours after exposure because of the rapid removal of benzene by exhalation or biotransformation. Most people in developed countries have a baseline level of benzene and other aromatic hydrocarbons in their blood.

In the body, benzene is enzymatically converted to a number of oxidation products including muconic acid, phenylmercapturic acid, phenol, catechol, hydroquinone, and 1,2,4-trihydroxybenzene. Most of these metabolites are of value as biomarkers of human exposure, as they accumulate in the urine in proportion to the duration and degree of exposure.

In addition, they also persist for several days after exposure has stopped. The ACGIH biological exposure limits for occupational exposure are 500 μg/g creatinine for muconic acid and 25 μg/g creatinine for phenylmercapturic acid in end-of-shift urine specimens.

2. Biotransformation

Although not a common substrate for metabolism, benzene can be oxidized by bacteria and eukaryotes. In bacteria, the enzyme dioxygenase can add oxygen to the ring, and the unstable product is immediately reduced (by NADH) to a cyclic diol with two double bonds, destroying its aromaticity. Furthermore, the diol is reduced by NADH to catechol. The catechol is then metabolized to acetyl CoA and succinyl CoA, which are used by organisms primarily in the Krebs cycle for energy production.

The metabolic pathway for benzene is quite complex and begins in the liver. Several enzymes are involved in it. These include cytochrome P450 2E1 (CYP2E1), quinine oxidoreductase (NQ01 or DT-diaphorase or NAD(P)H dehydrogenase (quinone 1)), GSH, and myeloperoxidase (MPO). CYP2E1 is involved in many steps: the conversion of benzene to oxepine (benzene oxide), phenol to hydroquinone, and hydroquinone to benzenetriol and catechol.

Hydroquinone, benzenetriol and catechol are converted to polyphenols. In the bone marrow, MPO converts these polyphenols into benzoquinones. These intermediates and metabolites induce genotoxicity through various mechanisms including inhibiting topoisomerase II (which maintains cell structure and organization), generating oxygen free radicals (unstable species) that trigger mutations, increasing oxidative stress, inducing DNA strand breaking, and DNA methylation graying (Fig. that can affect gene expression). NQ01 and GSH alter metabolism from toxicity. NQ01 metabolizes benzoquinones to polyphenols (counteracts MPO effect). GSH is involved in the formation of phenylmercapturic acid.

Genetic polymorphisms in these enzymes can lead to loss of function or gain of function. For example, mutations in CYP2E1 increase activity and result in an increase in toxic metabolites. NQ01 mutations result in loss of function and can lead to decreased detoxification. Mutations of myeloperoxidase result in loss of function and can lead to decreased formation of toxic metabolites. GSH mutations or deletions result in loss of function and result in decreased detoxification. These genes may be targets of genetic screening for susceptibility to benzene toxicity.

3. Molecular Toxicology

The paradigm of toxicological assessment of benzene is shifting towards the domain of molecular toxicology as it enables a better understanding of fundamental biological mechanisms. Glutathione appears to play an important role by protecting against benzene-induced DNA damage and is being identified as a new biomarker for its exposure and effects.

Benzene causes chromosomal aberrations in peripheral blood leukocytes and bone marrow which explains the high incidence of leukemia and multiple myeloma caused by chronic exposure. These deviations can be monitored using fluorine in situ hybridization (FISH) with DNA quarts to assess the effect of benzene together with haematological tests as markers of hematotoxicity.

Benzene metabolism involves enzymes encoded by polymorphic genes. Studies have shown that genotype at this locus can influence susceptibility to the toxic effects of benzene exposure. Individuals carrying the NAD(P)H variant: quinone oxidoreductase 1 (NQ01), microsomal epoxide hydrolase (EPHX) and deletion of glutathione S-transferase T1 (GSTT1) showed a greater frequency of single-stranded DNA breaks.

4. Biological Oxidation and Carcinogenic Activity

One way to understand the carcinogenic effects of benzene is to examine the products of biological oxidation. Pure benzene, for example, oxidizes in the body to produce an epoxide, benzene oxide, which is not excreted easily and can interact with DNA to produce dangerous mutations.

Benzene Exposure Routes

1. Inhalation

Outdoor air may contain low levels of benzene from auto repair shops, wood smoke, tobacco smoke, gasoline transfers, motor vehicle exhaust, and industrial emissions. Approximately 50% of total exposure to benzene nationally (United States) comes from smoking tobacco or from exposure to tobacco smoke. After smoking 32 cigarettes per day, the smoker will consume about 1.8 milligrams (mg) of benzene. This amount is about 10 times the average daily intake of benzene by non-smokers.

Most of the inhaled benzene is exhaled in its original form through exhalation. Human studies show that 16.4% to 41.6% of retained benzene is excreted via the lungs within five to seven hours, after exposure to 47 to 110 ppm for two to three hours, and only 0.07% to 0 The remaining .2% of benzene is excreted in its natural form in the urine.

After exposure to 63 to 405 mg/m ³ of benzene for 1 to 5 hours, 51% to 87% is excreted in the urine as phenol within 23 to 50 hours. In another study, 30% of benzene absorbed through the skin, which is mainly metabolized in the liver, was excreted as phenol in the urine.

2. Exposure to Soft Drinks

Under certain conditions and in the presence of other chemicals, benzoic acid (a preservative) and ascorbic acid (Vitamin C) may interact to produce benzene. In March 2006, the Food Standards Agency in the United Kingdom conducted a survey of 150 soft drink brands. It found that four contained benzene at levels above the limits set by the World Health Organization (WHO). The affected group (English: batch ) was withdrawn from circulation. A similar problem was reported by the FDA in the United States.

3. Contamination of Water Supply

In 2005, the water supply to the Chinese city of Harbin, with a population of nearly nine million people, was stopped due to exposure to large amounts of benzene. Benzene leaked into the Songhua river, which supplies drinking water to the city, after an explosion at a China National Petroleum Corporation (CNPC) factory in Jilin city on November 13, 2005.

4. Injection

The Nazis used injected benzene as one of several methods of assassination.

Congratulations Prayer –For Muslims, praying to Allah SWT is something that must be done before carrying out any activity. Starting from eating, sleeping, studying, even going in and out of the bathroom, there are prayers that must be said in order to get the pleasure of Allah SWT. Allah SWT really likes His servant who always prays all the time, because that means his heart still remembers the name of Allah SWT as God Almighty. The meaning of these prayers, besides asking for smoothness by Him, can also be a prayer to avoid any distress. That is why, Rasulullah SAW also often reminds his people to always pray for safety in this world and the hereafter. So, how do you read prayers for congratulations, both before starting a long journey and praying for safety in this world and the hereafter? Come on, see the following review so thatSinaumed’s can practice these prayers and become a true Muslim who adheres to religion.

How to Pray for a Safe Journey?

In Islam, it is highly recommended to always pray before starting any activity, including when going on a long or short trip. Even when we are about to leave the house, there is also a special prayer that must be said to Him, so that we will always be under His protection. Just a little trivia , when in the middle of a trip, Sinaumed’s can also recite a prayer in the form of surah Al-Ikhlas. Reporting from jabar.nu , here are some prayers for congratulations when you want to travel both near and far.

When Leaving the House

If you want to travel a short distance, surely the time difference between entering the house and leaving the house is only a moment. Even so, Sinaumed’s as a Muslim also still has to recite prayers in and out of the house.

( Bismillâhi tawakkaltu ‘alallâhi wa lâ haula wa lâ quwwata illâ billâhil ‘aliyyil ‘adhîm )

Meaning: “In the name of Allah, I place my trust in Allah. There is no power and strength except with (the help of) Allah.”

When Entering the House

After traveling, both long and short distances, when you want to enter the house it is recommended to recite a prayer.

It means:

“O Allah, I really ask You for the goodness of entry and exit, by saying Your name we enter, by saying Your name we go out, and only in Allah, our Lord, we put our trust.”

While on a break from a long journey

When traveling long distances, for example in the context of going home on Eid, Sinaumed’s and his family will definitely rest first. Usually, this break is done in a rest area or restaurant where you eat with activities in the form of prayer, rest, and eating lunch that has been prepared beforehand. So, while taking a break from this long trip, Sinaumed’s, don’t forget to read a prayer of congratulations …

( A’udzu bi kalimaatillahit taammaati min syarri maa khalaq)

Meaning: “I seek refuge in Allah’s perfect sentence from the evil of His creation.”

When You Arrive at Your Destination

When you reach your destination after traveling far or near, people usually say Hamdalah. That ‘s okay , because it means they are expressing gratitude for all the blessings that have been given by Allah SWT. But it turns out, there is a safe prayer for Muslims that can be read when you arrive at your destination. Here’s the prayer.

​​​​​​Allaahumma innii as aluka lhairohaa wa khaira Profesionalhaa wa khoiro maa fiihaa wa a’uudzubika min syarri haa wa syarri Profesionalhaa wa syarri maa fiihaa.

Meaning: “O Allah, I ask You for the good of this country and the good of its inhabitants and the good that is in it. I seek refuge in You from the evil of this land and the evil of its people and the evil that is in it.”

How to Pray Congratulations When Riding a Vehicle?

In our sophisticated era, to travel to a destination, whether at a short or short distance, it is rare to walk. Most of us, of course, use vehicles, whether by air, land or sea transportation. So, when you want to get on this vehicle, Sinaumed’s also has to recite a prayer of congratulations.

Generally, when you want to get on a vehicle to travel, you can recite the following prayer.

(Alhamdulillahilladzī/subhanalladzī sakhkhara lanā hādzā wa mā kunnā lahū muqrinīna, wa innā ila rabbinā lamunqalibūna)

Meaning: “Praise be to Allah/glorify God who has subjected all this to us. Even though we weren’t able to control it before. Indeed, we will return to our Lord.”

Air Vehicle

When we want to travel by means of air transportation, for example an airplane, we still have to pray to Him, OK? This is mandatory, especially for Muslims, so that they are given safety to their destination. Well, reported from orami , here is the prayer.

Congratulations Prayer When Using the Long Version of the Air Vehicle

(Allahu Akbar, Allahu Akbar, Allahu Akbar, Subhanalladzi sakhkhoro lana hadza wa maa kunnaa lahu muqrinin, wa innaa ilaa robbinaa lamunqolibuun, allahumma inna nas’aluka fii safarinaa hadzal birro wat taqwa wa minal ‘amal maa tardho, allahumma hawwin ‘alaina safarona hadza wa athwi ‘annaa ba’dahu, allahumma antas shohibu fis safari wal kholifatu fil expert, allahumma inni a’udzubika min wa’tsaais safari wa kaabatil mandzhori wa suuil munqolibi fil maali wal expert)

Meaning: “God is Great, God is Great, God is Great. Glory be to Allah who has subdued this (plane) for us, whereas before we were not able to control it, and verily to Allah we return.

O Allah, indeed we ask for goodness and piety in this journey, we ask for deeds that are pleasing to You. O Allah, make this journey easy for us, and make it shorter for us.

O Allah, You are my companion in traveling and taking care of the family. O Allah, I seek refuge in You from fatigue in traveling, sad sights and a bad return in wealth and family.”

Prayer of Congratulations When Using a Short Version of an Air Vehicle

(Allahumma hawwin ‘alainaa safaranaa hadzaa wathwi ‘annaa ba’dahu allahumma anta ash shohibu fissafari wal khalifatu fil-ahl)

Meaning: “O Allah, make this trip easy for us, and make the distance closer. O Allah, who accompanies you when traveling, and you also protect your family.”

Land Vehicles

Land vehicles are the most widely used means of transportation by people around the world to travel, both long and short distances. That’s why, when traveling using land transportation, you still can’t forget the reading of congratulations, OK ?

Prayer of Congratulations When Using a Long Version of a Land Vehicle

(“Bismillah

Alhamdulillah

(Subhaanal-ladzii sakh-khoro lanaa haadzaa wa maa kunnaa lahuu muqriniin. Wa innaa ilaa robbinaa lamunqolibuun), 

Alhamdulillah (3x), 

Allahu Akbar (3x), 

Subhanaka inni zhalamtu nafsi, faghfirli, fa innahu la yaghfirudz-dzunuba illa anta”)

Meaning: “In the name of Allah, all praise be to Allah, Glory be to the Lord who has subjected this vehicle to us, even though we were previously unable to control it. And indeed we will return to our Lord (on the Day of Judgment). Praise be to Allah (3x), Allah is the Greatest (3x), Glory to You O Allah, indeed I have wronged myself, so forgive me. Indeed, no one forgives sins except You.” (Reported by Abu Dawud and Tirmidhi).

Congratulations When Using a Short Version of Land Vehicles

( Subhanallazi sakhorolana hadza wa ma kunna lahu muqrinin, wa innaa ilaa robbinaa lamunqolibuun)

It means:

“Glory be to Allah who facilitates this (vehicle) for us and we have nothing to associate with Him, and verily we will return to our Lord.”

Marine Vehicles

Did Sinaumed’s ever take sea transportation in the form of a ship during a study tour when he was in school? Or even Sinaumed’s want to do the study tour at this time? If so, don’t ever forget to always recite the reading of the prayer of congratulations …

Congratulations When Using the Long Version of the Sea Vehicle

Reporting from islam.nu , there is a prayer that we can pray as a prayer for congratulations when traveling by sea vehicle. This prayer is actually taken from the prayer recited by Prophet Noah when he boarded his ark during a flash flood.

(Bismillahi majrêha wa mursâhâ, inna rabbî la ghafûrur rahîm, (Hud ayat 41). Wa mâ qadarullâha haqqa qadrihî, wal ardhu jamî’an qabdhatuhû yaumal qiyâmah, was samâwâtu mathwiyyâtum bi yamînihî, subhânah yurikû wa ta’âlâ ‘an m -Zumar verse 67).

Meaning: “Noah said, ‘Go up into it all of you by mentioning the name of Allah when sailing and anchoring.’ Truly my Lord is truly Forgiving, Most Merciful,’ (Sura Hud verse 41). They did not magnify God with the glory that they should. Whereas the earth is entirely in His hand on the Day of Judgment and the heavens will be rolled up with His right hand. Glory be to God and Most High is He from what they associate,” (Sura Az-Zumar verse 67).

Congratulations When Using the Long Version of the Sea Vehicle

(Bismillahi majreehaa wa mursaahaa inna robbii laghofuurur rohiim)

It means:

“In the name of Allah who runs this vehicle sails and anchors. Verily, my Lord is Most Forgiving, Most Merciful.”

How is the Prayer for the Happy World and the Hereafter?

Prayer is not only intended so that the activities we do are given smoothness by Him, but also so that we remain safe both in this world and the hereafter. This safety is also not only aimed at ourselves, but also with our families and even property. Reporting from jabar.nu , there are a number of prayers for the survivors of the afterlife that Sinaumed’s can pray anytime and anywhere so that they can still receive safety from Allah SWT.

Prayers Congratulations and Refuse Bala

(Allȃhummaftah lanȃ abwȃbal khair, wa abwȃbal baraka, wa abwȃban ni’mah, wa abwȃbar rizqi, wa abwȃbal quwwah, wa abwȃbas shihhah, wa abwȃbas salȃmah, wa abwȃbal ‘ȃfiyah, wa abwȃbal jannah. Allȃhumma ‘ȃfinȃ min kulli balbal’id dunyȃ wa ‘adzȃbil ȃkhirah, washrif ‘annȃ bi haqqil Qur’ȃnil ‘azhȋm wa nabiyyikal karȋm syarrad dunyȃ wa ‘adzȃbal ȃkhirah. Ghafarallȃhu lanȃ wa lahum bi Rahmatika Yȃ arhamar rȃhimȋn. , walhamdulillȃhi rabbil ‘ȃlamȋn) 

It means:

“O Allah, open for us the doors of goodness, the doors of blessings, the doors of enjoyment, the doors of sustenance, the doors of strength, the doors of health, the doors of safety, the doors of afiyah, and the doors of heaven. O Allah, save us from all the trials of this world and the torment of the hereafter. Turn us away from the ugliness of the world and the torment of the hereafter with the rights of the great Qur’an and the degree of Your merciful prophet. May Allah forgive us and them. O Most Merciful One. Glory be to your Lord, the Lord of majesty, from all that they attribute. May greetings go to the apostles. Praise be to Allah, Lord of the Worlds” (See Perukunan Melayu, [Jakarta, Alaydrus: undated], pages 55-56).

Prayers for the World and the Hereafter

(“Rabbana atina fiddunya hasanah wa fil-akhirati hasanah, waqinaa adzaabannaar.”)

Meaning: “O our Lord, give us goodness in this world and goodness in the hereafter. And protect us from the torment of hell.”

Prayers Congratulations on Religion, Fortune, Grace, and Forgiveness from Allah SWT

(“Allahumma inna nas-aluka salamatan fiddin wa afiyatan fil-jasadi wa ziyadatan fil-ilmi wa barakatan firrizqi, wa repentance qablal-maut, wa Rahmatan indal-maut, wa maghfiratan ba’dal-maut. Hawwin alaina fi sakaratil-maut, wannajata minannari, wal-afwa indal-hisab.”)

Meaning: “O Allah, we ask You for religious safety, bodily health, increased knowledge, blessings of sustenance, getting repentance before death, receiving grace when dying, receiving forgiveness after death. And lighten the agony of death, and save us from the torment of hell, and get us forgiveness on the day of reckoning.”

Understanding 10 Adab in Praying to Allah SWT

Based on Ihya Ulumuddin by Imam Al-Ghazali and Al-Adzkar Al Muntakhabah min Kalami Sayyidil Abrar by Imam An-Nawawi, it is stated that there are 10 adabs in praying, namely.

1. Pray at the Efficient Time

The efficacious time means the noble time to pray to Allah SWT, for example on the day of Arafah, in the month of Ramadan, on Friday, at dawn, and the time of the last third of every night. This is also in line with the words of the Prophet Muhammad SAW:

“ Allah descends into the heavens of the world every night, when the last third of the night remains. Allah says, ‘Whoever prays to Me, I grant, whoever asks, I will give, and whoever asks for forgiveness I will surely forgive’ .” (HR. Muslim)

2. Take advantage of the Eligible Circumstances

Apart from praying at efficacious times as previously explained, we must also take advantage of special circumstances to recite prayers. For example, when the position of prostration, when it rains, before breaking the fast, when iqamah prays, and others. Regarding this, the following hadith has been narrated.

Abu Hurairah radhiallahu’anhu said, “Surely the gates of heaven open when jihad fi sabillillah is raging, when it rains, and when the iqamah is obligatory. Take advantage to pray at that time.” (Syarhus Sunnah al-Baghawi, 1: 327)

The Prophet shallallahu ‘alaihi wa sallam said, “ The prayer between the call to prayer and the iqamah is not rejected. ” (Narrated by Abu Daud, Nasa’i, and Tirmidhi)

The Prophet Muhammad SAW said, ” The closest state between a servant and his Lord is when he prostrate. So pray more .” (HR. Muslim)

3. Facing Qibla

When saying a prayer to Allah SWT, including the prayer of congratulations, it must still be done facing the Qibla. Don’t forget to raise your hands and rub them over your face after you finish praying. There is a hadith regarding this etiquette of praying, namely.

From Jabir radhiallahu ‘anhu, that the Prophet Muhammad SAW when he was at Padang Arafah, he faced the Qibla, and he continued to pray until the sun set . (HR. Muslim)

From Salman radhiallahu ‘anhu , that the Prophet Muhammad SAW said, ” Indeed your Lord is Shame and Most Giving. He is ashamed of His servants when they raise their hands to Him then his servants return empty-handed (not granted). ” (Narrated by Abu Daud and Tirmidhi and He hasan khan)

4. Must be in a low voice and not aloud

When praying, it’s best to do it in a low voice and don’t need to be loud. We must adjust the volume as much as possible so that it is not too loud, but also not too low. This is in accordance with the word of Allah SWT,

“ Don’t harden your prayers and don’t underestimate them and find a middle way between the two. ” (QS. Al-Isra: 110)

5. Avoid Rhyming Sentences

When praying, it’s better not to need to use rhyming sentences because it’s feared that it will cross the line. The principle of prayer is not to overuse the words. This is in accordance with the word of Allah SWT, which states that:

“ Pray to your Lord with humility and a soft voice. Verily, Allah does not like those who exceed the limits. ” (QS. Al-A’raf: 55)

6. Done in a special way’

Prayer must be done solemnly, with full submission and fear of Allah SWT. Realizing that we are just ordinary people who are asking something from God Almighty. This is in accordance with the word of Allah SWT,

“ Verily they are the ones who always hasten in (doing) good deeds and they pray to Us with hope and anxiety. And they are people who are humble to Us. ” (QS. Al-Anbiya’: 90)

7. Strengthen your heart and believe that you will be granted

When reciting prayer readings to Allah SWT, we must be steady in heart and believe that the prayer will be granted by Allah SWT. This is also in line with the words of the Prophet Muhammad, which reads:

“ Don’t pray when you say, ‘O Allah, forgive me if You will. O Allah, have mercy on me, if You will’. He should make up his mind, because no one forces Allah .” (Narrated by Bukhari and Muslim)

8. Continue to Ask Allah SWT

Praying cannot be done just once or twice, it must be continuous. For example, “O Allah, forgive Your servant, forgive Your servant…, forgive Your servant who is full of sin. forgive ya Allah….” There is a hadith that states the existence of this adab praying, namely.

Ibn Mas’ud said, Rasulullah SAW when he prayed, he repeated it three times. And when he asked Allah, he repeated three times . (HR. Muslim)

9. Starting with the Recitation of Dhikr

The next adab of prayer is that you have to start reading the prayer by reciting the dhikr first. Not only dhikr, but also with praise to Allah SWT and blessings. Likewise when you want to end the prayer.

The Prophet Muhammad SAW once said, “ You will be granted (prayers) as long as you are not in a hurry. He said, ‘I have prayed, but it hasn’t been answered ‘.” (Narrated by Bukhari and Muslim)

10. Repentance

The point is that when facing and asking for prayer to Allah SWT, one must also comply with all the rules of His religion.

Reference:

• https://jabar.nu.or.id/
• https://mediaindonesia.com/
• https://islam.nu.or.id/

Also Read!

• 15 Prayers That Can Be Read After Prayers of Hajat
• Definition and Examples of Intercessory Prayer
• Prayers For Parents That Can Be Practiced
• Procedures for Wudhu and Their Intentions and Prayers
• 8 Manners of Eating Accompanied by Prayer
• The number of cycles and the intention of the midnight prayer
• Prayer for the Rain to Stop
• Understanding Ain’s Disease and Prayers to Avoid It
• Grave Pilgrimage Prayers and Procedures

 

Hadith about seeking knowledge – Islam was revealed as compassion for the universe ( rahman lil ‘alamin ) and this can only be done by knowledgeable people. That is why Allah SWT and Rasulullah SAW require humans to never stop learning throughout their lives through the Al-Qur’an, Sunnah, and Hadith about studying knowledge.

The Prophet sallallahu alaihi wasallam was also sent by God to improve human life through science and knowledge. He showed that people who have knowledge and believe in God can form good morals, so that they can love and cherish this universe.

However, in everyday life, maybe Sinaumed’s often encounters people who use their knowledge for something that is not good. They are a group of humans with bad morals that can harm humans and other living things around them.

Phenomena like this can arise because of an imbalance between world knowledge and religious knowledge (morals). As expressed by Abu Zakariya An Anbari Rahimahullah:

Knowledge without etiquette is like fire without wood, and etiquette without knowledge is like a soul without a body

“Knowledge without adab is like fire without firewood, and adab without knowledge is like a body without a soul” ( Min Washaya Al Ulama liThalabatil Ilmi p. 10 )

Humans who have extensive knowledge but are not accompanied by religious knowledge at all, tend to commit acts that damage the earth and fellow human beings. That is why, the knowledge of religion, manners and good morals must be taught from childhood.

Hadith About Seeking Knowledge

Seeking knowledge is actually a person’s effort to change himself for the better because one of the basic purposes is to show the way of truth so that people are spared from ignorance.

Islam gives orders to seek knowledge to men and women, there is no difference between the two because seeking knowledge has the value of worship. As the Prophet Muhammad SAW said:

To rise in the morning and learn a verse from the Book of God is better than worshiping a Sunnah.

“Truly if you take a step in the morning (or evening) and then learn one verse from the Book of God (Al-Qur’an), then the reward is better than a year’s worship”.

In another hadith, the Prophet said:

Whoever goes out to seek knowledge is on the path of God until he returns. (Narrated by Al-Tirmidhi)

“Whoever goes to seek knowledge, then he belongs to the group of sabilillah (people who uphold the religion of God) until he returns.” ( HR. Tirmidhi ).

The two hadiths above show that seeking knowledge has a high position when viewed from the aspect of worship. Because, after all, worship that is not based on knowledge will be in vain. Shaykh Ibn Ruslan also stated:

. And whoever does without knowledge, his deeds are rejected, not accepted.

“Anyone who does charity (carries out charity) without being based on knowledge, then all his deeds will be rejected, that is, not accepted.”

As described in the book Science of Hadith by Munzier Suparta. In this book you will find explanations of various hadiths that can be used as references.

The Priority of Seeking Knowledge in the Qur’an and As-Sunnah

So important is knowledge for humans, that Allah SWT and Prophet Muhammad SAW also mentioned several virtues of knowledge in the Qur’an and As-Sunnah, among them:

Knowledge as a Sign of the Goodness of Allah SWT

Allah makes it easy for humans to understand and learn science so that humans understand that He has willed good for themselves and guided them to things that are pleasing to Him.

With knowledge, a person’s life will become more meaningful, his future will be brighter, and he can also achieve pleasures that have never been felt in the world. The Prophet Shallallahu Alaihi Wasallam said:

Whoever Allah desires good for, He will give him understanding of the religion.

“Whoever God wants good for a servant, then He will understand about his religion.” ( Muttafaq Alaihi from Muawiyah bin Abi Sufyan Radhiallahu anhuma )

On another occasion, the Prophet said:

Indeed, God Almighty created His creation in darkness, then He cast upon them His light, so whoever strikes him from that light is guided, and whoever misses him goes astray.

“Truly Allah Azza Wajalla created His creatures in darkness, then Allah gave them from His light, so whoever gets that light, then he gets guidance, and whoever doesn’t get it, then he gets lost.” ( HR. Ahmad (2/176), Tirmidhi, no:2642, Ibnu Hibban (6169), Al-Hakim in mustadrak (1/84), from the hadith of Abdullah bin Amr bin Ash. Authenticated by Al-Albani in Ash-Shahihah ( 3/1076 ).

Knowledge as a Savior from the Curse of Allah SWT

In a hadith narrated from the companion of Abu Hurairah Radhiyallahu Anhu, the Prophet said:

The world is cursed. Cursed is what is in it except for the remembrance of God and what follows Him, and a scholar or a learner.

“Indeed the world is cursed, cursed is everything in it, except the remembrance of God and the deeds of obedience, so is a pious or learned person.” ( HR. Tirmidhi (2322), Ibnu Majah (4112), recommended by Al-Albani in sahih al-jami’, no (1609))

Knowledge Is the Way to Heaven

It is mentioned from the hadith of Abu Hurairah Radhiyallahu Anhu in Sahih Muslim, that the Prophet Shallallahu Alaihi Wasallam said:

And whoever travels a path seeking knowledge, God will facilitate for him a path to Paradise.

“Whoever follows a path to acquire knowledge, Allah will make easy for him a path to paradise.” (HR. Muslim: 2699)

This hadith explains that when a human leaves his house to seek knowledge, he will be the reason he enters heaven. With notes, you must learn knowledge with full sincerity.

That way, it will be easier for you to understand which is good and which is bad; which is halal and which is haram; which is true and which is false; and you will be encouraged to practice the knowledge you have learned. This is what makes a human being a servant who is pleased with Allah SWT because he has followed the guidance of His Messenger and heaven is God’s reward for a servant who is pleased with Him.

Knowledge Is More Main Than Worship

Prophet Muhammad Sallallahu Alaihi Wasallam said:

The virtue of knowledge is dearer to me than the virtue of worship, and the best of your religion is piousness

“I like the priority of knowledge more than the priority of worship, and the best of your religions is to behave wara’.” ( HR. Al-Hakim, Al-Bazzar, At-Thayalisi, from Hudzaifah bin Yaman Radhiallahu Anhu. Authenticated by Al-Albani in sahih al-jami’:4214 )

In another narration, the Prophet said:

And the superiority of the scholar over the worshiper is like the superiority of the moon on the night of the full moon over all the planets.

“Indeed, the superiority of a knowledgeable person over worshipers is like the superiority of the moon on a full moon night over all the stars.” ( HR. Abu Dawud (3641), Ibnu Majah (223), from the hadith of Abu Darda’ Radhiallahu Anhu ).

The essence of these two hadiths is that knowledge is more important than other acts of worship, such as sunnah fasting, sunnah prayers, and so on. In addition, knowledge is also part of the most noble worship.

In the book Yuk, Learning Hadith by Dian K. & Aan Wulandari, Sinaumed’s can read 30 stories that contain lessons from other prophetic hadiths.

The Position of People Who Seek Knowledge

If compared, the position of knowledgeable people is very far from uneducated people, either in terms of value or degree. As Allah SWT says in QS. Az-Zumar and Al-Mujadalah:

Say, are those who know and those who do not know equal? ​​Only those with understanding remember. (Al-Zumar: 9)

“ Say, ‘Are those who know and those who do not know the same?’ Actually only people who have common sense can receive lessons. ” ( QS. Az-Zumar / 39: 9 )

God raises those among you who have believed and those who have been given knowledge. (Al Mujadalah: 11)

“ Surely Allah will raise (degrees) those who believe among you and those who are given knowledge by degrees. ” ( QS. Al-Mujãdalah / 58: 11 )

The two verses above explain the high degree and value of knowledgeable people. Armed with knowledge, humans will be able to get all the goodness and noble positions. Although there is a possibility that one day people’s view of knowledge or the owner of knowledge will “blur” or shift for one reason or another. However, when a very great danger arises, humans will learn again and find out how to overcome it.

Not only that, the Prophet also explained further about the position of knowledgeable people:

وعن أِبي أِمامة رِضى اِلله عِنو أِن رِسول اِلله صِلى اِلله عِليو وِسلم قِالَ فَِِِضِْلُِ اِلِْعَِالَِِِ عَِِلَِىِ الِْعَِابِِدِِكَِِِفَِضِْلِِى عِلَِى أَِِدِْنَِاكُِمِْ ثُِ قَِِالَِ رَِِسُِولُِ اِللهِِ إِ نِ اِللهَِ وَِِمَِلَِ كَِِِِتَِوُِ وَِِأَِىِْل اِل سِمَِاوَِاتِِ وَِِالْاَِرِْضَِِ حَِتَِّّ اِلنِّمِْلَِةَِ فِِِِ حِِِجِْرِِىَِا وَِِ حَِِ تِّ اِلُِوِْتِِ لِيُِصَِلِّوِْنَِ عَِِلَِى مُِِعَِلِّمِِى اِلن اسِِ اِلَِْيْ رَِِِ (رواه Al-Tirmidhi)

” from Abi Amamah ra. That the Messenger of God Saying the superiority of a person of knowledge over a person who worships is like the superiority of myself over all of you, then the Messenger of Allah, peace and blessings be upon him. Saying “indeed Allah and his angels and all the inhabitants of the heavens and the earth, even the ants in their holes and the fish, truly bless those who teach goodness to people ” ( HR. Turmudzi )

The reward of the knowledgeable will never end

Knowledge is so important to humans that the Prophet, may God bless him and grant him peace, called it a reward that will never end even after death:

When he dies, if he cuts, if he is not one of them, there is no one who is a ritual: no one who is a ritual, or a mother, a mother, a mother, a mother, a mother.

“When the son of Adam dies, all his deeds are cut off except for three deeds: sadaqah jariyah, useful knowledge and a pious son who prays” ( HR at-Turmudzi) .

All the hadiths mentioned above clearly explain the primacy of knowledge for humans, both in this world and in the hereafter. Especially knowledge that benefits other humans.

Requirements That Must Be Fulfilled To Demand Knowledge

According to Imam Al-Zarnuji, a friend of the Prophet Ali bin Abi Talib said that there are 6 conditions for studying knowledge, namely:

Intelligent

The earliest requirement that you must fulfill to study is to have intelligence. Because, as Imam Ghazali said, a smart person knows that he doesn’t know something and that’s why he learns it.

In this case, intelligent is not the level of one’s intelligence, but rather not crazy. That means you have to be sane and aware. Can distinguish black from white, numbers one and two.

Greedy (Hirsun)

Greed is synonymous with bad character, but in studying greed is also necessary. For something positive, greed can also be interpreted as a strong will and enthusiasm.

In other words, being greedy for knowledge is the same as never giving up even though you have to encounter various difficulties and suffering during the process of learning or seeking knowledge. More than that, throughout his life he also will not stop seeking new knowledge.

Be patient

In addition to never giving up when encountering various obstacles, someone who studies knowledge must also be patient through each process. Patience here can also be interpreted as being steadfast in the face of trials or accepting things that don’t suit you.

Therefore, Sinaumed’s must always surrender to Allah SWT. With a note, you also need to give your best effort to improve the difficult situation you are facing.

Capital/supply

Seeking knowledge is an obligation for every Muslim from birth to his last day in the world. Knowledge here is not only obtained from formal education, but also non-formal education.

Unfortunately, to gain knowledge also requires capital or provisions that are not small. Both in the form of money, energy, time, and thoughts. Hence, some people who are not well off decide to drop out of school for financial reasons.

However, this is only a small part of it, because the majority of people who are underprivileged will try their best to seek the highest level of knowledge. With all the shortcomings, they are still able to complete education.

This proves that Allah will surely provide sustenance for everyone who is studying, as promised by Rasulullah SAW. On the other hand, it also shows the power of belief is real.

Thus, no matter how hard your current condition is, keep trying and have faith in the power and help of Allah SWT, and keep looking for other ways that you can use to study.

Teacher’s Guide

Not a few people get lost when studying because they don’t get instructions from a teacher. In this technological era, you can indeed learn many things by yourself because the sources of knowledge are everywhere. However, make sure you have a teacher who can give advice and guidance.

Long Time

Because knowledge itself is very, very broad or even has no end, it certainly takes a long time to learn it, as the saying goes “Seek knowledge to the grave”. For example, if you want to become a lecturer, you must first graduate from elementary, middle, high school, and university, which takes approximately 16 years.

Obligation to Practice Knowledge

The best knowledge is that which can benefit others. So, apart from being obliged to seek knowledge, you are also obliged to share it with the people around you. Be a guide for those who are studying.

By doing this you can be an example and role model for them. Who knows, the people you mentor will follow in your footsteps. The Prophet Muhammad SAW gave a threat to his people who did not spread their knowledge in a hadith:

From the knowledge of the knowledge, it is from the fire (narrated by Abu Hanab, and the ruler of Al-Haram).

“Whoever knows an information (knowledge) and keeps it (does not practice it), then Allah will bind him with the bonds of hell fire” . ( HR Abu Daud, Tirmidhi, Ibn Majah, Ibn Hibban and judges )

Knowledgeable people who do not practice knowledge will also have nothing but an image of the knowledge itself and no meaning and essence in it. In essence, knowledge must be spread so that it does not disappear.

If Sinaumed’s doesn’t believe you, try writing what you’ve learned on a blog or social media. No need to think about how many people will read it, just write down what you get while studying. In this way, it’s easier for you to remember every knowledge you get.

On the other hand, if you don’t do anything after getting knowledge, gradually it will disappear and leave little picture as proof that you have indeed studied that knowledge.

Allah swt says in surat al-Baqarah, volume 2, verse 44:

Take command of the people and forget that your mind, even if a book is written, will you not understand? (Surah Al-Baqarah)

“Why do you order other people (to do) good, while you forget yourself, even though you read the Bible (Torah)? So you don’t think” ( QS Al-Baqoroh, 2 )

In this verse, it is very clear that Allah’s command regarding the practice of knowledge is very clear. Knowledgeable people who teach others without doing what they teach are among the losers. Especially if you don’t spread and don’t practice your knowledge.

As explained by Shaykh DR. Mahmud Ath-Thahhan in his book entitled Mustahalahul Hadith: A Complete & Practical Guide to Learning the Basics of Hadith Science.

 

Growth and Development in Living Things – Every living thing goes through a process of growth and development. This growth and development as two processes that run parallel and side by side.

So that the process of growth and development cannot be separated from one another. Check out a more complete explanation of the following Growth and Development, Sinaumed’s.

Definition of Growth and Development

Growth in biology refers to physical changes in the form of an increase in size, volume, height, and mass, friends.

This happens because during the growth period, the cells in a living creature’s body increase in number, as a result the tissues and organs in the living body’s body also change in size.

Well, body changes in this growth can be measured quantitatively. We can measure our height and weight using a tape measure and body scales. Growth has a very distinctive characteristic, which is irreversible, meaning it cannot return to normal.

So your current height can’t change anymore to be like when you were little. Growth as a process of increasing size that cannot return to its origin (irreversible), includes an increase in volume and an increase in mass.

Apart from being caused by an increase in cell size, growth also occurs due to an increase in the number of cells. For example, a newborn baby, for example, is 45 cm in size and weighs + 3 kg.

After experiencing growth, height can reach more than 150 cm and weight more than 30 kg. Development is a process towards achieving maturity. At the cellular level, development can take the form of the differentiation of newly dividing cells to form the tissues that make up certain organs.

In plants development is characterized by the emergence of flowers or fruit. While in animals and humans it is characterized by the maturity of the reproductive organs so that they are ready to produce offspring.

Development also causes psychological development from infancy, childhood, and adulthood. Unlike growth, development cannot be seen with the naked eye or measured and weighed.

This is because development in biology refers to the process leading to maturity. Because it cannot be measured and weighed, progress can only be measured qualitatively.

Learn about the growth and development of living things in a fun, varied, creative, and responsible way through the book Thematic 3A Growth & Development of Living Things in the 2013 Revised 2016 Curriculum which acts as a facilitator and motivator.

The point is this, if you pay attention to a newborn, the baby can only cry. But once the baby enters the age of one to three years, he starts babbling smoothly. This is what is known as development. Growth and Development does not only occur in humans, but also:

1. Growth and Development in Animals

Growth and development in animals occur in all parts of the body, in contrast to plants which occur only in certain parts, namely in the meristem area.

Growth and development in animals begins with the formation of a zygote from the fertilization process and continues until the animal reaches adulthood. Thus growth and development in animals can be divided into two parts, namely the embryonic phase and the postembryonic phase.

The embryonic phase is the growth and development that starts from the zygote until the formation of an embryo before birth or hatching. While the post-embryonic phase is the growth and development that starts from birth or hatches until the animal is an adult.

2. Growth and Development of Plants

Begins from seed germination. The sprout then develops into a perfect little plant. After growing to a certain size and age, the plant will develop to form flowers and fruit or seeds as a breeding tool.

Growth in plants occurs in the meristematic area (growing point), which is the part that contains meristem tissue. This tissue is located at the tip of the stem, root tip, and cambium.

The activity of the meristem tissue located at the tips of the stems or roots produces a different growth pattern when compared to the meristem tissue in the cambium. Therefore growth in plants can be divided into two types, namely primary growth and secondary growth.

Sinaumed’s can learn about the development and growth of both plants and animals through the book SD/MI KL.III Growth & Development of Living Things Theme 1 K/13 Rev.18 BSE.

Factors Influencing Growth and Development

The growth and development of living things is influenced by two factors. These two factors are internal factors and external factors. Let’s discuss internal factors first, shall we?

As the name implies, this internal factor is found in our own bodies. There are two internal factors, namely genes and hormones. Genes have a role in our growth by 60% to 80%. Because everyone’s genes are different, differences appear in the human body.

For example in Europeans and Asians. Europeans tend to be bigger and taller than Asians because their genes are different.

While hormones have a role in stimulating the growth of our bodies. When we are in a period of growth, there is something called HGH (Human Growth Hormone) aka human growth hormone. The amount of hormones in our body must be just right, my friends. The problem is that if the amount of our hormones is too little, our growth will be stunted and the result will be our bodies become stunted.

On the other hand, if there are too many of them, our growth will become exaggerated, aka excessive. As a result our body will experience gigantism, having a size and height above normal.

Even though most of our growth and development is influenced by genes and hormones, our growth and development can also be influenced by external factors, aka factors that are around us, friends. One of the external factors that affect our growth and development is the food we consume.

When we were little, our parents always tried to provide nutritious and balanced food so that we could grow and develop optimally.

In addition to food, environmental conditions also influence the growth and development of living things. For example, in plants, the condition of sunlight in the environment where they grow and develop has a very big role.

This happens because plants need sunlight to carry out photosynthesis.

If sunlight in the plant’s environment grows and develops less or does not exist, after a while the photosynthesis process will stop and eventually it can die.

If you pay attention, your height and size can be different when compared to your classmates. Even though you are almost the same age, in other words, the growth and development time is almost the same.

Why is that? This is because growth and development are influenced by various factors. Because there are different factors that affect growth and development, the height and size of your classmates may vary. Factors that affect growth and development can be divided into:

1. Internal Factors

Internal factors that affect growth and development come from within the living body itself. Included in this category are:

a. Hormone

Hormones are substances that control various functions in the body. Even though the levels are small, hormones have a real influence in regulating various processes in the body. There are various types of hormones that affect growth and development in living things:

1) Hormones in Plants

Hormones in plants are often called phytohormones or body regulators. Some of them

• Auxin (functions to stimulate cell elongation, stimulate the formation of flowers, fruit, and activate the cambium to form new cells),
• Cytokinins (stimulate cell division and accelerate the formation of roots and shoots),
• Gibberellin (stimulates cell division and enlargement and stimulates seed germination. In certain plants, gibberellins can cause flowers to appear more quickly),
• Ethylene (plays a role in inhibiting stem elongation, accelerating fruit aging, and causing leaf senescence),
• Abscisic acid plays a role in the defoliation process.

2) Hormones in Animals

Thyroxine (functions to control animal growth. In frogs this hormone stimulates the start of the metamorphosis process), Somatomedin, which affects bone growth, Ekdison and juvenile (functions affect the development of the larval and adult phases, especially in invertebrate animals)

3) Hormones in Humans

Learn hormones in the human body through an adventure with Ddotty & Sleepground to understand how they work in the book Latest Science: Ddotty & Sleepground – Hormones, Important Substances in the Human Body.

Hormones are produced by endocrine glands or blind glands, which are glands that do not have ducts.

Some growth hormones in humans include the hormone thyroxine (produced by the thyroid or thyroid gland, it will affect growth, development, and carbohydrate metabolism in the body.

Deficiency of this hormone can cause mixoedema (obesity). Growth hormone produced by the anterior pituitary is also called somatotropin hormone (its role affects a person’s growth rate.

A child will not grow normally if there is a lack of growth hormone.

During growth, an excess of this hormone will result in gigantic growth, otherwise a deficiency will cause stunting. If excess hormone occurs after adulthood, it will cause enlargement of certain body parts, such as the nose or ears).

The hormone testosterone (regulates the development of the reproductive organs and the appearance of secondary sex characteristics in men), the hormone estrogen or progesterone (regulates the development of the reproductive organs and the appearance of secondary sex characteristics in women).

b. Gen

Genes are substances or materials that carry traits that are inherited from the parent. Genes affect the characteristics and characteristics of living things, for example body shape, height, skin color, flower color, fur color, fruit taste, and so on.

Genes also determine the metabolic capacity of living things, thereby influencing their growth and development.

Animals, plants and humans who have good growth genes will grow and develop rapidly according to their growth and development period.

Although the role of genes is very important, genetic factors are not the only factors that determine growth and development patterns, but are also influenced by other factors.

For example, plants that have superior characteristics in terms of growth and development will only grow quickly, bear fruit quickly and bear fruit abundantly if planted in fertile land and the conditions are suitable.

If it is planted in barren land and the environmental conditions are not suitable, its growth and development will not be good. Likewise, superior livestock will only produce optimally if given good feed and maintained in an appropriate environment.

In humans themselves, it is believed that genes are the elements that shape self, life, character, and even human destiny, which Sinaumed’s can learn more about through the book Genes by Siddhartha Mukherjee.

2. External Factors (External)

External factors that affect the process of growth and development of living things come from environmental factors. Several environmental factors that affect the growth and development of living things are as follows.

a. Food or Nutrition

Food is a raw material and source of energy in the body’s metabolic processes. The quality and quantity of food will affect the growth and development of living things.

The nutrients needed by humans and animals are carbohydrates, proteins, fats, vitamins and minerals. All of these substances are obtained from food. As for plants, the nutrients needed are in the form of water and nutrients dissolved in water.

Through the process of photosynthesis, water and carbon dioxide (CO2) are converted into food substances with the help of sunlight. Although they do not play a direct role in photosynthesis, nutrients are needed for plants to grow and develop properly.

Whereas in humans, it is believed that nutrition is important since a person is still in the stages of fetal development until birth which is the golden period of child development. Learn more fully in the book Baby Brain Training Food, a Source of Nutrition for the Golden Age of Baby Brain Development.

b. Water and Humidity

Water and humidity are important factors for growth and development. Water is needed by living things. Without water, living things cannot survive.

Water is where chemical reactions take place in the body. Without water, chemical reactions in cells cannot take place, which can result in death.

Humidity is the amount of water vapor in the air or soil. Moist soil has a good effect on plant growth.

Humid conditions a lot of water that can be absorbed by plants and less evaporation. This condition greatly affects cell elongation. Moisture is also important to maintain the stability of cell shape.

c. Land

For plants, soil affects their growth and development. Plants will grow and develop optimally if the soil conditions where they live are in accordance with the nutritional needs and nutrients. Soil conditions are determined by other environmental factors, such as temperature, mineral content, and water.

d. Temperature

All living things need an appropriate temperature to support their growth and development. This temperature is called the optimum temperature, for example the normal human body temperature is around 37°C.

At the optimum temperature, all living things can grow and develop properly. Animals and humans have the ability to survive within a certain range of environmental temperatures.

Plants show a more pronounced effect on temperature. Rice planted at the beginning of the dry season (high average air temperature) is harvested faster than rice planted during the rainy season (low average air temperature).

A type of rose that grows and flowers well in cool mountains, when planted in hot coastal areas its growth becomes slow and does not produce flowers as beautiful as before.

This is because all processes in growth and development such as water absorption, photosynthesis, evaporation, and respiration in plants are affected by temperature.

Photosynthesis can also be interpreted as the process of cooking food in green plants with the help of sunlight. However, the process of photosynthesis that occurs in plants is more complex. Learn this process easily through the Smart Boy Science Comic: Photosynthesis.

e. Light

Light affects the growth and development of living things. Plants really need sunlight for photosynthesis. However, the presence of light can actually inhibit plant growth because light can damage the auxin hormone found at the tip of the stem.

If you store sprouts in a dark place for a few days, they will grow faster (taller) than they should, but appear weak and pale or yellowish due to lack of chlorophyll. Apart from plants, humans also need sunlight to help form vitamin D.

Study the various plants that are spread throughout the world in the Encyclopedia of World Flora which is below. This book is equipped with interesting explanations and pictures of flora so that Sinaumed’s will be more enthusiastic about learning it.

4 Fields of Human Growth and Development

In simple terms, there are four areas of human development and growth. These fields consist of physical, intellectual, emotional, and social. The four mutually influence each other and become important in determining the factors that affect human growth and development.

1. Physical field

Physical measuring will automatically present the growth and development of this section. As mentioned above, physical growth would refer to changes in one’s body.

This can be measured qualitatively by numbers such as height and weight. Physical development usually refers to skills in carrying out complex activities and requires certain skills.

A person’s physical development is usually related to fine and gross motor skills. This skill would also be related to one’s muscle size and strength. Physical development follows a person’s age. In those with intellectual disabilities, this development can be stunted.

2. Intellectual

Human growth and development will also depend on the intellectual factors they have. It is about one’s ability to learn something. Also about how one can organize thoughts and ideas in dealing with life.

To develop one’s intellectual side, language and communication skills are important. In addition, he must also be able to develop the cognitive side. Cognitive itself is a person’s ability to use and organize thoughts to understand the world around.

3. Emotional

Emotional factors also play an important role in human development. This ability is related to one’s feelings towards other people and other things in life.

A person’s expression in expressing his feelings can be expressed in words. If the individual is still a child, their language skills may still be limited in expressing emotions. When children are emotional, it could be that their control is still immature.

No wonder we see them crying, hitting, laughing loudly, and even kicking. All expressions will be conveyed depending on the situation experienced whether happy, sad or angry. The more mature, generally a person’s emotional control will be better.

4. Social

The social side is also important because it is in the course of one’s life. This ability is important in building relationships with other people in various environments and situations.

Consciously or not, someone has been in social relationships since they were little. Many consider that this skill is one of the conditions for a person’s success in life.

In the course of his life, a person will learn this ability in various ways, including:

• Respect the opinions and feelings of others
• Share with others
• Communicate with others Make friends

Recommended Books & Articles Related to the Growth and Development of Living Things

Source: from various sources

sinaumedia Literacy – Groundwater is a source of life for every living thing on earth. Without water, the earth will never have life. Today, the need for water has become the main concern in several countries experiencing a water crisis. Get to know some of the types of water on earth including river water, sea water, rain water, and ground water. Groundwater with its very important role for life. Starting from industrial needs, natural balance, to household needs. Check out a more detailed explanation about Groundwater below!

Definition of Groundwater

Based on Law Number 7 of 2004 concerning Water Resources which defines groundwater as water contained in the layers of rock below the soil surface.

According to Asdak in 2002, groundwater is any form of rainwater flow that flows below the soil surface as a result of the earth’s gravitational force, geological layering structures, and potential differences in soil moisture. This subsurface water is then known as groundwater as you can find a complete explanation in the book Groundwater by Iwayanredana.

Meanwhile, according to experts, the definition of groundwater includes the following:

• According to Bouwer in 1978, groundwater is a quantity of water below the earth’s surface which can then be collected by wells, tunnels, or drainage systems by pumping. Can also be called a stream that will naturally flow to the ground surface through seepage or a jet.
• According to Fetter in 1994, groundwater is water that is stored in saturated zones until it moves to various layers and soil rocks on earth until the water comes out as springs, or collects in lakes, ponds, rivers and seas (Fetter, 1994). . The upper limit of the water saturation zone is known as the water table.
• According to Soemarto, 1989 Groundwater is water that occupies cavities in geological layers. The layer of soil that is located below the soil surface is also known as the saturated zone, with the unsaturated zone that is above the saturated zone up to the ground surface, with its cavities filled with air and water.

 

Benefits of Groundwater

In general, water has various important benefits for life, not only for humans, but also for various living things on Earth such as animals and plants. With the problems of floods and droughts every year in Indonesia, this water problem is very important to address. Find the solution in the book Groundwater Spatial Planning + Cd.

Because of this, of course, water scarcity will lead to famine, drought, and even species extinction. According to Kodoatie (2012) water that comes from the ground is useful as a source of water for flora, fauna and humans. In addition, water also acts as a major part of the hydrological cycle. Water is then used by humans for daily needs, starting from bathing, drinking, washing, and so on.

Not only humans, all animals also need water to drink and survive, especially aquatic animals that live in water, such as rivers, lakes and oceans. Plants themselves use ground water which is absorbed through the roots to obtain nutrients to support the process of photosynthesis. The following are the benefits of groundwater that you need to know, which include:

• Groundwater as part of the hydrologic cycle or water cycle that continues to run over and over again
• Water also functions as a source of electricity generation, for example, in an underground river in the South Gombong karst area, which utilizes underground water flow for independent electricity.
• Groundwater fulfills various household needs, such as bathing, cooking, drinking and washing
• Agricultural irrigation, in farmers’ fields which are located far from water sources such as rivers in general, will then make drilled wells to meet the various water needs of agricultural crops
• Meet various industrial needs that require water in the production process, for example in textile factories that require water in dyeing, the leather industry to clean leather, and so on
• Groundwater in the form of underground rivers can be a natural research location regarding hydrological systems, biota, and others.
• The groundwater in the underground caves can then be further developed into tourism objects

 

Elemental Content of Ground Water

According to Kodatie in 2002, water contained chemical elements according to the groundwater flow system. This groundwater flow system is further divided into three, namely local systems, intermediate systems and regional systems. The chemical elements that dominate the local system include HCO3, Ca, and Mg. Then the intermediate system consists mostly of HCO3, Ca, and Mg. Meanwhile, regional system groundwater contains Na, Cl, and loss of Co2 and O2 elements. Rainwater then seeps below the surface of the soil in the form of infiltration and penetration, it carries various chemical elements.

This abundant rainwater can also be used to fulfill daily needs. Learn how in the book Harvesting Rainwater: A new source of drinking water.

The composition of dissolved substances in groundwater itself can then be further grouped into 4 groups (Hadipurwo, 2006) including:

• The main elements of groundwater (major constituents) which contain 1.0 – 1000 mg/l, which include calcium, sodium, magnesium, sulfate, chloride, silica, and bicarbonate
• Groundwater secondary elements (secondary constituents) containing 0.01-10 mg/l, which include iron, strountium, potassium, chlorate, nitrate, boron, and fluoride
• Minor constituents of groundwater which contain 0.0001-0.1 mg/l, which include aluminum, atymon, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, bromine, cobalt, copper, titanium, vanadium, germanium , iodine, phosphate, rubidium, selenium, lead, lithium, molybdium, nickel, manganese, uranium, and zinc
• Rare groundwater elements (trace constituents) containing less than 0.001 mg/l, which include beryllium, bismuth, cerium, cesium, gallium, gold, indium, lanthanum, niobium, platinum, radium, ruthenium, scandium, silver, thallium, tharium, tin, tungsten, yttrium, zircon

 

Ground Water Type

Surface groundwater is water that is above a layer of soil or rock. Groundwater with characteristics starting from the top and bottom of the layer which has a water content which is limited by an impermeable layer. The layer containing water is then located in a cyclical area of ​​a formation that is in the fold area of ​​groundwater, it can emit if it gets pressure on a strong cyclical area, and if the pressure is not strong enough then water can flow up. Surface ground water itself contains many benefits and is often used by humans in various ways, such as agriculture and irrigation. Groundwater can then be classified into 2 types, namely groundwater based on its location on the ground surface and based on where it comes from.

• Phreatic groundwater is groundwater on a shallow surface which is not far from the ground surface and is above the impermeable layer, for example in well water.
• Deep Groundwater or also known as Artesian is groundwater that lies between aquifer layers and impermeable rocks, for example in artesian wells. Artesian water is also called deep groundwater, because it can be found at a depth of 30 -80 meters from the ground surface. This groundwater can also be drunk or consumed directly because it has undergone perfect filtering and is free of germs or bacteria. Usually this type of artesian ground water is often used to overcome drought even during long dry seasons. This is because artesian groundwater contains a variety of groundwater with a stable water discharge, although building an artesian well also requires a lot of money because a large capacity special water pump is needed.

While groundwater based on its origin is then divided into 3 types, namely Meteorite Groundwater (Vados), New Groundwater (Juvenil), and Konat Water.

• Meteorite Groundwater (Vados) is groundwater originating from the process of precipitation (rain) clouds mixed with meteorite dust and then condenses.
• New Groundwater (Juvenil) is groundwater that originates from within the earth due to magma intrusion pressure, for example in geysers or hot springs.
• Konat water is groundwater trapped in layers of ancient rocks.

Determinants of Groundwater Quality

The quality of groundwater is determined by the various physical and chemical properties it contains. Based on physical properties, water quality can be determined from the color, smell, taste, turbidity, viscosity and water temperature. The taste of groundwater is also affected by salt elements dissolved or suspended in the water. The viscosity of water is caused by the particles contained in the water, where the more content there is, the thicker the water will be. In addition, the presence of high water temperatures will make the water then more liquid. The turbidity of the water is also influenced by the content of substances that are not soluble in water. For example, in particles of clay, silt, organic matter and microorganisms. Water temperature is also affected by environmental temperature, such as season or weather conditions that occur during the day and night as well as the location of groundwater.

• Water hardness is the hardness level of water which is generally caused by the elements Ca and Mg. Groundwater with some dissolved metal content, such as Na, Mg, Ca, and Fe. If the groundwater then contains a high amount of metal components then it will cause hard water.
• Dissolved Solids is the total solids dissolved in groundwater or all the substances left behind after the water has evaporated at a temperature of 103 degrees to 105 degrees Celsius. Raw water used for household needs and drinking water has a maximum content limit of 1,000 mg/l or is referred to as class I water quality standards. These dissolved substances include other organic substances in small quantities, as well as gases and inorganic salts.
• Electrical Conductivity as the ability of water to conduct electricity. This conductivity is affected by the elemental salt content in the water. The higher the salt element, the higher the electrical conductivity it will have. The conductivity of water is then affected by the dissolved substances, water temperature and chloride ions.
• Water acidity is then expressed in pH with a measuring scale between 1-14. Water with good quality is one that has a neutral pH content, namely pH 7, if the water pH is more than 7 then it will be alkaline while if it is less than 7 then it will be acidic.
• Ion content, both cations and anions contained in water, is measured in units of parts per million (ppm) or mg/l. The ions contained in water include Na, K, Zn, Cl, SO4, H2SF, NH4, NO3, NO2, CO2, CO3, HCO3, Ca, Mg, Al, Fe, Mn, Cu, KMnO4, SiO2, Cr , Cd, Hg, Co, boron, metal ions which are usually rare and toxic, such as Pb, Sn, As.

 

Water Source Damage

Damage to water resources cannot generally be separated from damage to the surroundings, for example population pressure, damage to land and vegetation. These three things are then interrelated and affect the availability of water sources. Of course, this condition also needs to be observed so as not to cause damage to groundwater in the surrounding area. With the existence of problems regarding natural resources, in the utilization for fulfillment of needs there is a law that protects it, and this can be found in Sinaumed’s’ book Law of Water Resources.

Several factors have caused the problem, including the rapid industrial growth in an area accompanied by the growth of human settlements, which will lead to a tendency for groundwater demand to increase. The use of water itself is quite diverse so of course there will be differences in terms of interests, purposes and ways of obtaining water sources. It requires a change in the attitude of most people who currently tend to be wasteful in using water and neglecting the importance of conservation.

Groundwater Problems

Groundwater, especially for household and industrial use in urban and lowland areas, has a tendency to contain organic acids and high levels of iron. This can then result from naturally occurring geological conditions with high Fe deposits, mainly caused by human activities in mountain slope areas. Meanwhile, water with a high organic acid content can be caused by peatlands or mangrove areas which are rich in organic compounds. The characteristics of water containing high organic compound content and high iron content can be seen as follows:

• Water with high iron content Water will then cause yellow water. When it comes out of the tap the water will appear clear but a few moments after that the water will turn yellow. This is also caused by water coming from a water source before it comes out of the faucet in the form of Fe2+ ions, after coming out of the faucet Fe2+ will be oxidized to Fe3+ which is yellow in color.
• Permanent yellow water is generally found in mangrove areas and peat soils which are rich in organic compounds. In contrast to the yellow caused by high iron content, this permanent yellow water is yellow when it first comes out of the faucet until after it is left standing it will remain that color.

 

Groundwater Basins (CAT)

The existence of a water crisis caused by environmental damage requires efforts to maintain the existence or availability of groundwater resources, one of which is by having a groundwater use monitoring system that can be visualized in spatial data and its attributes. Learn how to maintain and manage existing resources through the book Management of Water Resources in Regional Autonomy below.

According to the Law on Water Resources, the groundwater catchment area is called the Groundwater Basin (CAT) which is defined as an area bounded by hydrogeological boundaries, where all hydrogeological events such as the process of stockpiling , flowing and releasing groundwater take place. According to Danaryanto, et al. (2004), CAT in Indonesia is generally divided into two, namely free CAT (unconfined aquifer) and confined aquifer (CAT). These CATs are spread throughout Indonesia with the total amount of potential for each CAT as follows:

• Free CAT: Potential 1,165,971 million m³/year
• CAT Depressed: Potential 35,325 million m³/year

The CAT element is all the water that is below the ground surface, so it seems as if it is the opposite of surface water.

Grocery is – Various types of business options are all around us, but for those of you who want to focus on doing business while taking care of children and family at home, it seems like a grocery shop business can be the right choice.

The advantage of opening a stall or grocery store is that you can do business and earn money while at the same time being able to take care of your family at home with flexible time. However, before opening a grocery store business, it is necessary to have a list of goods to be sold, as well as ready capital.

So, what are the items that can be sold? Are you interested in opening a grocery store business? Before that, let’s look at the following review about what grocery means!

Definition of Grocery?

Grocery is included in small-scale markets or minimarkets , which are local grocery stores and shops that are easily accessible in general. Usually, grocery stores like this are located in busy and easy-to-reach areas, such as on the side of the road, at stations, terminals, and other crowded locations. Grocery is also often found in places or housing that is densely populated.

So simply, a grocery store is a place or shop that provides various kinds of daily necessities. Goods sold generally include all household needs and equipment, such as groceries, bath soap, cleaning tools, rice, kitchen needs, medicines, and so on.

From the past until now, grocery stalls are still in great demand. This is because the distance is close and easy to reach, a close relationship with the owner, is the main factor for the convenience of buyers in shopping.

In fact, sometimes, grocery store owners offer various waivers or provide credit, so that many buyers find it helpful and can be in debt for a while. Usually, those who use this system are in minimarkets and supermarkets.

Grocery stalls are included in the form of Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises or MSMEs, which were formed in order to support the Indonesian economy to reach 99% of all types of business in Indonesia. When Indonesia experienced a monetary crisis, these micro and small businesses became a counterweight to the country’s economy.

The Origin of the Grocery Store  

Grocery store has two different meanings, based on KBBI, grocery is a clapper that is sounded by sellers to attract the attention of buyers. The second meaning, grocery is various types of goods for human needs, especially daily needs, such as cutlery, toiletries, to food.

It is said that these grocers have existed since the 19th century, and have survived until now, with increasingly varied merchandise, such as food, drinks, spices, groceries, soap, and various other products.

At that time, many sellers who came from China were engaged in this business. Initially, they peddled these consumer goods by going around using a grocery store, and over time they started trading in a place permanently.

Since then, grocery stores have become the community’s main center for shopping and meeting their daily needs, as well as the effectiveness of locations or places that are usually not far from community housing.

Until the modern era like now, various businesses have sprung up and there have also been many modern giant retail stores, but this has not dampened the success of this grocery shop. Because there are still many people who prefer to shop for their daily needs at grocery stalls, especially in densely populated rural and urban areas.

In addition to its goods which are no less complete than those of large supermarkets or modern retail, the main factor in the grocery business surviving is the price which is lower than that of large supermarkets.

Types of Grocery Stalls 

Now, grocery stores have developed, and when viewed from the target consumer, these grocery stores are divided into two types, namely wholesale grocery stores and retail grocery stores. Of course, the difference between the two is in the way they are sold. Retail grocery stores sell their goods in retail or individually to buyers, and they generally wholesale them at wholesale grocery stores.

Generally, the target of potential retail grocery buyers is the community who usually shop for their needs individually. So what’s the difference between a grocery store and a retail store? Let’s look at the following explanation!

1. Grocery Wholesale

Wholesale grocery stores are generally larger in shape and require large business capital as well. Why? Because, buyers have to shop in large quantities at once. Well, usually those who shop or wholesale at grocery stores are smaller scale stalls and retail grocery stores.

Even though you have to shop at wholesale grocery stores in large quantities, it doesn’t affect the wholesale grocery income turnover, because they already have many regular customers. Usually, distributors also provide payment system relief for their loyal customers.

Wholesale grocery is also a business that has a large profit potential than retail grocery, because grocery grocery sells its goods in large quantities at once, and the level of competition is not too high, because not everyone can pursue the wholesale business, which of course has very large capital.

2. Retail Grocery

Next, retail grocery. In contrast to wholesale grocery, retail grocery business does not require such a large amount of capital and the method of selling is retail or in units.

If you are interested in opening a retail grocery business, then you must have your own marketing strategy to get big profits. You must have the right strategy to find customers and minimize competition. The variety of goods to be sold must be as complete as possible.

Yes, even though opening a retail grocery business is relatively easy, the level of competition for retail stores is also very tight. So, if your grocery store is busy and has lots of customers, maybe you can double as a semi-agent, or sell retail products wholesale.

So, those are the types of grocery shop businesses, which are now being found more and more, and can be used as franchises at home. Are you interested in trying it?

Products that are usually sold in grocery stalls

pixabay

If you want to try opening this grocery business, what products can be sold at the grocery store?

1. ATK equipment

The first products that are usually sold in grocery stores are stationery or school supplies and office supplies. Yes, of course, students and office workers who need this writing tool. You don’t need to be confused, there are lots of kinds of writing tools, such as pens, pencils, erasers, notebooks, drawing books, envelopes, rulers, and so on.

2. Drinks

The next product is drinks. You can sell a variety of packaged drinks, ranging from mineral water, powdered drinks, to other variations of soft drinks so that buyers have many choices. Apart from that, also provide gallons of mineral water, because now there are so many people who need it.

3. Daily Needs 

The next item in the grocery store is people’s daily needs. For example, household items such as buckets, brooms, mops, brushes, and other household items.

4. Snacks or Snacks 

Next, the grocery store also provides a variety of snacks or light snacks. Grocery stores also usually sell instant noodles and various kitchen spices needed by housewives and the general public.

In Jakarta, there are many grocery stalls that provide various types of snacks or snacks with a wider variety, ranging from pastries, wet cakes, and various snacks that are liked by children to adults.

5. Drugs 

Usually, grocery stores also sell drugs that already have distribution permits, such as headache medicine, cough cold medicine, rheumatic pain medicine, eucalyptus oil, and various other medicines. What’s more, if the pharmacy near the house is far away, many people prefer to buy medicines at this grocery store.

6. Kitchen Needs

Then, there are also kitchen needs, namely groceries. Staple food is a basic or main need that is definitely needed by everyone, even every day there must be someone who buys this basic need. Of course, you can provide or sell staples such as rice, cooking oil, corn, beans, spices, sugar, meat, chicken, eggs, and you can even add fruit.

7. Washing Equipment and Bathing Equipment

Next is washing equipment and toiletries. Grocery stores usually provide these various necessities, bathing needs ranging from body soap, toothbrushes, toothpaste, shampoo, and others. Likewise washing equipment such as detergents, clothes deodorizers, dishwashing soap, and so on.

8. Baby Needs

Then the grocery store also sells various baby needs. This need is also much sought after and needed by people who still have children under five. Baby needs that can be provided include baby bath soap, baby shampoo, telon oil, diapers, baby powder, and so on.

Tips for Opening a Grocery Store Business 

In order for the grocery store business to grow rapidly, there are several things that need to be considered, namely:

1. Strategic Place

If you want to open a grocery store business, then the first tip is to find a strategic location or place. The location must be easily accessible and in a densely populated residential area.

2. Make a List of Consumer Needs 

The second tip in running this business is to have a survey or make a list of consumer needs. This will help you monitor what most people need. The way to do this is to mingle with the community and then listen to their complaints about what goods or necessities are hard to find, then look for items that can be refilled and needs that are always running out.

3. Cooperation with Suppliers 

Then, if you want this grocery store to survive well, you have to be able to work with the right suppliers and be able to offer lower prices. With this, of course, it will minimize losses, return capital, and get profits.

If the seller makes a mistake in wholesale or purchases at an expensive place, it will allow the grocery store to suffer losses.

5. Hold a Promotion

The next tip, you can make various promotions. This can be done by creating banners, giving free gifts, or giving discounts on certain items. Of course this will be effective to attract buyers.

6. Good Service

As we often hear, the customer is the ” king “, so any business we must provide the best service for customers. This will make consumers more loyal. Even if you only open a grocery store at home, be kind and friendly, even if the customers are your own neighbours.

7. Set the Layout of Goods

Finally, you have to arrange the layout of the items in the grocery store. This is of course to make it easier for buyers to shop and choose goods according to their needs in a shelf or place. In addition, the layout of the goods that are right or according to the type, of course, will also look neat so that consumers shop comfortably.

Sharp Marketing Strategy

In the business world, whether in the form of selling goods or services, a marketing strategy is indeed needed. As a form of product introduction to all levels of society, so that sales increase.

In other words, marketing or marketing are the various efforts of business people in selling, introducing their products or services to achieve the desired target.

Here are some marketing strategy concepts that can be implemented so that the business being occupied is more focused.

1. Target Market

In any business, you need to identify the market or target market. So, the clearer the target market, the greater the chances of success. For example, if your business is engaged in retail clothing for teenagers, then the production of clothing must also be adjusted for teenage sizes, and add variations to clothing knick-knacks or clothing models that are trending.

2. Digital Marketing Strategy 

The next marketing strategy is to use social media for marketing. Because, in this modern era, everyone must use a gadget.

For example, doing promotions via Facebook, Instagram, or other applications, this will certainly be more practical and affordable to all levels of society. Usually, online business people often use social media to promote their products and can work with influencers , so as to get a wide range of consumers.

3. Free Product Promotion

The next strategy is to hold a free product promotion. This strategy is powerful enough to attract consumer interest, because something free would be a shame to miss. In addition, so that consumers who have never known the product offered can try it first.

If the business is engaged in services, it can offer a free trial so that customers know and feel the advantages of the services offered. So, the marketing strategy by providing free product promotions to consumers is quite effective to implement.

4. Target Target

Next is to pay attention to the target, this also relates to a strategic location. If the place is crowded, the chances of sales will be high.

For example, if you intend to sell the needs of boarding children, then you can open a shop near campuses, schools, or where there are lots of rented houses.

5. Prize Promotion For Recommendation 

The next strategy is to give prizes for recommendations. This method can be done to attract the attention of consumers, because usually someone will trust and be interested if someone recommends it.

So for example, to get testimonials from consumers, you can give attractive gifts or incentives as a form of appreciation. Incentives or gifts don’t have to be money, but can be in the form of goods or discounts.

6. Establish Good Relations with Buyers

Next is to establish good relations with buyers, so that people like the products we sell. If consumers have repeatedly purchased our products, it means that they are loyal consumers and contributors to our income.

Give credit to consumers if you don’t want to lose or decrease purchases, because loyal customers are a valuable asset, so respond to all input and complaints from consumers, or you can give gifts directly to them.

Usually, this happens in the food business, because this business relies on consumer loyalty to continue to survive.

7. Word of Mouth Marketing Strategy 

The marketing strategy can also be done by word of mouth. This technique is quite effective, because you can immediately explain and communicate directly with consumers.

If a customer buys a product, then tries it and is satisfied, the customer will automatically notify other consumers. This will potentially attract new consumers, which of course will add new customers as well.

So, in order for the product to be liked by many people, manufacturers must pay attention to the various things mentioned above. As well as sellers must also maintain product quality and provide the best service for consumers.

So, that’s a summary of the meaning of grocery to some tips on opening a grocery store business and effective marketing strategies so that your grocery store business can progress and develop.

Until now, grocery stores are still one of the most promising and profitable businesses. However, now the competition is getting tougher, with the emergence of retail and various big businesses that have a good reputation and reputation.

In order for your grocery business to continue to grow and survive, you must have tips and various marketing systems that are practical, effective and efficient. You can read the book Marketing Revolution Revised Edition – Sensation

If you want to find books about grocery stores, or other businesses, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Veronika Novi 

Reference:

• https://www.google.com/search?q=pengertian+warung+kelontong&oq=pengertian+warung+kelontong+&aqs=chrome..69i57j0i22i30l6.23377j0j7&client=ms-android-oppo-rvo2&sourceid=chrome-mobile&ie=UTF-8
• https://accurate.id/application-kasir/kelontong-ada/
• https://www.jurnal.id/id/blog/strategi-pemasaran-product-yang-harus-anda-coba/

Prayer Pilgrimage to the grave is one of the practices that is almost always done by Muslims, especially when welcoming the holy month of Ramadan and before heading to the victory day of Eid al-Fitr. The moment of visiting the grave itself is in accordance with the advice of Rasulullah SAW as a way for Muslims to always remember death and the hereafter.

Therefore, as human beings who are still given the opportunity to always worship Allah SWT, of course we should not be too lulled by the pleasures of living in this world for a moment. Rasulullah SAW also said:

“I used to forbid you from visiting the graves. Now, do a grave pilgrimage, because it will remind you of the afterlife.” (HR. Muslim).

When carrying out pilgrimage to the graves, of course we are allowed with the condition that we do not cause shirk or associate partners with Allah SWT. The purpose of one’s own grave pilgrimage is usually to pray for those who have died, not to ask for anything or even help.

As one of the things that can be said to be sacred, Islamic scholars have regulated several procedures for what prayers may be recited when visiting the graves. So, here are a number of prayers that can be read as well as some manners that you need to know when visiting graves.

A. Prayer Pilgrimage Grave

1. Greetings

As a Muslim or Muslimah, we know for ourselves that when entering or leaving the house it is recommended to always say greetings. This also applies to Muslims when they want to make a grave pilgrimage. It’s good, we say hello first before entering the tomb area as a courtesy to the residents of the tomb.

Greetings that you can use when visiting graves, namely:

“Assalamu’alaìkum dara qaumìn mu’mìnîn wa atakum ma tu’adun ghadan mu’ajjalun, wa ìnna ìnsya-Allahu bìkum lahìqun”

It means:

Assalamualaikum, O place where the believers live. The promise of Allah has come to you which was postponed tomorrow, and we, God willing, will follow you.

2. Read Istighfar

After reading or saying greetings, the second thing that is known to be one of the good practices when visiting graves is reading istighfar 7 times. Someone who makes a grave pilgrimage is known as a way to remember death. Therefore, by asking forgiveness from Allah SWT, we become survivors in this world and also in the hereafter.

“Astaghfirullah Hal Adzim Alladzi La ilaha Illa Huwal Hayyul Qoyyumu Wa atubu Ilaihi”

It means:

“I beg forgiveness from Allah the Most Great, in whom there is no god but He, the Most Living, the Most Self-Sufficient, and I repent to Him.”

3. Read Surah Al-Fatihah

After reading istighfar, we can read Surah Al-Fatihah to someone who is being visited, be it family or relatives who have died or died.

“Bismillahir rahmanir Rahim. All praise is due to Allâh, the Lord of the Worlds. Ar Rahmaanirrahim. Maaliki yaumiddiin. Iyyaaka na’budu wa iyyaaka nasta’iin. Ihdinash-shirraatal musthaqiim. Shiraathal ladziina an’amta ‘alaihim ghairil maghduubi ‘alaihim waladh-dhaalliin.”

It means:

“In the name of Allah, Most Gracious, Most Merciful. I seek refuge in Allah from the ejected devil. In the name of Allah, the most merciful, the most merciful. Praise be to Allah, Lord of the worlds. The most loving and the most merciful. Who controls the Day of Judgment. Only You we worship. Only to You do we ask for help. Show us the straight path, that is, the path of those whom You have bestowed favors upon them, not the path of those who are angry and not the path of those who have gone astray. I hope you will grant our request.”

4. Read Surah Al-Ikhlas, Al-Falaq, and An-Nas

After reading the Al-Fatihah surah to the person being prayed for, the next prayer we need to read is Al Ikhlas, Al Falaq, and An Nas.

a. Al Ikhlas

“Qul huwallahu ahad, allahu somad, lam yalid wa lam yụlad, wa lam yakul lahụ kufuwan ahad.”

It means:

“Say, ‘He is the One and Only. Allah is the god on whom all things depend. He was childless and not begotten. And no one is equal to Him.”

b. Al-Falaq

“Qul auudzu birobbil falaq. Min syarri maa kholaq. Wa min syarri ghoosiqin idzaa waqob. Wa min syarrin naffaatsaati fil ‘uqod. Wa min syarri haasidin idzaa hasad.”

It means:

“I seek refuge in God who rules the dawn from the evil of His creatures. From the evils of the night when it’s pitch dark. And from the wickedness of the witches who breathe their breath on knots. And from the evil of those who are jealous when he is jealous.”

c. An-Nas

“Qul auudzu birobbinnaas. Malikin unlucky. God damn it. Min syarril waswaasil khonnaas. Alladzii yuwaswisu fii shuduurin unlucky, minal jinnati wan unlucky.”

Meaning: “I take refuge in the God of mankind, the king of humans. The worship of humans, from the devil’s whispering evil that used to hide. Who whispers evil into the human bosom. From demons and humans.’”

5. Reading the Seat Verse

After reciting a few letters, we are then encouraged to read verses of chairs. The chair verse itself is a verse full of privileges. This is because the verse of the chair is one of the verses which contains the oneness of Allah SWT as well as absolute power.

Here are the verses of the chair that we can read:

Allāhu lā ilāha illā huw, al-ḥayyul-qayyụm, lā ta`khużuhụ sinatuw wa lā na`ụm, lahụ mā fis-samāwāti wa mā fil-arḍ, man żallażī yasyfa’u ‘ indahū illā bi`iżnih, ya’lamu mā baina aidīhim wa mā khalfahum, wa lā yuḥīṭụna bisyai`im min ‘ilmihī illā bimā syā`, wasi’a chairyyuhus-samāwāti wal-arḍ, wa lā ya`ụduhụ ḥifẓuhumā, wa huwal-‘aliyyul-‘aẓīm.

Meaning: “Allah, there is no God (who has the right to be worshiped) but He Who is eternally alive and continuously takes care of (His creatures); not sleepy and not sleeping. To Him belongs what is in the heavens and on earth. Nothing can intercede with Allah without His permission? Allah knows what is before them and behind them, and they know nothing from Allah’s knowledge except what He wills. Allah’s chair covers the heavens and the earth. And Allah does not find it hard to care for both of them, and Allah is Most High, Most Great.”

6. Read Tahlil

After reading the verse of the chair, when visiting the graves, you need to read a sentence of tahlil or a sentence of monotheism. You can read this sentence up to 33 times, or if done together, you can join the imam who leads the tahlil.

“Laa Ilaha Illallah.”

It means:

“There is no God but Allah.”

7. Reading the prayer for the body

Finally, visiting the graves can be closed by reciting the funeral prayer when you are about to make a pilgrimage. The following is a funeral prayer that you need to read when visiting the graves, namely:

“Allahummaghfìrlahu war hamhu wa ‘aafìhìì wa’fu anhu, wa akrìm nuzuulahu wawassì’ madholahu, waghsìlhu bìl maa’ì watssaljì walbaradì, wa naqqìhì, mìnaddzzunubì wal khathaya kamaa yunaqqas saubul abyadhu mìnad.”

Wabdìlhu daaran khaìran mìn daarìhì wa zaujan khaìran mìn zaujìhì. Wa adkhìlhul jannata wa aìdzhu mìn adzabìl qabrì wa mìn adzabìnnaarì wafsah lahu fì qabrìhì wa nawwìr lahu fihì.

It means:

“O Allah, forgive and have mercy on him. Give him safety and forgive him. Give honor to him, broaden his entry. Bathe him in water, ice and dew. Cleanse him from mistakes as You clean a white garment from dirt.”

“Replace for him a house that is better than his house, a wife that is better than his wife. Enter him into heaven, give him protection from the punishment of the grave and the punishment of hell. Expand for him in his grave and enlighten him in it.” (HR. Muslim).

B. Grave Pilgrimage Adab

In addition to reciting prayers for grave pilgrimages to family and relatives, we as Muslims must also understand the adab or manners that need to be carried out when visiting graves. Therefore, some of the adab in visiting the graves that we need to know, include:

1. Wear good and polite clothes

The first etiquette for visiting graves is to wear good and polite clothes. Prayer is basically a way to meet Allah SWT. Therefore, it is better when you want to pray to visit the graves to wear good and polite clothes, and most importantly cover your genitals.

2. Not sitting on the grave

The second adab of visiting graves is not sitting on the grave. This adab is actually in accordance with a sunnah Rasulullah SAW which does not allow someone to sit or step on the top of the grave.

“Do not pray (pray) to the grave, and do not sit on it.” (HR. Muslim).

3. Don’t talk dirty while in the cemetery

The third adab of visiting graves is not to speak dirty while in the cemetery area. Of course talking dirty anywhere is not a good thing to do. Even more so at the time of being in a cemetery as a place where people died. The main purpose of someone who is living praying at the grave is of course to pray for the person in the grave so that they will receive forgiveness for their sins while living in the world.

4. It is not allowed to cry excessively

The fourth adab of visiting graves is not being allowed to cry excessively while at the grave. Feelings of sadness remembering that someone we love has left us, of course, can cause a feeling of sadness that cannot be stopped. However, we need to realize that all of these things are decrees from Allah SWT.

Rasulullah SAW also cried when he made a pilgrimage to his mother’s grave. However, Rasulullah SAW did not overdo it in crying, even wailing, wailing, or crying to tear his own clothes. It should not be done in the cemetery.

5. Not wearing sandals in the cemetery

The adab of visiting the fifth grave is optional, may or may not be carried out according to the agreement of the local community. Not using footwear in the cemetery has the goal of respecting the grave’s inhabitants. However, this can also be bad because burial ground is known to be unclean. Therefore, wearing sandals in the cemetery is optional.

Thus the discussion about grave pilgrimage prayers, it’s good for us to always pray for family, relatives, and friends who have left us. In addition, by visiting the graves, we may always be aware of the bad qualities in the world.

Prayers for Pilgrimage of Graves Along with Their Adab and Practices – Grave pilgrimage is a hereditary tradition carried out by living relatives to visit the graves of deceased relatives. Usually the grave pilgrimage is done once a week. Even before the month of Ramadan, people are busy making pilgrimages to the graves of their relatives.

Generally for people who embrace Islam, they make pilgrimages to pray for and remember relatives who have died, as well as to meditate on the wisdom of death.

Visiting graves in Islam is a sunnah practice and can be done for those who have deceased relatives, especially their own parents. In visiting graves, Islam teaches that we must respect those who have died. Even grave pilgrimages are also carried out so that Muslims remember death.

Initially the Prophet SAW. forbade his people to make pilgrimages to graves because the Apostle was worried that there would be people who, instead of praying for relatives who died, asked for help from people who had died. This can be said to be shirk, which is an act that associates partners with Allah SWT.

This ebook is a guide if you want to make pilgrimages to the Holy Land during the Hajj and Umrah services.

However, after that the pilgrimage to the graves was allowed to return, and was made a Shari’a for Muslims so that these pilgrims remember that life in this world is not eternal and they must always remember the coming of the Last Day. The matter of prohibition and re-licensing regarding grave visits is in accordance with the words of Rasulullah SAW. from HR. Muslim which reads:

قَالَ رَسُولُ اللَّهِ صَلَّى اللَّهُ عَلَيْهِ وَسَلَّمَ قَدْ كُنْتُ نَهَيْتُكُمْ عَنْ زِيَارَةِ الْقُبُورِ فَقَدْ أُذِنَ لِمُحَمَّدٍ فِي زِيَارَةِ قَبْرِ أُمِّهِ فَزُورُوهَا فَإِنَّهَا تُذَكِّرُ الْآخِرَةَ

Meaning: “In fact, before I forbade you to visit the graves, now make a pilgrimage to the graves because it will remind you of the afterlife and will add good to you by visiting it. Whoever wants to make a pilgrimage, do it and don’t say rain (blasphemy).” (HR. Muslim).

Grave Pilgrimage Prayer

The purpose of the pilgrimage is to pray for relatives who have died. This prayer is of course specifically for those who have died. The following is a grave pilgrimage prayer.

A’udzubillahi minasyaithaanir rajim. Bismillahirrahmannirrahim.

Alhamdullilahi rabbil ‘alamin, hamdan syakiriin, hamdannaa’imiin, hamdan yuwaafiini’amahu wayukaafii mazidah, yaa rabbanaa lakal hamdu kamaa yanbaghi ​​lijalali wajhika wa’adzimi sultanik, allahumma shaalli wasalim ‘ala sayyidina muhammad wa’ala alii sayyidina muhammad.

Allah humma taqabal wa ausil sawaaaba maa qara, nahu minal qur’anil ‘adzim, wa maa halalna wa maa sabahna wamastaghfarnaa wamaa shalaina ‘atsayyidina muhammad sallallahu’alaihi wasallam, hadiyatan wasilatan, warahmatan najilatan wa barakatan samilatan ilaa hadarati habibina wasafi’ina waqurati a ‘ayuninaa sayyidina wamaulanaa muhammadin sallallahu ‘alaihi wa sallam, wa ila jami’ii ikhwanihi minal anbiyaai walmursaliina wal auliyaai, wassuhadai, wassalihina, wassahabati wattabi’ina wal’ulamail ‘alimina wal mushannafiinal mukhlisiina wa jami’il mujaa-hidiina fi sabilillahi rabbil’ alamin, wal angelil muqarrabinaspecialhan ila sayyidina syih abdul qadir zailanii.

Summa ilaa jami’i expertl qubur, minal muslimiina wal muslimati, wal mu miniina wal mu minaati, min masaarikil ardhi ila magaaribiha barriha Rompirihaspecialhan ila aabaaina wa ummahaa tiinaa, wa ummahaa tiinaa, wa ajdaadina, wanakhussuspecialhan manijtam’anaa hahunaa bisababihi waliajlihi.

Allah hummaghfirlahu warhamhu wa’afihi wa’fu anhu wa akrim nujulahu wawasi’ madhalahu, waghsilhu bilmai wassalji wal baradi wanaqihi minal khataaya, kama yunaqqa saubul abyadu minaddannasi wa abdilhu, darran khairan min daarihi wa ahlan khairan min jasahi wa jaujan khairan min jauzihi wa adhilhul jannata wa ‘aidhu min ‘adzabil qabri wa fitnatihi wa min ‘adzabinnar, allohhumaghfir lihayyina wa mayyitina wa sahhidiina wa ghaniina washagiirana wa kaabirana wadakirona wa ansana, allahumma man ahyaitahu minna fa ahyihi ‘alal islami wa man tawafaitahu minna fatawafahu alal iiman allahumma la tuhrimna azrahu wa laa tudillanaa ba’dahu birahmatikayaa arhamaraahimiin, wal hamdu lillahi rabbil ‘aalamiin.

Meaning: “I seek refuge in Allah from the cursed Satan. In the name of Allah, the Most Gracious, the Most Merciful. Praise be to Allah, the ruler of the universe, as people who are grateful and people who get much pleasure praise Him. With commensurate praise and favors and allows the increase. O our God, praise is only for You, as is worthy of the glory of Your substance and Your majesty and power. O Allah, bestow peace and safety on the Prophet Muhammad and his family.

O Allah, accept and convey the reward of the Al-Quran that we read, our tahlil, our tasbih, our forgiveness and our salutations to the Prophet Muhammad as a gift that becomes a connection. As a mercy that descends and as a blessing that spreads to our lovers, our helpers and our children, our leaders and leaders, namely the Prophet Muhammad SAW, also to all his friends from among the Prophets and Apostles, saints, martyrs, pious people, friends, tabiin, scholars who practice their knowledge, sincere writers and people who strive in the way of Allah the Lord of the worlds, as well as angels who always worship, especially addressed to Sheikh Abdul Qadir Jailani.

Then to all the inhabitants of the graves, male and female Muslims, male and female believers, from the eastern and western hemispheres, at sea and on land, especially to our fathers and mothers, grandfathers and our grandmothers, especially the people who brought us together here.

O Allah, have mercy, have mercy, deliver and deliver him. Exalt his abode and enlarge it. Ennoble his abode, broaden his entry, wash him in clear and cool water. Cleanse him from all mistakes like a white shirt that is clean from dirt, and replace his house with a better home than the one he left behind, and a better family than the one he left behind, and a better husband/wife than the one he left behind anyway. Enter him into heaven and protect him from the torment of the grave and his slander and the torment of hell fire. O Allah, forgive those of us who are still alive and those of us who have died, those of us who are present, those of us who are unseen, those of us who are small, those of us who are adults, those of us who are male or female. O Allah whoever You revived from us, then revive it in a state of faith. O Allah, do not prevent us from being rewarded for doing good deeds to him. and do not mislead us after his legacy by obtaining Your mercy, the Most Merciful. All praise be to Allah, the Lord of the Worlds.”

Adab in Grave Pilgrimage

In visiting the graves of relatives or what is called a pilgrimage, of course there are manners that we must do when making a pilgrimage. Pilgrimage is the same as visiting, where guests should have manners, not to make the owner of the house feel disturbed. Moreover, the cemetery is a resting place for humans who have died, we must respect it. Here are the manners in visiting the graves.

1. Ablution Before Pilgrimage

Like when you want to worship, you also have to perform ablution before you enter the cemetery where your relatives rest. This is because during the pilgrimage we will read the Koran, and recite prayers for relatives who have died.

In reading prayers and the Koran, of course, we are required to perform ablution so that our bodies are far from large and small hadas to maintain purity. Chastity is the main thing that we apply before doing things that lead to religion.

2. Greetings

Cemeteries are also residences for those who have died. Every cemetery is also certainly guarded by angels. As religious beings, of course we have manners when entering other people’s homes, including cemeteries. To enter the cemetery, of course, we have to say hello to the occupants of the tomb. Greetings for visiting the graves are as follows:

السَّلisc

Assalamu’alaìkum dara qaumìn mu’mìnîn wa atakum ma tu’adun ghadan mu’ajjalun, wa ìnna ìnsya-Allahu bìkum lahìqun.

Meaning: ” Assalamualaikum, O place where the believers live. The promise of Allah has come to you which was postponed tomorrow, and we, God willing, will follow you.”

3. Facing Qibla

When we make a pilgrimage to the graves of relatives, of course we pray for them so that they will be accepted by Allah and widen their graves, we also recite short surahs in the Koran, and recite tasbih, tahmid, takbir, and also remembrance. Therefore, it was passed by Rasulullah SAW that when praying we must face the Qibla.

This Ebook of Prayers and Remembrance of Makbul is here because our bond with Allah can be strengthened through the right prayers that are said with sincerity and full of hope. There is also a complete guide to performing istisqa prayers, occult prayers, and eclipse prayers, as well as examples of speeches in Arabic. Anyone can use this book as a reference material, both for personal use and community activities.

4. Reading Pilgrimage Prayers

After making dhikr, reading tasbih, tahmid, and also tahmid, you can read a special pilgrimage prayer for your deceased relatives. This prayer broadly asks God to forgive the sins of the deceased, widen his grave, and enter heaven. The pilgrimage prayer has been included at the beginning of this article.

5. Reading Short Letters

After finishing reading the pilgrimage prayer, it is continued by reading short letters in the Al-Quran. The short letters include, Al-Fatihah, An-Naas, Al-Falaq, and Al-Ikhlas.

The reading of these short letters begins with the letter Al-Fatihah, this is because Al-Fatihah is the opening letter. After reading Al-Fatihah, then read the short letters as mentioned. Then, after reading short letters, Rasulullah SAW. taught that after finishing reading the letter for the deceased, it should be closed with Al-Fatihah again.

It should be noted that reading short letters when visiting graves will make reading these letters a reward for the deceased to whom the letter is read.

The hadith reading this short letter has been narrated by Al-Mawarzi from Rahmad bin Hanbal who said that:

“When you enter the garden of the grave (cemetery) then read Al-Fatihah, Surah Al-Ikhlas and Al-Muawwidzatain (Al-Falaq and An-Naas). Make the reward for the bodies of the graves, because the reward actually reaches them.

6. Don’t Sit or Step on Graves

If you have done all the customs and traditions of visiting the graves by reciting prayers for deceased relatives, then we also need to have manners to respect the last house or resting place for deceased relatives.

The way to respect it is not to occupy or step on the graves around you. Watch your step carefully when visiting the tomb. Do not even step over the grave, because that is also considered impolite. We must always honor and respect the dead.

This is in accordance with the hadith of Rasulullah SAW which states that:

“Do not pray (pray) to the grave, and do not sit on it.” (HR. Muslim).

7. Don’t Say Impolite

Rude and impolite words should be avoided wherever we are. We must respect the environment around us by speaking kindly. Just like when we go on a pilgrimage, as guests, of course we have to say something polite and avoid saying something that is not polite and rude. This has been explained by Imam Al-Nawawi that, it is not good if in a funeral you say something that is vanity or impolite.

8. Don’t overdo it

Excessive behavior is not justified in Islamic teachings. Just like when we make a pilgrimage to a tomb, we shouldn’t overdo it. This is because the cemetery is a place to perform rituals such as praying for the dead, reciting the prayers for the dead, and also glorifying them so that all these activities will be a reward for those who have died.

Visiting graves should be used to increase your faith because you will also remember death. If you overdo it you will worry if you cause things outside the pilgrimage rules and become sins.

Practice in Pilgrimage

In addition to adab, there are also some practices that must be applied when we make a pilgrimage to the graveyard. Here are some practices in pilgrimage.

1. Planting Flowers, Pebbles, and Plants, and Watering

Such practice was narrated in a hadi from Ja’far and his father said that, “Indeed the Prophet Muhammad sprinkled water on the grave of his son Ibrahim and, he also put pebbles on it.” (Narrated by Baihaqi).

This hadith means that the Prophet Muhammad sprinkled water and placed pebbles on the grave of his son, namely Ibrahim. Because of the Apostle’s treatment, his people followed what the Apostle had done. However, some scholars also forbade it, because they thought that only the Prophet could do this.

2. Remembering Death

Abu Hurairah said that Rasulullah SAW. once said:

“Make a pilgrimage to the graves, because in fact it can remind you of the afterlife.” (Narrated by Ibn Majah).

In this hadith it is explained that pilgrimage has a purpose to remind us of the coming of death and life in the afterlife. With this in mind, of course we can be motivated to prepare good deeds before the day of death and the afterlife arrives.

This kind of thing is allowed in religion. This world is only temporary, we must prepare good deeds for our provisions on the Day of Resurrection. Because intelligent people are people who remember about death.

3. Motivation to Increase Good Deeds

As in the practice of remembering death, the motivation to increase good deeds is also one of the things that can be remembered when we are on a pilgrimage to the cemetery. Rasulullah SAW. has taught us about the good deeds that we must fulfill as provisions for the last day.

Rasulullah SAW. also teaches about sunnah practices that we can do to add to our good deeds. One of them is pilgrimage. Pilgrimage certainly can provide blessings for both parties. Both pilgrims and those who are visited will both receive rewards from Allah SWT.

This book contains an explanation of light acts of worship, but the value and reward are enormous. These light practices, God willing, can solve various kinds of problems and our problems.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Sinaumed’s, such is the explanation regarding the prayers for visiting the graves along with the manners and practices that must be applied when we are on a pilgrimage. Surely you have also visited the graves of relatives, right? If you haven’t memorized the prayers, you can memorize them from this article.

For those of you who want to learn a lot about other religious education, you can read books from sinaumedia. sinaumedia as #Friends Without Limits has provided various books to accompany you to study. Come on Sinaumed’s, buy the book now!

Grafting – Of the many plant propagation techniques, there is one that has an easy-to-understand process, although you still have to be extra careful. The technique in question is the grafting technique. Sinaumed’s, have you ever heard of the term grafting?

In short, grafting is done to improve the quality of plants or to reproduce plants, by attaching buds from the initial stem and other stems. Meanwhile, this technique is called artificial vegetative because it is done by humans.

Many misguided regarding grafting and other breeding techniques. In fact, grafting has its own way and of course the results are different from other techniques. So, what exactly is the meaning of grafting, its purpose, benefits, and conditions?
Here’s the full review. Let’s see together!

Making Cuttings. Graft. Connect & Graft+DVD

 

 

Definition of Occulation

Grafting or shield budding is a technique of vegetative propagation of plants. Generally, this technique is used to improve the quality of the plant itself. This method has been widely practiced and developed by farmers, and to do so requires special skills.

Shield budding itself is often known as T-budding in English. Performing grafting involves rootstocks (or stems with a well-developed root system). A vertical cut is made to separate the bark from the cambium (the layer of cells between the inner bark and wood), followed by a perpendicular cut just above it, forming a “T”.

This technique will allow the cut stem to be reduced to a single bud with the tree being sliced. The resulting plants are clones, or plants that are genetically identical by being reproduced from one individual entirely by vegetative means.

The process of adding scion wood with shoots from the tree that will be developed with rootstock cuttings is a method of propagation called grafting, and is widely used in the world of vineyards.

Purpose of Grafting

Actually, what is plant breeding for, especially grafting, done? Here are the main goals of doing plant grafting:

• Get a new type of plant that is profitable. For example, immunity from disease or other superior and positive properties of ordinary plants.
• Obtaining the results of combining two traits or types of plants in the parent grafting.

Benefits of Grafting

Propagation of grafting itself turns out to have several benefits. The following are the benefits of grafting on plants, Sinaumed’s.

1. The process of fertilization or reproduction is faster

The existence of grafting can impact on a faster breeding process. The reason is, this is influenced by the age of the plant and superior parental characteristics, as well as fast growth.

2. Plant Productivity will Increase

As a vegetative propagation technique, grafting can increase the productivity of a plant. Because, this process is supported by the parent or seeds with high production. This is what drives the increase in quality and productivity of plants resulting from profitable grafting.

3. Plants Grow More Uniformly

Uniform properties will emerge from the results of plants bred by grafting. This is because grafting is a vegetative propagation technique without fusion, so that one parent plant can reproduce itself and its offspring have identical characteristics.

Application of grafting “T”

The grafting technique in the “T” shape is widely used to propagate clones of temperate and tropical fruit trees, to temperate ornamental shade trees. For tropical fruit trees, such as oranges, “T” is planted on most of the seedling rootstock.

Meanwhile, temperate ornamental shade trees such as cultivars of red maple, honey locust, green ash, and Norwegian maple are grown on seedling rootstocks, as they are difficult to root from cuttings or clonal propagation.

Greenhouse roses are T grafted onto rooted shoot cuttings, either after or before rooting (a practice known as stenting ) in the greenhouse.

Graduation Terms

1. Not Plants with New Leaves Growing

The grafting window in the form of skin has properties, one of which is influenced by the process of forming new leaves. When a plant is growing new leaves, the skin that is slashed for the grafting window will dry faster. For this reason, this new leaf determines the success of the grafting technique.

2. Free of Pests or Diseases

Either the plant from the bud or the mother plant, both must be free from disease or pest infections. This needs to be anticipated so that grafting avoids the risk of failure. This is because pests and diseases in plants can interfere with the grafting process.
Not only that, plants that are attacked by pests or disease will actually later become a source of infection in grafted plants.

3. Age of the Upper and Lower Stems are the same

The similar age of scion and rootstock will support the success of the grafting process because it greatly influences the speed of bud formation. This supports the need for age harmony between the two parent plants.

Plants that are made as rootstocks, should come from seeds so that the roots are stronger, so they are relatively drought resistant. Not only that, the rootstock must also be able to attach properly and support the growth of the scion without causing negative effects. This is why it takes the same stem age.

4. Both Plants Must Come from the Same Genus

It is important that the two plants used for grafting come from the same family or genus. Own grafting is rarely applied to plants of different genera because it has a low success rate. This is due to physiological differences between plants that can occur, so it is necessary to avoid grafting using plants of the same genus.

The Right Timing For Grafting

The results of successful grafting are signaled or marked by the shoots of the scion material being formed and mature, while the rootstock material is in a state of active growth, so that the bark “slips”. This means that the vascular cambium is actively growing and the bark can be easily peeled off from slightly damaged pieces.

This moment generally occurs according to the period when the vascular cambium is active (spring, summer). During dormancy, stock plants (winter, early spring, late fall), or drought stress, bark grafting methods such as T-budding are not viable because the bark will tear, not just slip.

Grafting can be done on certain fruit trees and at the right time. For example, peaches, in June using cold-stored grafting cuttings and rootstocks of field-planted seedlings.

Plantation Law: Uu Ri No.39 of 2014

 

 

How to do grafting on plants

After knowing the meaning, purpose, benefits, and application, then, how do you do grafting on plants?

Individual grafting is the most common technique, in which a “T”-shaped slit is made with a knife to loosen the bark. The buds used are in the axils of the leaves, and they may be so small that they are almost invisible.

Here’s how to do grafting on plants, which consists of several steps and explanations:

1. Choose Healthy Buds

The shoots selected are those that look healthy and fresh. This bud needs to be on a branch to show good growth throughout the season it has passed. Apart from that, what is used is not from the inside of the tree with slender trunks, closely spaced, and small buds.

The leaf blade is cut from the piece to be attached, leaving the petiole intact.

2. Cut a Bud and a Piece of Wood

Cut off the bud and the small piece of wood underneath using an upward slicing motion. These cuts in the wood should be made about one-half to three-fourths of an inch below the bud, as well as going deep enough into the wood.

This is done so that when the cut is finished about one-half to three-quarters above the bud, the bark and a small piece of top wood can be cut off as well. Perpendicular cuts across the top and upward cuts will separate the pieces from the parent.

The knife used for this process must be kept very sharp. The goal is to minimize as little damage as possible to the buds to be taken. The reason is, a dull knife will peel and tear the wood, leaving a wound that will not heal properly.

Shoots must be cut from the buds just before the grafting process. Otherwise, it will dry out. In fact, some people who graft plants even put the freshly cut shoots in their mouths before attaching them to the new mother. However, this practice is not recommended, Sinaumed’s!

3. Cut from the bottom to the middle of the bud

Some grafters cut from the bottom to the middle of the bud, then proceed to make a downward cut from the top of the bud as a second cut to completely cut it off. As long as you don’t remove too much wood from the buds, this method will work fine.

4. Cut the Root Stems Vertically

This cut must be deep enough to ensure that the bark separates at the cambium.

5. Perform Grafting

Furthermore, grafting was carried out. That is, a “T”-shaped cut is made on the parent (a vertical cut complete with a perpendicular cut above it).

In areas with high rainfall, during the grafting season, or in plant species where the rootstock tends to secrete a lot of juice, the “T” cut is generally made upside down to prevent water or sap from pooling in the graft.

6. Slip the cut shoots on the rootstock

Carefully, cut shoots tucked into the rootstock exposing the “pouch”. That is, the sides of the “T” cut are loosened up to create pockets. Extra care must be taken at this stage not to tear the bark folds in the process.

In this stage, we will find out whether the bark is easy to loosen or not. If not, it means that the plant is not in active growth and the grafting process must be postponed at a later date and should be done when active growth has resumed.

There is an alternative method of incorporating the plant that does not require “slipping” of the bark, namely the chip budding technique or the bud being cut with bits of the wood beneath. This requires a suitable size cut from the bud to align the cambium and complete proper grafting.

7. Insert the Cuts Between the Bark Coverings

Cuts of shoots are carefully tucked between the bark coverings. Cut the top strip of skin on the bud cut to fit over the horizontal cut on the stem, resulting in a strip that fits inside the pitcher.

8. Bark Cover

Cover the bark with rubber, tape, or some other suitable covering so that it adheres tightly to the cut shoots. Ultimately, the cap must be of a nature that will be damaged by weathering, or it must be removed within 2 to 3 weeks of successful joining. If the covering material is not damaged, it will bind to the rootstock.

After successful grafting, the top of the plant and the rootstock can be cut off to allow the shoots to grow.

Examples of Plants that Can Apply Grafting

Here are some examples of plants that can apply grafting in their breeding. Let’s see together, Sinaumed’s:

1. Star fruit
2. Mango
3. Avocado
4. rambutans
5. Longan
6. Durian
7. Guava
8. Water apple
9. Orange
10. Soursop
11. Pawpaw

Other Techniques

Apart from grafting, there are various other plant vegetative propagation techniques, especially those used in Indonesia. Of course, this cannot be separated from the quality that will be produced by prospective seeds that are the same as their parents.

The most common plant propagation techniques include cuttings, grafts, and grafts. The following is an explanation of the various techniques.

1. Cuttings Technique

Cuttings is one of the propagation techniques by planting or growing one part of the plant, such as roots, stems and leaves. Generally, cuttings are chosen by farmers because the materials needed to make them are very small and the results can be obtained in large quantities.

The results of cutting techniques generally have similarities in terms of age, height, and resistance to disease with their parents. Not only that, we can get perfect plants in a relatively short time, Sinaumed’s.

Cuttings are divided into root cuttings (banyan trees), stems (kale plant, cassava, and brotowali), and leaves (cocor duck plants).

Here are the advantages of the cuttings technique:

1. Continuous propagation
2. Not affected by time or season constraints
3. The new individual is the same as the parent
4. New individuals have the same age as the parent so they bear fruit quickly

2. Graft Technique

The propagation technique in the form of grafts is to grow roots before the stems are cut and planted. This technique is used to reduce the failure of plant propagation. Grafting can be an option to get new plants with the same characteristics as the parent, such as immunity to disease, flower beauty, and fruit taste.

This can happen because the results of the graft are almost 100 percent similar to the parent. If the results are different, it could be due to a gene mutation. This technique can be applied to woody plants, such as mangoes, several types of oranges, various types of guavas, pomegranates, and star fruit. Interested in trying the cuttings technique?

Benefits of grafting:

1. The nature of the result is exactly the parent
2. Propagation time is relatively short, ranging from 1-3 months
3. Plants can produce fruit in a short time (about 4 years)

3. Connecting / Grafting Techniques

The grafting or grafting technique is carried out by combining the rootstock and scion of two similar plants. This will achieve compounding, that is, when the combination will continue to grow to form new plants. Unlike grafting which uses buds, this technique uses the entire shoot of about 7.5-10 centimeters.

This grafting or grafting technique can be applied to several varieties, such as mango, guava, apple, and others.

Here are the advantages of grafting :

1. Accelerates fruiting plants
2. The plant is strong because the rootstock is resistant to unfavorable soil conditions
3. The nature of the clone will be eternal which cannot be done with other techniques
4. Improving the plants that have grown, so that unwanted types change as desired.

Conclusion

In addition to knowing grafting as a technique for plant propagation or propagation, we also understand that there are other techniques such as cuttings, grafting, and grafting. It is interesting that there are reproduction techniques that are regulated by humans and can produce new plants with certain beneficial traits. What cool knowledge, Sinaumed’s!

Anatomical Morphology and Plant Systematics

To be able to know more things, of course we have to learn a lot, one of which is through book literacy. At sinaumedia, which is the largest bookstore in Indonesia, you can find various types of books related to plants, flowers, fruit, or even other books according to your interests. What’s more, sinaumedia also provides various attractive promos to use!

Apart from grafting , you can also buy various kinds of books online at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Inventor of Google – the Internet is one proof of the advancement of technology that exists at this time. With the internet, it will be easy for us to find various kinds of information, ranging from domestic information and foreign information. The easier it is to get information, the insight we have will increase rapidly. Insight can be said as one of the things that can broaden our point of view in seeing or understanding something. Therefore, at this time, adding insight to yourself is quite important.

Basically, information obtained from the internet can be anything, from articles, journals, videos, pictures, and so on. What’s more, information can also be obtained from online news . In fact, increasingly developing technology makes it easier for us to get information via cell phones or cell phones. In short, existing mobile phones can already use the internet, whether it comes from Wi-Fi or a provider’s card, so they can find information more quickly. So, have you been looking for information to add insight from mobile phones ?

When looking for domestic or foreign information, we will usually use a search engine that is already used by many people. In this case, the search engine in question is the Google search engine. Google is very easy to use in finding sources of information because we only type in the keywords or keywords we want to search for. Moreover, the Google search engine can be used on a variety of electronic devices, such as cellphones , laptops, computers, and others. Therefore, we don’t need to be surprised when someone says, “just search on Google”.

As it turns out, Google is not only an information search engine that can function using electronic devices that have the internet, but can also be devices that can make our work easier, such as Google Drive , Google Docs , Google Spreadsheets, to email . All devices that come from Google are very friendly to use and can be used anytime and anywhere. It is possible, if you are a user of a Google device.

Google itself didn’t just exist out of thin air, but two people created it. Want to know who made Google and a brief history of the emergence of Google? Find the answer in this article, enjoy reading.

A Brief History of Google

With Google, it can be said that various sources of knowledge are very easy to access because with Google, we can search for anything, from pictures, videos, news, to events in the world. Therefore, Google can be regarded as one of the media which is quite important for lovers of “cyberspace”. Searching for sources of knowledge through Google is quite easy because you only need to write down what you want to search for in the Google search field. After writing down what you want to search for in the search field, Google can immediately provide the answer.

The emergence of Google for the first time began with two students studying at Stanford University, California, United States who wanted to develop an information search engine in “cyberspace”. Then, the two students used the Stanford University website , namely Google.stanford.edu. The search engine they had found was then named BackRub. From the results of the search engine development that they have done, they also realize that creating a search engine in the “virtual world” requires a website.

After realizing the importance of a website to run a search engine, they created a website domain, namely Google.stanford.edu. The domain name eventually changed to Google.com. The search engine that was invented by Lawrence Edward Page and Sergey Brin finally turned into a company on September 15, 1997 and the company name was named Googele Inc.

According to some historical records, Google was created from a garage in Menlo Park, California, United States. The design of the search engine continued to be developed, until finally Google obtained an official patent that had been assigned by Stanford University. The company Google Inc., which continues to experience growth, eventually built and developed its company in Mountain View, California, United States.

Basically the term Google itself is a term that comes from the wrong word “gogol”. The word mistake resulted in the name “Google” which is known by many people to this day. “Gogol” is a term in the science of mathematics created by a scientist named Milton Sirota, which leads to the number one, followed by a hundred zeros.

The reason the name “Gogol” wanted to be used on the search engine that Lawrence Edward Page and Sergey Brin had invented was a reflection of the company he had created. They hope that the search engine company they created will be able to manage various kinds of information in cyberspace. Google obtained a patent right officially in 2001 with Lawrence Edward Page as the inventor.

In 2004, Lawrence Edward Page and Sergey Brin received an award from the Marconi Foundation for discovering and developing the Google search engine. Not only that, they both also received an award back in 2005. The award was obtained from the American Academy of Arts and Sciences .

Although Lawrence Edward Page and Sergey Brin had discovered and developed the Google search engine and had built the Google Inc. company, at this time, they were both not at Google anymore. In other words, the company Google Inc. is no longer held by Lawrence Edward Page and Sergey Brin and the leadership of Google Inc. is handed over to Sundar Pichai.

Thanks to the two inventors of Google, it’s easier for us to find various kinds of information in “cyberspace”. Therefore, we can find and know various kinds of events abroad easily. In short, Google is a search engine in the “virtual world” which is quite popular today.

Google discoverer

As previously explained, the inventors of Google were two Stanford University students named Lawrence Edward Page and Sergey Brin. Below will be explained in more detail about the brief biographies of the two founders of Google

1. Lawrence Edward Page

Lawrence Edward Page or better known as Larry Page was born on March 26, 1973 in Lansing, Michigan. He has a father named Carl Victor Page and a mother named Gloria. Larry Page is someone who graduated from East Lansing High School. Then, he continued his studies by taking computer engineering at the University of Michigan and he graduated with a Bachelor of Science degree. It didn’t stop there, Larry Page also continued his education to get a Master’s degree at Stanford University.

Larry Page’s father, Carl Victor Page, was one of the people who played a role in the development of computer science and artificial intelligence. In addition, his father also began teaching staff, lecturer at Michigan State University in 1967. Meanwhile, his mother also became an instructor and gave Computer Programming lessons at Lyman Briggs College of Michigan State University.

Apparently, the background of his parents made Larry Page have more ability in the field of computer technology. His interest in technology, especially computers, was evident when Larry Page was 6 years old. In fact, thanks to his ability, when he was still in elementary school, Larry Page had successfully completed the task of word processing software .

His interest in computers made Larry Page continue his undergraduate education at the University of Michigan and majored in Computer Engineering. Then, he also continued his education with a major in Computer Science at Stanford University.

Larry Page started to have the idea to create a search engine in the “virtual world” when he planned to create a theme accompanied by his PhD at Stanford University. He really wanted to do research on the link structure that exists on the World Wide Web (WWW).

At that time, in order for the research to be successful, Larry Page was assisted by his friend Sergey Brin. It was from that meeting at Stanford University that they began to develop the Google search engine project using a page ( web ) from Stanford University, then the project they undertook was named BackRub. After doing research, they both got results in the form of a website that has the most number of backlinks when compared to other websites , so that site is the most suitable site in a search engine. Therefore, from the results of this research, they both launched the Google search engine.

Seeing the results of his research that continues to grow, Larry Page decided to quit his doctoral degree at Stanford University. In other words, Larry Page would prefer to drop out of Stanford University. He did this in order to develop a search engine that had been discovered and developed with Sergey Brin.

Larry Page married his girlfriend Lucinda Southworth in 2007. The wedding was held on Necker Island, Caribbean. The wife is a researcher with a PhD in Biomedical Informatics at Stanford University. From their marriage, they both had two children. The first child was born in 2009 and the second child was born in 2011.

2.Sergey Brin

The inventor and developer of the next Google search engine was Sergey Brin who was born in Moscow, Russia on August 21, 1973. Although he was born in Russia, he and his family migrated to the United States. They migrated when Sergey Brin was 6 years old. His childhood life was mostly spent in Adelphi, Maryland. Sergey Brin’s full name is Sergey Mikhaylovich Brin and his father is Michael Brin. Sergey Brin’s father was a professor of mathematics at the University of Maryland.

Sergey Brin attended his high school education at the Eleanor Roosevelt school and graduated in 1990. After graduating from high school, he continued his studies at the University of Maryland, College Park. Thanks to his abilities, he managed to complete his studies in just three years, he even received the highest award in the field of computer science and mathematics.

Sergey Brin continued his studies again with the help of a scholarship from the National Science Foundation and he chose Stanford University as a place to continue his studies. Sergey Brin has the ability to create software that functions to translate documents from Text to HTML. In fact, he also diligently writes articles on data addition and pattern extraction, then he publishes each of these articles in academic journals.

At first, Sergey Brin started developing the Google search engine, when he met Larry Page at the same university, namely Stanford University. The search engine they created was originally called BackRub which can be run using the web from their campus, Stanford University. The search engine or search engine that they created was growing, so they were looking for a suitable name for the search engine they made.

After listening to suggestions from their friends, Sergey Brin and Larry Page finally named the search engine they created Googol. However, after registering the search engine his findings, it turned out that Larry Page had given the wrong name, not Googol, but Google. Starting from there, the name of the Google search engine is known by many people until now.

Sergey Brin married Anne Wojcicki in 2003. Anne Wojcicki is the founder of 23andMe. However, their marriage had to run aground and they decided to separate in 2015. Three years after separating from Anne Wojcicki, Sergey Brin remarried to his girlfriend, Nicole Shanahan. Nicole Shanahan is a businesswoman and lawyer and their marriage is blessed with one daughter.

Google Products

Along with the times, the company Google Inc. does not only focus its efforts on search engines, but also develops its company through the products it makes. Here are some Google products that are widely used by many people.

1. Gmail

Google’s product in the form of gmail is a Google product in the form of e-mail or electronic mail. Currently, many have used this product because it is very effective and efficient in sending important data. What’s more, this Gmail can be connected to various kinds of electronic devices, such as cellphones , laptops, and computers.

2. Google Drive

The next Google product is Google Drive or better known to many people as a software or application for storing various types of files, such as files, images and videos. Usually Google Drive is used by workers to make their work easier. However, some students also use this application, especially to save lecture assignments.

3. Google Browser

Who is not familiar with Google Browser, a product from Google that functions to search various kinds of information in the “virtual world”. This Google product is usually included in the electronic devices we use, from cellphones to laptops.

4. Google Maps

Getting lost on a long trip? Don’t worry, you can use Google’s product, namely Google Maps. This Google product functions as a guide to an area, so we don’t get lost and can reach our destination. Usually this Google product is used by online motorcycle taxi drivers in finding customer locations.

5. Google Photos

Google Photos is a Google product that functions as a medium for storing photos and videos. In fact, this product can also function to edit the photos you have.

6. Google Docs

This Google product is practically the same as Microsoft Word, which we often use when typing an article. When using Google Docs products, the tasks we do will be saved automatically, so we don’t have to worry about the files being lost.

7. Youtube

Who doesn’t know the Youtube application, from children to adults, they definitely know this application. The YouTube application is a product of Google, so when we open YouTube, we will usually be directly connected to Gmail.

Those are some Google products that are often used by many people today, are you a user of Google products?

Source: From various sources

Global Warming – What do you know about global warming? Did you know that scientists are currently anxious to observe weather patterns at the North Pole. In the Siberian region, the temperature of the city of Verkhoyansk, one of the cities in Siberia, was detected at 38 degrees Celsius on Saturday (20/6/2020).

This temperature became the highest temperature of all time in the history of temperatures throughout the Arctic.
Verkhoyansk is a city that has the most extreme temperature range on earth, where the lowest point of winter reaches an average of -49 degrees Celsius.

Meanwhile, when it had the highest temperature the previous summer, it was only perched at 37.2 degrees Celsius. Can you imagine if the area around the poles could be that hot, how are we far from there?

The condition of the city around the North Pole, which we all know is as cold as our ex’s heart, oops! could heat up like this allegedly as a result of global warming.

A. Definition of Global Warming

What is Global Warming? Don’t you know it’s just “Warm Up?” Duh, bad if so! Global warming is a form of ecosystem imbalance on earth due to the process of increasing the average temperature of the atmosphere, sea and land on earth.

Global warming is a process characterized by rising temperatures of the atmosphere, sea and land. For your information, the global average temperature at the surface of the Earth has jumped 0.74 ± 0.18 °C (1.33 ± 0.32 °F) in the last hundred years. So, fix our earth is getting warmer.

B. Causes of Global Warming

1. The Greenhouse Effect

Carbon dioxide or CO2 produced by activities on this earth, such as breathing and the results of burning fuel, covers the earth. Because the levels are excessive, CO2 is like glass that covers the surface of the earth.

In addition to carbon dioxide, sulfur dioxide and methane are also the same as CO2 covering the earth. Like the nature of glass, the gases that coat it will reflect infrared from the sun which should be returned to space. Infrared trapped in the earth. What if infrared is everywhere on this earth?

You see, infrared light has a wavelength between 760 nm to 1000 µm and a frequency of 30 GHz to 40,000 GHz. You know, hot objects due to atomic and molecular vibrations are considered to emit heat waves in the form of infrared rays. Hence, infrared rays are often referred to as heat radiation.

Actually the greenhouse effect is useful for our earth in terms of giving heat. If there was no greenhouse effect, the earth would be covered in cold. Can you imagine if the earth is cold? With an average temperature of 15 °C (59 °F), Earth is actually 33 °C (59 °F) hotter than it was before.

If there was no greenhouse effect, the earth’s temperature would only be -18 °C so that ice would cover the entire surface of the Earth. Because of this effect, the earth warms up, but if the levels are excessive, the result is what is called global warming.

2. Feedback Effect

Apart from the greenhouse effect, the feedback effect also contributes to global warming. Duh feedback feels like watching football. The feedback here is an example of evaporation of water.

The heating process besides producing carbon dioxide also produces water vapor. An example of a hydrocarbon burning reaction is as follows: CxHy + O2 → CO2 + H2O

So, there is H2O, aka water produced. The more warming that occurs due to the greenhouse effect of carbon dioxide, the more abundant water vapor rises into the atmosphere. Water vapor itself turns out to give a greenhouse effect, like CO2 gas.

The heating that continues to occur continuously increases the amount of water vapor until finally an equilibrium concentration of water vapor is reached. The greenhouse effect of water evaporation is allegedly greater than the greenhouse effect of CO2 gas that produces it. Isn’t it weird that a lot of water feels damp?

Yes indeed humidity increases, but even though humidity increases because there is a lot of water content, the relative humidity of the air is almost constant and even decreases because the air actually warms up. The feedback duration is slow considering that CO2 in the atmosphere is at home and long lived.

The second feedback is due to cloud evaporation. When viewed from below, it seems that the clouds are reflecting radiation back to the surface, as a result there will be an increase in the heating effect.

But it’s different if we peek at it from above. From above the clouds are seen reflecting infrared radiation back into space thereby reducing heat and there is a cooling effect. So remember Ariel Noah’s song “I saw behind the clouds, I saw behind the rain!”

Wow, this song is perfect for feedback on the effects of cloud and water evaporation. Maybe Ariel made a song after learning about the causes of global warming. Let’s continue the serious conversation, so whether what will be produced by evaporation of clouds is in the form of heating or cooling, it depends on several things such as cloud type and height.

The next feedback is the disappearance of the ability of ice to reflect light. When global warming occurs, the ice in the polar regions melts. Ironically the longer the disbursement the faster. When the ice melts, the land or water below will be exposed.

If when covered with ice, it is ice that reflects light, but when land or water is open, then both land and land are only able to reflect less light than ice. The two halves are even more likely to absorb heat from the sun, as a result the warming increases and the ice melts and melts again.

Feedback is not always negative. There is also a positive. Positive feedback occurs due to the release of CO2 and CH4 or methane gas from the softening of the frozen ground (permafrost).

This process is another mechanism that also has an effect on heating. In addition, melting ice will also release CH4 which turns out to cause a positive feedback.

The ability of the oceans to absorb carbon is less than optimal if the temperature rises, why? This is caused by reduced nutrient levels in the mesopelagic zone so that the growth of diatoms is limited compared to phytoplankton which is a low carbon sink.

3. Variation of the sun

Let’s get acquainted first with variations of the sun, variations of the sun are changes in the amount of radiant energy released by the sun. Solar variation is influenced by the 11-year solar cycle (red spot cycle) in addition to other fluctuations that are not periodic

It has been suggested that solar variations caused by feedback from clouds have contributed to the current warming. The cause of global warming due to solar variations with warming due to the greenhouse effect is that in solar variations there is an increase in solar activity.

This activity is able to increase the temperature of the stratosphere otherwise the greenhouse effect will reduce the temperature of the stratosphere. Since the 1960s, this stratospheric cooling has actually been observed. This event is unlikely to occur if the contributor is solar activity,

The depletion of the ozone layer also contributes to the cooling. The combination of solar variations with volcanic activity seems to have had a warming effect from pre-industrial times to the 1950s, and a cooling effect since the 1950s.

It is estimated that the sun may have contributed to a 45-50% increase in global average temperature over the period 1900-2000, and about 25-35% between 1980 and 2000. Scientists conclude that despite this increase in the sensitivity of the climate to solar influence.

But most of the warming that has occurred in recent decades has been caused by greenhouse gases. Some scientists think the Solar Cycle has only given it a small increase of about 0.07% in the level of brightness it has produced over the last 30 years.

With this small number it seems that this effect is too small to contribute to global warming. In fact, a study by Lockwood and Fröhlich found that there has been no global warming with solar variations since 1985, in fact there is no relationship at all, either through variations in solar output or variations in cosmic rays.

As we now know that there are various processes that make global warming happen which can have an impact on the life of living things on earth. This is also presented in the book Global Warming – Business Solutions and Opportunities.

C. How to Measure Global Warming

How do we know the size of global warming that we are currently experiencing, is it still normal, is it or is it already worrying? In 1896, scientists actually suspected that burning fossil fuels would change the composition of the atmosphere and could cause global warming.

In 1957 when researchers working on a global research program namely the International Geophysical Year then took atmospheric samples from the top of Mount Mauna Loa in Hawaii to prove their hypothesis.

The result turns out that CO2 levels increase in concentration in the atmosphere and cause global warming. Actually, scientists also suspected that the Earth’s climate was getting warmer, but at that time they did not have enough evidence to support their suspicions. They don’t want to be seen as “haluful”

It takes years to make climate observations. It wasn’t just a day or two.
It was only in the late 1980s that they managed to record statistical data showing that the earth was warming, but even then they felt it was still inconclusive.

In areas near urban areas then established weather stations. Location of weather stations in urban areas with the aim of getting a lot of data from heat generated from vehicle and building activities. The data collected turned out to be more accurate.

These results match their hypothesis so far, the warming of the earth is not just a figment of the imagination. In the late 20th century, it was noted that the ten warmest years over the last hundred years followed 1980, and the three warmest years followed 1990, with 1998 being the hottest.

In 2001, the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) made a conclusion stating that global air temperatures had increased by 0.6 degrees Celsius (1 degree Fahrenheit) since 1861. They agreed that the warming was mainly caused by human activities which contributed to gases greenhouse to the atmosphere.

The IPCC even predicts that the increase in global average temperature will increase by 1.1 to 6.4 °C (2.0 to 11.5 °F) between 1990 and 2100. If the emission of greenhouse gases continues to increase, experts predict, the concentration of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere could soar.

Even up to three times as much at the beginning of the 22nd century when compared to the period before the industrial era. What are the consequences? Yes, of course there will be dramatic climate change, it’s sad to make you hysterical! Although indeed this climate change event has occurred throughout Earth’s history several times from the time of the living dinosaurs maybe.

But this time humans will face this problem at much greater population risk. The number of people on this earth is getting bigger and bigger.

D. Climate models

The results show that the addition of greenhouse gases has an effect on a warmer climate. Even though the same assumptions are used for greenhouse gas concentrations in the future, the climate sensitivity will still be within a certain range.

The climate models that have been formulated are also used to find the causes of the current climate change. The trick is to compare the changes that have been observed with the results predicted by the model for various causes, whether natural or human activities.

Currently, existing climate models are similar to global temperature changes observed over the last hundred years, but do not simulate all aspects of climate. Indeed, these models do not directly state that the warming that existed between 1910 and 1945 was caused by natural processes or human activities, but the results show that warming since 1975 has been monopolized by the emissions of gases that are present in human daily activities.

E. Impact of Global Warming

What are the real effects of global warming? Have you started to feel? What panic? or just normal because it considers normal?

1. Unstable Climate

One of the impacts of global warming is that the climate is starting to become unstable. Eits, first check whether you know what climate is? What is the difference between climate and weather? Climate is the average weather situation over a large area over a long period of time. While the weather Weather is the state of the air at a time in a relatively narrow area.

Factors that affect climate and weather are sunlight, temperature, air pressure, air humidity, wind, clouds and precipitation. Back in the 1980s or 1990s, the climate was so predictable. Usually from October to March, the rainy season will occur but now it often misses, do you realize that?

In some areas the drought has hit violently because of the drought. The existence of global warming causes the northern part of the northern hemisphere (Northern Hemisphere) to heat up more than other areas on Earth. As a result, the icebergs are now starting to melt so that the land will narrow. Not many more lumps of floating ice.

Areas that used to experience light snow are now not experiencing it anymore. In the mountains of the subtropics, the areas covered with snow will be less and will melt more quickly. The growing season will be longer in some areas. Temperatures in winter and at night tend to increase.

Warmer areas will become more humid as more water vaporizes and escapes from the oceans. Rainfall worldwide has increased by 1 percent in the last hundred years. The storms will turn out to be more frequent. In addition, water will quickly escape into steam from the ground. As a result, some areas will become drier than before.

The wind will blow harder and have a different pattern than before. Hurricane (hurricane) that obtain power from the evaporation of water, will become more intense. Weather patterns are becoming more unpredictable and more extreme.

2. Rising sea levels

The melting of ice in the polar regions has caused the volume of seawater to increase, resulting in an increase in sea level. Sea levels worldwide have risen 10 – 25 cm (4 – 10 inches) during the 20th century, and IPCC scientists predict a further increase of 9 – 88 cm (4 – 35 inches) in the 21st century wow!

What happens if the sea level rises? Of course the area around the beach will be submerged. Like the Netherlands which lost 17.6% of its area because it was sunk by a 100 cm rise in sea level. Erosion of cliffs, beaches and dunes will increase. When the sea level reaches the mouth of the river, flooding due to high tides is unavoidable.

3. Global temperatures tend to increase

If we imagine that, with the heat of the earth, a lot of food will be produced, then the image is wrong. Maybe in an area it will be profitable because it experiences a longer rainy season, but areas in other parts of the world, on the contrary, experience a prolonged summer.

If it snows in the desert areas, desert farms that bring in irrigation water from distant mountains may suffer if the winter snowpack, which thus functions as a natural reservoir, melts before the peak growing months. . Not to mention that food crops and forests can experience more severe insect and disease attacks.

4. Ecological disturbance

When the earth’s temperature heats up, we as humans are uncomfortable, as well as other living things. The heating effect interferes with life. Animals will migrate looking for cool places, plants change their direction of growth looking for places that support their growth

Humans who are gifted with reason might do things to minimize the heat that appears, but other creatures certainly don’t. Animals and plants may end in extinction because they are unable to adapt.

5. Social and political impact

Erratic weather conditions cause the emergence of various diseases. For farmers, rainy conditions that don’t stop can frustrate their harvests, while if the heat is prolonged it also makes it difficult for them to start farming because of the difficulty in water supply.

Heat also causes forests to catch fire easily. Many hotspots have the potential to catch fire. Forests in Indonesia are often burned. The problem of forest fires was complicated and it was difficult to find a solution.

F. Due to global warming in Indonesia

How are you doing in Indonesia, to what extent will global warming have an impact on this country? According to the Meteorology and Geophysics Climatology Agency, in 2030 there will be an increase in temperature of 0.5 degrees Celsius. 2030 is only 9 years away guys!

In addition to rising air temperatures, cases of drought will also increase in the southern part of Sumatra, most of Java, Madura, Bali, West Nusa Tenggara (NTB), and East Nusa Tenggara (NTT) in 2030. Meanwhile, the rainy season will also be heavy to extreme. tends to increase by up to 40 percent compared to today.

Even though the rain is actually just a drop of water, for those who are sensitive to rain it is a drop of longing. Continuous rain besides causing puddles, which can also cause catastrophic flooding in various areas. You can read a deeper understanding in the book Global Warming; Floods & Logging Tragedy by Hadi S. Alikodra.

Another thing that is happening due to global warming is decreasing oxygen levels in equatorial regions, including Indonesia. The impact is more severe, compared to the four seasons country. So far, in the ocean there are differences classified based on its depth, the sea makes its own stratification.

This stratification process makes a lot of oxygen concentrated at the top so as to produce a lot of biomass in the form of fish and algae. As a result, the food chain and marine biota that need oxygen are clearly disrupted. There is an uneven amount of difference.

This hot temperature also absorbs oxygen on the surface. Well, this change actually disrupts the food chain that has been formed so far. The food chain on which human life is based is the food chain. If the food chain is disrupted, life processes will be disrupted.

Global warming will also have an impact on rising temperatures so that if this happens, what is feared is the lack of consistency in biomass productivity due to rising temperatures. The condition that is feared is that farmers should be harvesting so they don’t harvest.

The income that they should have immediately let go of because of crop failure. The strong become weak, then the food chain will be more lame. Various things can also happen during global warming. This was made in animated form by Son Yeong Un in his book entitled Magic Thousand Character Series: Global Warming Threat.

G. How to Anticipate Global Warming

Here are some steps that can be taken to participate in minimizing the impact of global warming:

1. Environmental conservation such as reforestation, planting trees and reforesting critical land.
2. Using energy sourced from alternative energy (water, solar, wind, bioenergy) to reduce the use of fossil fuel energy (petroleum and coal).
3. Recycling and energy efficiency.
4. Educational efforts to the wider community by providing understanding and application to prevent global warming.

Gharimin is – Sinaumed’s friends , Zakat is one of the obligatory acts of worship for Muslims because it is the fourth pillar of Islam. The payment of zakat is obligatory for everyone whose wealth has reached the nishab, haul, and other conditions.

Quoted from the book Everyday Muslim Guide by DR. KH. M. Hamdan Rasyid, MA and Saiful Hadi El-Sutha , Zakat comes from the word zakaa-yazkuu-zakaatan which means holy, growing, good and developing.

While the concept of zakat according to the term is a collection of funds that must be issued by every Muslim whose wealth has reached the nishab for those who are entitled to receive it. Zakat orders are listed in paragraph 11 of At-Taubah letter.

But if they repent and establish prayer and pay the zakat, then they are your brothers in religion. We detail the verses for people who know.

Meaning: ” If they repent, pray and pay zakat, then (they) are your brothers in the same religion. And We explain its verses to those who know them.”

Payment of zakat fitrah is obligatory for Muslims except for 8 people who are included in mustahiq. Because, there is a verse in the Qur’an that discusses the group of people who are entitled to receive zakat, which is the word of Allah SWT in Surat At Taubah verse 60 which means:

“Indeed, zakat is only for the poor, the poor, amil zakat, people whose hearts are softened (converts), to (free) slaves, to (free) people who have debts (Gharimin), for people who are fighting in God’s way and for those who are traveling, as an obligation from God. God is All-Knowing, All-Wise.”

However, not all Muslims who are in debt are called gharimin. There are several criteria for determining gharim based on the purpose of debt. Then what exactly is Gharimin and what are the provisions for Zakat Gharimin? Check out the full explanation below.

Meaning of Gharimin

Gharimîn is an Arabic term that means people who have debts. Etymologically, gharimin means a person who owes money. As one of the recipients of zakat, scholars differ in determining who is gharim. Here are some opinions of scholars in interpreting gharimin.

According to the Hanafi and Maliki schools

According to Hanafi and Maliki, gharimin is a person who owes money but does not have nisab (property) greater than the debt. Defining gharimin in this sense is relevant to the poor.

Because according to Hanafi and Maliki, poverty is a condition for all definitions of zakat, except for amil and ibnu sabill. So if he has property that can be returned, he is not included in the ghārim.

The condition of ghārimān to be able to receive zakat is that they are Muslim, independent, not Bani Hashim and the debt is not for immoral purposes such as drinking, gambling and so on.

According to the Syafi’i and Hambali Sects

According to Syafi’i and Hambali, gharimin are Muslims who are in debt. These two sects divide the ghārim into two groups, namely:

People who owe money for the benefit of their family or loved ones. That is, he borrows other people’s property to calm slander (upheaval and chaos) that occurs between loved ones, whether the slander is between two groups or individuals. The proof is in a hadith narrated by a Muslim from Qabishah bin Mukhariq, which means:

Regarding Qabishah Bin Mukhariq, he said: “I was carrying a heavy load, so I went to the Messenger of Allah, peace be upon him, to ask what the load was.”

He said: “Wait O Qabishah come to us in zakat and we will give it to you. He said again: “O Qabishah, his zakat is not halal except for three groups, first, the person who carries the burden, then it is halal for him to ask until he is done, until he stops begging.” (HR Muslim)

The first group is divided into two groups, namely:

People who bear the death penalty. Zakat is given to him, rich or poor, to cover debts in order to remove the disorder (fitnah) that exists in the family and among the followers of Islam. In this regard, there are two opinions, namely:

Zakat is given even if he is rich. Because he owes for the good of the family. This is like a murder debt. This opinion was expressed by imam Syafi’i, zakat is not given by a rich person. But, because the debt is property that he incurred not for murder. That equates to taking ownership of goods when buying and selling.

This opinion was expressed by the followers of the Imam Shafi’i sect, but it is not mentioned who thought so. A person who owes money for his own good. As long as he is poor and will not be used for immorality.

Unlike the two previous schools, two. This school understands Lafadh Ghīrim in two groups. First, people owe for their own sake. Condition, they must be poor.

This first group is the same as the opinion of the two previous schools. Two people who are committed to the good of Muslims, such as enduring a murderous death and reconciling two warring groups.

There are no strict poverty requirements for this second group which, as explained above, depend on the level of benefits received. This shows that Shafi’i and Hambali understand the meaning of the word ghīrim more broadly. They are included in the concept of gharim people who under certain conditions owe something for themselves and for the benefit of others.

According to Scholars of Tafsir

According to al-Tabari

According to al-Tabari, ghīrimān is a debtor who is unable to pay his debts because he has no assets. The condition is that the debt is not intended for immoral and redundant purposes.

With reference to the causes of the debt, Tabari cites several traditions that corroborate his opinion. The stories he tells contain the predestined relationships of people who are in debt. These narrations are primarily based on companions. These histories are:

Many people are in debt due to natural disasters such as house fires and floods. They are in debt to support themselves, not people who are in debt because of extravagance.

According to al-Qurthubi

Al-Qurthubi said, the scholars have agreed that what is meant by ghārim is the inability of the debtor to pay off his debt. According to him, the term ghīrim also includes rich people who are in debt. If someone has a debt and has no wealth to pay it, then he is classified as ghārim and fakir.

He can get zakat from two seniors. This provision is based on the hadith of Rasulullah saw, which means, from Abu Sa’id al-Khudri, he said:

In the time of the Messenger of Allah, peace be upon him, there was a man who had a misfortune with the fruit he bought, causing him to be deeply in debt, so the Prophet, peace be upon him, said to him:

“Do charity for him. “People give him alms, but the amount of alms available is not enough to pay off his debts.”

The Messenger of God, may God bless him and grant him peace, said to the person who gave a loan: “Take what you have, there is nothing left for you except that.” (HR. Muslim)

The above explanation of ghārim is for those who owe money for personal gain. Furthermore, according to Al-Qurthubi, zakat can also be given to someone who has a debt for the benefit of two people or two conflicting groups.

He receives zakat according to the burden of debt he carries. Because if he repays the debt from his wealth, then his wealth will run out. In this matter, he followed the opinion of Shafi’i and Ahmad bin Hambal.

Based on the explanation above, it can be concluded that the meaning of gharimin according to Al-Qurthubi includes two groups, namely:

People who are in debt for personal gain, even though they are unable to pay debts or rich people who are in debt. People who lack money to reconcile two people or two conflicting groups.

Based on the explanation above to find out the meaning of the word gharimin, Qurtubi uses the hadiths and opinions of the scholars. Thus, it can be concluded that the reasoning method used is bayani reasoning.

According to Muhammad Rashid Ridha

Muhammad Rasyid Ridha divides Gharimin into two parts, namely:

People who cannot pay their debts because they have no assets. The condition is not guilt for immorality and waste, but guilt for eliminating the conflict between the two groups.

It was common among the Arabs, that there was a war between them that required that he be killed or someone would come to help; donate by supporting all the above, so the fighting will end.

It is strongly suspected that this second group is not limited to the poor, but seems permissible for the rich. This means that gharim in surah al-Taubah verse 60 includes rich people who are in debt, with the stipulation that the debt is to eliminate quarrels between two people or two groups.

Because a person cannot bear the cost of reconciling two conflicting parties if he is not rich.

Muhammad Rashid Ridha bases his opinion on two hadiths, namely the hadith of the Prophet, may God bless him and grant him peace, narrated by Ahmad bin Hambal from Anas and the hadith by Muslim narrated by Qatīdah bin Mukhīriq as mentioned above.

Based on the description above, it can be seen that the reasoning method used by Rashid Rida to determine the meaning of ghārimin is the bayānā proposition. He uses hadith to explain the meaning of ghārimin. In addition, he also uses ‘urf of the Arab community to emphasize the meaning of gharimin which is defined

Menurut Muhammad Ali Al-Sayis

Muhammad Ali Al-Sayis in establishing the meaning of gharimin by quoting the opinions of Hanafia and Syafi’iyah scholars and the arguments put forward by the two schools of thought. Hanafia and Shafi’iyah scholars differ in opinion, but Muhammad Ali Al-Sayis strengthens an opinion against the two opinions of scholars.

Conditions of a Person Called Gharimin

According to Al-Hafidz Ibnu Katsir, he mentions several conditions of people called Gharimin, the following is the argument:

First , the person who repents from immorality and that causes him to be involved by many debts.

Lajnah Daimah added that those who are entitled to zakat, including al-Gharim, are those who owe it to meet their family’s needs, including food, clothing, and shelter.

In one of his fatwas it is stated:

Like his father, his children, or his wife, or a car that he labors (works on) to spend from his earnings on himself. For example, if someone is obliged to spend on him, and he does not have anything to pay off the debt, he deserves to be given from the zakat money what he can use to pay off his debt.

“When a person is in debt because he has to build a house to live in, or buy clothes to wear, or to support someone who is his obligation, such as a father, son or spouse. 

Or he buys a car to use for work so he can support himself and his family even though he has no assets to pay off his debts, then he is entitled to zakat assets to pay off his debts. (Fatwa Lajnah Daimah, 10/9).

Second , people who bear debts for resolving disputes, so that they spend their wealth. Such people are entitled to zakat.

The proof is the hadith of Qabishah bin Mukhariq al-Hilaly,

“I incurred a debt, then I went to the Prophet Shallallahu ‘alaihi wa sallam to ask for help.”

“Wait, until the zakat is available, let me order it to be given to you.”  Answered Prophet Muhammad Shallallahu ‘alaihi wa sallam.

Then when the zakat money came, the Prophet, may God bless him and grant him peace, said:

O Qabisah, the matter is not permissible except for one of three men who carry a burden, and it becomes permissible for him until he reaches it and then he catches it.

“O Qabishah, begging is not lawful, except for one of the three, (among them):

The person who is in charge of settling disputes can ask, and when he can pay it, he can’t beg anymore.” (Narrated by Muslim 2451 and Abu Daud 1642)

Third, people who go bankrupt because of business and have to get into debt.

Abu Said’s best friend, radhiyallahu ‘anhu, said that during the time of the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wa sallam, there was a merchant who experienced an accident, his merchandise was damaged. In the end, he was in debt. Then the Prophet (sallallahu ‘alayhi wa sallam) ordered his companions: “ Give him zakat.”

Many friends gave zakat, but the amount was not enough to cover his debt. So the Prophet Shallallahu ‘alaihi wa sallam asked the person who owed him.

Take what you find, and you have nothing but that.

“Take that person’s, and you have no right to take anything else.” (Narrated by Muslim 4064, Abu Daud 3471 and others).

Gharimin’s position in Fiqh

Zakat is a way for Muslims and worship to strengthen human relations by helping other people’s difficulties, including those who cannot afford to pay their debts.

According to fiqh, helping people who are in debt with zakat assets means that they have achieved two main goals, namely:

• Build friendships with people who have debt.
• The existence of debt makes the person confused about how to solve it. Therefore, Islam helps him by covering his debts and fulfilling his needs.
• Establish friendly relations with people who have debts and help them for their benefit.
• On the other hand, the purpose of zakat gharimin is to eliminate usury from someone who has a debt. So that he does not need to sell his basic needs which will make his life even more difficult.

In Islam, the position of gharim is important to note. This is because the effect of debt is not only related to personal peace, but also to one’s moral progress and life.

Nonetheless, Islam has always advocated avoiding debt, for example by doing the following:

• Train your child or family to live simply and avoid extravagance.
• Always try not to be in debt.
• If you are in a debt emergency, then try to really keep your promise to pay it off.
• Basically, a gharimin is a person who is unable to fulfill his obligation to pay zakat due to debt. Therefore, they are entitled to gharim zakat. However, not all Muslim debt cases can be classified in this category.

Closing

Thus a review of the meaning of gharimin and its criteria.

Viviparous Animals – In reality all living things will reproduce which means that living things can have offspring. The purpose of living things in breeding is to multiply offspring, so that their species do not run out or become extinct. Not only do animals reproduce, humans also reproduce by giving birth.

Definition of Viviparous Animals

Viviparous animals are one way of reproduction in animals by giving birth. How to reproduce in animals that generally occur in mammals or mammals. As long as the development of the embryo takes place, food is obtained from the mother’s body through the placenta or placenta.

The process of pregnancy in viviparous animals begins with the fertilization of the male cell against the female egg cell in the mother’s body. After that there is growth until finally the parent gives birth and forms a new individual. The development of viviparous hyacinths is also characterized by the female releasing eggs in her reproductive tract. Then copulation and fertilization occur in the female genital tract.

General Characteristics of Viviparous Animals

Viviparous animals have general characteristics that we can usually see from their reproduction by giving birth, namely:

1. Has mammary glands and nipples
2. Generally lactating or mammals
3. Have ears
4. The body is covered with feathers
5. Offspring can develop in the mother’s body before being born.

Examples of Viviparous Animals

There are some viviparous animals or breeding by giving birth. Here are some types of viviparous animals and their explanations:

1. Ape

Many people think that apes and monkeys are the same species. Though these two animals have some differences. Even though they are both primates, the two are different because apes don’t have tails while monkeys have tails.

Monkeys also have a larger size while monkeys are smaller. Habitat for apes is more often on the ground, while monkeys are more often in trees. Apes are a member of the hominoidea superfamily of the primate order. In the current taxonomic system there are two families of hominids, namely the family Hylobatidae which consists of four genera and twelve species of gibbons, including the outer gibbon and gibbons of the family hominidae.

In addition there are several animals whose bodies and others are also similar to monkeys, namely:

a. Orangutan

The word “orang utan” itself is taken from the Malay language which means ‘people’ or which means human, while ‘utan’ is forest. Orangutans are a type of large ape with long arms and reddish or brown hair.

Orangutans live in the tropical forests of Indonesia and Malaysia, particularly on the islands of Borneo and Sumatra. Orangutans are found in the tropical rain forest region of Southeast Asia, namely on the islands of Borneo and Sumatra in the parts of Indonesia and Malaysia.

Orangutans are still included in great ape species such as chimpanzees and gorillas. The great ape group includes the classification of types of mammals that have large brains, eyes that point forward and hands that can grip.

The second largest type of ape in the world is the orangutan. The types are Bornean orangutans (Pongo pygmaeus), Sumatran orangutans (Pongo Abelii), and Tapanuli orangutans (Pongo tapanuliensis). How to move orangutans by swinging in the trees and making nests from leaves.

Orangutans can live in various types of forests, ranging from coral forests, hills, lowland forests, watersheds, freshwater swamp forests, peat swamps, dry land above mangrove and nipa palm swamps, to mountain forests.

b. Gorilla

Gorillas are the largest type of primates. Gorillas are the second closest species to humans after chimpanzees. There are two species in the gorilla genus, namely the eastern gorilla and the western gorilla.

Gorilla food consists of vegetables and sometimes gorillas also eat insects. Therefore, gorillas are classified as omnivorous animals. Gorillas come from tropical forests in Africa. Compared to the shape of the human body, gorillas have long arms and legs. Where the arms are longer than the legs.

A gorilla’s chest is large and most of its body is hairy, except for the fingers, face, armpits, soles of the feet and palms. The head of the gorilla is large, the eyes are small and brownish in color. Gorillas don’t have tails. Each gorilla has a unique nose like humans, unique fingerprints. And the number of adult gorilla teeth is 32. The five senses of gorillas are almost similar to humans. Male gorillas are bigger than female gorillas.

c. Chimpanzee

The name chimpanzee is derived from the tshiluba language of the kivili chimpanzee language which is the local name for the animal and translates directly to mockman (English) or it could just be ape . Chimpanzee is the common name for the two living species of ape in the genus Pan. The Congo River forms the natural habitat boundary of these two species.

Chimpanzees also have several kinds, namely: Pan paniscus or bonobo chimpanzees which are members of the hominidae family, along with gorillas, humans and orangutans. Pan Troglodytes or common chimpanzee.

Chimpanzees are members of the family hominidae, gorillas, humans and orangutans. Chimpanzees separated from humans in the family rating about 4 – 6 million years ago. The two chimpanzees above are close relatives of humans, all members of the homini tribe. Chimpanzees are known to be the only members of the Panina subtribe. The two Pan species separated about 1 million years ago.

d. Ancient human

Early humans are also called ‘Prehistoric people’ or prehistoric humans who are now known as prehistoric humans. Pre-literate humans are a type of ancient human who lived in an era before knowing writing.

2. Elephant

Elephants are herbivorous animals that we can find in various habitats, such as savannas, forests, deserts and swamps. They tend to be near water. Female elephants are more likely to live in family groups consisting of just one female and her young or several related females and their young.

While male elephants leave their family groups when they reach puberty, and will live alone or with other males. Adult males also typically interact with family groups when looking for a mate and enter a stage of increased testosterone and aggression called musth that helps them achieve dominance and reproductive success.

The calf is the center of attention of the family group and is dependent on its mother for about three years. Elephants can live for 70 years in the wild. Elephants also communicate through touch, sight, smell and sound. The intelligence of elephants has been compared to that of primates and cetaceans. They appear to be self-aware and show empathy for other elephants who are near or have died.

 

3. Horses

Horse is one of the mammals. Horses reproduce by giving birth or viviparous. Before giving birth, the mare will experience a period of pregnancy. This pregnancy occurs due to the fertilization of the female egg by the male cell in the mare’s body.

The mare produces milk for her foals and will also continue to feed them for several months. And within a short time of about an hour or two after birth, the horse will be able to stand on its own and walk.

Horses that are going to give birth usually occur at night or early in the morning. After the foal is born, the mare will chew the placenta to prevent the foal from suffocating. The mother horse will lick her child to help blood circulation.

Foals are born without teeth. As they get older, the horse’s teeth begin to grow. By the age of six to nine months, the horse has all of its baby teeth. When the foal is five to six years old, those baby teeth will be replaced by permanent teeth.

4. Whale

Whales are a group of mammals and unlike other fish, whales reproduce by giving birth or viviparous. Mother whales also breastfeed their babies for quite a long time. And when nursing lasts more than a year it appears that the mother whale has a strong bond with her calf.

Whales breed seasonally and usually breed in warm tropical waters. For female whales can have one child for every one year with a gestation period of nine to eighteen months. The calf that is born can swim immediately after leaving the mother’s body.

For mating, whales are polygamous mammals and complex matings include long migrations to breeding grounds, vocalizations and sometimes competition between males for females. Mating rituals among whales can be fierce. Male humpback whales can beat each other with fins and heads to win the opportunity to mate with females.

A female whale mating with one male while being supported from below by another male. There are also species of whales that prefer to sing deep and hoarse vocals to get the attention of the female. Bull whales can sing songs that occur from other sound attacks.

Whales mate with males by inserting sperm into the female’s vents to fertilize eggs. And after birth, the calves are ready to swim and follow their mother on sea migrations for at least six months.

5. Giraffe

Giraffe is a mammal that has a height of 4-6 m. The giraffe’s favorite foods include acacia tree leaves, wild apricots, fruit flowers, buds, seeds and fresh grass. To drink, giraffes only drink water in small portions, giraffes get water from their food.

If two male giraffes meet, they will start banging their heads and necks. The winner will get a female giraffe. And the female giraffe Alan is pregnant for 15 months. A newborn baby giraffe is 2 meters tall, and has a unique pattern.

After the baby giraffe is born, the mother will keep and protect the baby giraffe from its friends for 15 days. Young giraffes can join their mother mates after that.

6. Cat

In breeding male cats and female cats experience the process of mating first. Then the female cat will be pregnant for 58-67 days or about two months. And the cat will give birth to kittens. Cats can give birth once to six kittens.

In giving birth, cats have their own characteristics, such as:

1. Find a quiet and secluded place
2. The mother cat’s appetite is reduced
3. Continuous meowing
4. Release water like pee

If Sinaumed’s is a cat lover, Sinaumed’s can get to know cats further by reading books available at www.sinaumedia.com .

7. Lion

Lions are animals that live in groups. Lion groups usually consist of a male and female, then this group guards its territory. The lifespan of lions is between 10 and 15 years in the wild, but in captivity it is possible to be more than 20 years.

The female lion is more active in hunting, while the male lion is more relaxed in waiting and asking for rations from the prey of the females. Male lions are also believed to be superior and mighty compared to other lions. However, the lion’s weakness is that it cannot climb trees.

The male lion’s body grows thick fur around the nape, and it is more advantageous to protect the nape, especially in free fights between big cats which tend to pounce on the nape to immobilize their enemies.

And when the mating season arrives, once the population takes 20 seconds and lions can mate up to 50 times a day. The gestation period for a lioness is around 98–120 days and a pregnant female will temporarily leave the group. Lions in one birth will give birth to 1-6 tails. Feeding time is 7–10 months.

For 1 week, baby lions can not see. After 3 weeks I was able to walk. Females who give birth will not return to the group until their young are 6-8 weeks old. Lion cubs can eat meat after 3 months of age. Lion cubs often die because they are killed by males from other groups or are not cared for by lionesses due to the limited availability of food.

Lion cubs that live up to 1 year are only 40%, up to 2 years is 20%, when they become adult lions the percentage of deaths decreases. Male lions aged 3-4 years have become adult lions, and 3-year-old female lions have become adult lions. Once there was a lion kept until the age of 24 years.

8. Goat

Female goats start to mature at the age of 6-8 months. Good age in mating is the age of 10-12 months. And to prevent young female goats from marrying at the age of 5 months, they have been separated from the group of male goats, in cages or in the nursery.

Meanwhile, male goats start to become sexually mature at the age of 6-8 months, but at the age of 12 they are good enough to mate with females. Males are always in a state of heat, every stimulus that comes through the five senses, for example the smell of a female goat that is not far from him.

Goats in heat occur every 18-21 days or approximately 19 days and heat lasts for a day and a night up to two days and two nights. The right mating that can produce pregnancy is in mid-estrus.

If the goat has shown signs of lust in the morning, then mate it in the evening, if it is in heat in the afternoon, then mate it the next day, namely in the morning. Mating with sows after giving birth is carried out when the mother shows the first sign of heat and is repeated every time the animal is in heat for the next time until it becomes pregnant. The duration of pregnancy in female goats is around 150-154 days.

Goats have signs of being pregnant, namely:

1. The mother goat is calmer
2. Better appetite
3. The body of the goat is fatter
4. If the goat owner lets him go, the goat chooses to be alone
5. Lust is not visible anymore
6. Hair color is more shiny
7. The right side of the abdomen is getting bigger and hanging
8. The number of children born is one to four tails but generally give birth to 2 tails
9. Goats are weaned or released from milk at the age of 3-5 months
10. The mother is still mated while still breastfeeding the kid goats.

Those are some examples of viviparous animals and their explanations. If Sinaumed’s is interested in reading books about viviparous animals, their characteristics and examples of other animals. Sinaumed’s can read books available at www.sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits we strive to give the best!

Examples of Paired Dances – In dance works and their performances, Sinaumed’s will often find dances performed by a dancer or known as a single dancer and some in groups or can be called the embodiment of the meaning of pair dance.

Simply put, pair dance is dance that is performed not alone and is played by two people in pairs. Even so, group or mass dances danced by many people can also be said to be pair dances.

The movements between the two dancers in the pair dance must complement each other, interact and fill each other, so that there is a response or agreement in good movement. In Indonesian traditional dance, there are several groups of pair dances, namely sons and daughters, subtle daughters, agile daughters, subtle sons and dashing sons. In order to better understand the pair dance further, here is an example of a pair dance.

Example of Pair Dance

1. Twelve Haphazard Dance

Serampang Dua Belas dance is a traditional dance originating from North Sumatra. This dance is a classical dance from Malay created by Guru Sauti. This dance describes the love story of two human children, which starts from the process of acquaintance to the end of marriage.

This pair dance has a moral message in the form, if you already have a suitable partner, then you should not procrastinate and go straight to the altar.

Before being known as the Serampang Dua Belas dance, this dance was previously named Pulau Sari according to the song that accompanies this song, namely Pulau Sari. However, the name Pulau Sari is not suitable, because dances that have the name Pulau usually have a fast tempo or rumba.

Meanwhile, the name Dua Belas means the dance that has the fastest movement among the songs entitled Serampang. Another reason for changing the name to Serampang Dua Belas is because it refers to the variety of movements used as many as 12 movements.

The Serampang Dua Belas dance is a classical dance that is quite legendary and influences traditional dances from other regions.

This dance has been popular since the 1930s and emerged to shift western influences and foster an attitude of nationalism through culture.

Since its inception, the Serampang Dua Belas dance has been able to unify the nation as well as a medium for entertainment and social interaction. On the other hand, the Serampang Dua Belas dance also sparked controversy because it took the musical rhythm of the Portuguese Branyo.

This dance is rooted in the Malay Ronggeng dance with three opening songs namely Serampang Laut, Gunung Sayang and Pulau Sari. The song that accompanies the Serampang Dua Belas dance was reworked by OK Adram by taking several elements of dance and music from the archipelago.

The results of this work later became the Serampang Dua Belas dance and then developed in the Deli Serdang Berdagai Sultanate, Deli Serdang, North Sumatra.

At that time, this dance could only be performed by male dancers, because there were customary rules that did not allow female dancers to appear in public.

Then, Sauti’s teacher changed this dance so that it could be accepted by all ethnic groups at all social levels in Indonesia and the Serampang Dua Belas dance was finally in demand by the wider community at that time because it had movements that were not too difficult.

2. Zapin Dance

The Zapin dance is the second example of pair dance. This dance is a traditional dance originating from Riau Province and has educational and entertaining properties.

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), zapin is a typical Malay dance accompanied by songs originating from Yemen. According to the book Encyclopedia of Archipelago arts and culture by Gendhis Paradisa, the Zapin dance was previously used as a medium for preaching Islam with the lyrics of the Zapin song being sung.

As a pair dance, the Zapin dance is danced in groups with musical accompaniment consisting of two main musical instruments, namely a small drum called a marwas and a lute.

The word zapin comes from the Arabic word zafin which means fast foot movement following a series of strokes. For this reason, this dance is considered a form of acculturation of Arab culture and Malay culture in the past.

According to the official website of the Ministry of Education and Culture (Kemdikbud) the Zapin dance is a pair dance which is performed at various kinds of folk entertainment events.

At first, the Zapin dance from the Malay tribe was brought from Arabia and Yemen and originated from a special dance at court circles in the Yemeni Sultanate of the Middle East in the past.

During the transcontinental trading period, namely around the 16th century, Arab brothers brought this dance and introduced it to the people around the Malacca Strait.

The dance then undergoes a process of acculturation of local culture by inserting Malay tribal values ​​and norms in every movement. After experiencing the acculturation process, every Zapin dance movement contains a philosophical value related to the lifestyle of the Riau Malay community.

At the beginning of its appearance, the Zapin dance could only be danced by men. Then in the 1960s until now this dance has been danced by women and can even be danced mixed.

3. Bedhaya Dance

The Bedhaya Ketawang dance is a sacred dance from the Surakarta Hadiningrat Kasunanan Palace or the Solo Palace. This dance is a dance of greatness that can only be performed at the coronation or at the commemoration of the king’s ascension.

The name Bedhaya Ketawang comes from the word bedhaya which means a female dancer in the palace and ketawang which means the sky or overcast sky. Meanwhile, the word ketawang symbolizes something that is holy, high and the abode of the gods.

This pair of traditional dances is full of meaning and has a close relationship with traditional ceremonies, religion, the king’s love affair with Kanjeng Ratu Kidul and the sacred. The story presented in the Bedhaya Ketawang dance is a Javanese folktale originating from the love story of Panembahan Senopati and Kanjeng Ratu Kidul.

This dance has a composition with a number of dancers of seven to nine female dancers dressed in the same costume as the theme of the story that has been created without dialogue.

The dancers are symbolized by the position of the scorpion star and are nine in number. The dancers will dress like a Javanese bride with dhodot and sampan with the names of the dancers and their meanings as follows:

• Batak: Mind and soul
• Gulu: Body
• Distended: Sexual organs
• Apit mburi: Left arm
• Apir ngarep: Right arm
• Apit meaning: Left leg
• Endhel ajeg: Desire or lust
• Endhel weton: Right leg
• Dhada: Body

This dance is not just a traditional dance, because it had become one of the religious activities for the nobility in Java. This is related to the background of the Bedhaya dance, the composition of which is influenced by the old Javanese mindset with its psychological nature and in fact manifested in the nine dancers of the Bedhaya dance. In addition, this dance also has a relationship with the existence of nine shakti forms in Hindu teachings.

4. Umbrella Dance

Payung dance or Payuang dance is a traditional dance typical of Minangkabau. This pair dance originates from West Sumatra and was popular in the 1960s. As the name implies, this dance is performed using an umbrella as the main property and is danced by an even number of dancers.

This traditional dance is a performing dance that has the aim of being a medium of entertainment only. Therefore, the Umbrella dance is usually performed as an opening act at exhibitions, festivals and other important events.

So far, there is no clear historical record of the Payung dance. However, in its development, the Payung dance is closely related to drama and was often performed during the colonial period.

Apart from showing an interesting storyline, the drama in the Payung dance is also complemented by jokes in the dance. The Payung Dance is used as a distraction and complement to drama and storytelling in performances.

When it first appeared, the Payung dance actually did not have standard rules regarding its choreography. However, from 1904 to 1920, Rasyid Manggis did choreography for this dance.

The struggle of Rasyid Manggis was then continued by Siti Agam who eventually developed the Payung dance into a choreographic art with the theme of youth association.

The stories in the Payung dance are usually adapted to the lives of city teenagers who go on holiday to the Tanang River in Bukittinggi.

5. Wireng Dance

The next example of paired dance is a traditional dance originating from Central Java, or to be precise, from the Surakarta Sunanate or the city of Solo. the Beksan Wireng dance is a pair dance that has a historical background in the Sinom pupuh 15-20 in the Javanese cultural book Serat Centhini.

This dance comes from the word beksan which means dance and the word wiring which comes from the combination of the words wira or officer and aeng which means superior soldier so, the Beksan Wireng dance can be interpreted as a dance of superior officers and soldiers.

As explained, that this Wireng dance is in Sinom’s pupuh which tells about the birth of six Wireng dances created in the Jenggala era of Kediri. This dance was created by Lembu Amiluhur or known as the First King of Jenggala with the title Jayanegara.

Jayanegara created the Beksan Wireng dance to teach his son about dexterity when fighting. Jayanegara’s son then ascended the throne and succeeded his father, he then had the title Prabu Suryawisesa.

The creation of the Beksan Wireng dance is also closely related to the founding of the Mangkunegaran Duchy after being separated from the Mataram succession.

6. Karonsih Dance

Karonsih dance is a pair dance that tells about the love and longing felt by Dewi Sekartaji who was left by her husband, Panji Asmara Bangun.

The term karonsih comes from the Javanese language, namely kekaron or sacloron tansah asih, which means both of them love each other. It is said that Panji Asmara Bangun had to leave the palace disguised as an ordinary person.

So that he can know the condition of all the people of the Kingdom of Kediri and the sincerity of love from Dewi Sekartaji. Panji Asmara Bangun’s departure without saying goodbye succeeded in making Dewi Sekartaji confused. He also felt the loss of his soul mate.

The Karonsih dance is usually performed at traditional Javanese wedding ceremonies. After the traditional ceremony with the extended family, the bride and groom along with their parents and pager ayu will be accompanied by the cucuk lampah dancer to go down the aisle.

However, there are also those that feature a male dancer as a character from Panji Asmara Bangun to accompany the bride and groom as a cucuk lampah dancer.

7. Gambyong Dance

Gambyong dance is a dance originating from Surakarta, Central Java. Usually this dance is staged to welcome guests or as a medium of entertainment. Gambyong dance is a traditional dance that has a variety of choreography, such as the Gambyong Pareanom dance and the Gambyong Pangkur dance.

Even though it has many variations, the Gambyong dance has the same basic movement, namely the tledhek or tayub movement.

The Gambyong dance was actually created for a single dancer, but in its development the Gambyong dance is currently being danced by several dancers and even in bulk, by involving several blocking elements on the stage.

The Gambyong dance is mentioned in the Centhini fiber written during the reign of Pakubuwana IV and Pakubuwana V. In the fiber, it is stated that the Gambyong dance is a tledhek dance.

Then, KRMT Wreksadiningrat as a dance director during the reign of Pakubuwana IX worked on this folk dance so that it could be performed for aristocrats and aristocrats. So as a result, the Gambyong dance became more refined and popular.

Nyi Bei Mardusari, an artist and also a concubine from Sri Mangkunegaran, said that at that time, the Gambyong dance had been performed in front of guests in the Mangkunegaran Palace environment.

A big change then occurred in 1950, Nyi Bei Mintoraras, a dance trainer at the Mangkunegaran Palace during the time of Mangkunegaran VIII, made a standardized version of the Gambyong dance and was known as Gambyong Pareanom.

The choreography of the first performance of the Gambyong Pareanom dance was at the wedding of Gusti Nurul, the sister of Mangkunegoro VIII, in 1951. Then this dance was liked by the public, until finally another version emerged.

8. Remo Dance

Remo dance is one of the arts originating from East Java. This traditional dance is a dance that is used to welcome guests and is performed individually or in large groups.

The history of the emergence of the Remo dance in East Java is closely related to the development of Ludruk art in that region. In the past, the Remo dance functioned as the opening act at every ludruk event. Therefore, the Remo dance is also often known as the Ludruk dance.

Remo dance appeared in the 1920s and had a religious nature at the beginning of its development. However, this dance then underwent a shift in function and became a means of entertainment for the community.

Uniquely, because it is the opening dance for Ludruk, the Remo dance is usually performed at night around 21.00 and lasts for one full night. Traditional dances also use musical accompaniment in the form of a slendro gamelan orchestra with gending and songs in the Madurese language.

Those are some examples of typical pair dances from the archipelago. For Sinaumed’s who are interested in learning examples of other pair dances or learning more about dance arts, such as Remo dance, Gambyong dance and others, Sinaumed’s can dig up the information by reading books.

As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia.com provides dance art books for Sinaumed’s. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Don’t hesitate to buy books at sinaumedia because quality is guaranteed!

Supremacy of Law – In a group of people, especially the state, a law is needed.
Law has an important role to regulate society so that it can be orderly, safe, comfortable and
peaceful.

However, sometimes the role of law is not strong, so it still creates gaps in conflict in people’s lives.
Therefore, something is needed that can make the legal position stronger, so that it can achieve a
certain goal such as a more orderly, safe, comfortable and peaceful community life.

One thing that can strengthen the position of law in people’s lives is the rule of law. Where
in this case the legal position is considered to be in the highest position or rank in people’s
lives.

Perhaps you have often heard and know legal terms. However, only a few people know about the
term supremacy of law. No need to be confused if you don’t fully know about the rule of law.
Because, in this article, we will explain what the rule of law is in a more complete and
straightforward manner.

Definition of Law

Before we discuss about the rule of law. It would be better if we also discussed what law is.
Understanding the meaning of law can be the basis or foundation to make it easier to understand
what the rule of law is.

Law is a rule in the form of norms and sanctions made with the aim of regulating every human behavior,
maintaining order, justice and preventing chaos. The law also has the duty to be able to
guarantee that there is legal certainty in people’s lives. Therefore, the public has the right
to a fair defense before the law.

Law can also be interpreted as a written or unwritten rule or decree or provision to regulate life in a community
group and can provide sanctions for people who have violated the law.

Understanding the Supremacy of Law

In a rule of law there are three basic principles that must be applied. The three basic
principles are the rule of law (Supremacy of Law), equality before the law (Equality Before The Law), and
law enforcement in a way that is not against the law (Due Process Of Law).

As quoted from the official website of the Constitutional Court , it is explained that the rule of
law means efforts to enforce and place the law at the highest level. It is hoped that the
proper placement of the law in its place will provide protection to all people without any intervention
or interference from any party, including state administrators.

Therefore, the rule of law cannot only be marked by the existence of established legal rules, but must also
be accompanied by the ability to bind the rule of law. There is also another definition which
means that the rule of law is a form of law enforcement that is fair, independent and free.

Where this principle will be able to give birth to legal certainty which can lead to the birth of a political
culture that will be aware of and obey the law.

Definition of Legal Supremacy According to
Experts

The existence of the rule of law is not only as a protector of society. However, the existence
of the rule of law can also be used to maintain the integrity of this nation. Previously, we
studied together about the meaning of the rule of law in general.

Next, we will study together about the meaning of the rule of law according to experts. There
are several experts who express opinions related to the notion of the rule of law. The
following is an explanation of some of the opinions of experts related to the notion of the rule of
law.

1. Hornby. AS

Hornby.AS explains that the rule of law is the highest authority. If interpreted more broadly,
then the law should be in the highest position and have full power in regulating people’s lives.

2. Soetandyo Wignjosoebroto

Soetandyo Wignjosoebroto explained that the rule of law is an effort that is used to uphold and place the law in
the highest position that can cover all levels of society without intervention from any party, including from
the state administrators themselves.

3. Abdul manan

Abdul Manan explained that in terms of the rule of law, it can be interpreted as an effort or strategy used to
uphold and position the law in the highest position above all else and to make the law a commander or commander
in chief who can protect and maintain the stability of the life of the nation and state.

4. Charles Himawan

Charles Himawan explained that the rule of law is a trick to position the law so that it can function as a
commander or commander in chief.

The Purpose of Legal Supremacy

The existence of the rule of law certainly also has a goal to be achieved. Some of the
objectives of the existence of the rule of law are as follows.

1. Preventing the practice of abuse of power by certain groups.
2. Safeguard the community so that in exercising their rights they do not fall into actions outside the legal
   boundaries.
3. Guarantee individual independence and place it as the basic principle of a social organization.
4. Protecting human dignity and status and guaranteeing order and legal certainty for people’s lives.
   In addition, the rule of law can also guarantee a sense of justice in accordance with the fifth
   precept of Pancasila which reads social justice for all Indonesian people.
5. Maintain and maintain the moral values ​​belonging to the Indonesian nation.
6. Creating a more democratic society and protecting the interests of society itself. For
   example, such as individual rights in the state and society.
7. As one method that can make law enforcement officers able to carry out their duties not only to
   protect and develop individual civil and political rights in a free society. However, it
   can be used to organize and foster social, economic and population and cultural conditions in order to
   realize people’s aspirations as well as to be able to develop the integrity of human resources.

Elements of Upholding the Rule of Law

Basically, the rule of law implies two things, namely to prevent the occurrence of practices of abuse of power
and to protect the community so that they can exercise their rights accordingly and not fall into actions
outside the law.

There are at least four important elements in a rule of law state which can characterize the upholding of
the rule of law itself. Some of these elements are as follows.

1. There is a banquet that the government in exercising power is always carried out on the basis of law and
   statutory regulations.
2. There is a guarantee of legal protection of basic rights.
3. There is a division of state power that is clear, consistent, and fair.
4. There is legal protection from the judiciary against acts of government.

The Principle of the Supremacy of Law

The principle of the supremacy of law is an element of law enforcement that is carried out strictly without
discrimination and obedience to the law is carried out by the community based on their awareness.
The implementation of the principle of supremacy of law can be implemented in the following
steps.

1. The preparation and determination of legislation and public policies must be carried out in a coordinated
   manner, prioritizing all principles of transparency, accountability and protection of human rights or human
   rights.
2. Legislation and public policy must have value content that can support the establishment of the rule
   of law. This will create legal certainty for the business world as well as the
   public.
3. In implementing laws and regulations and public policies, all state administrators must be able to
   carry out their respective duties in a more professional and honest manner. If this can be
   realized well, it will be able to avoid corruption, collusion and nepotism.
4. Sanctions for violations of laws and public policies must be carried out in accordance with the provisions
   that have been enforced.
5. State institutions must be able to ensure the functioning of legal institutions, human resources and
   legal instruments. This is done in order to guarantee the realization of a cleaner state
   administration and in accordance with the principles of the law itself.

The Principle of Upholding the Supremacy of Law

Upholding the rule of law in a country can work with several principles. Some of these
principles are such as the rule of law and constitutional principles. For more details related
to the two principles of upholding the rule of law.

1. Principles of the rule of law

The principle of the rule of law will teach if communication and social interaction consisting of various
elements of the community interact and transact to be able to achieve goals and aspirations together.

The order of life and communication between individuals in a community can refer to the rules of the game
that have been agreed upon and used as a form of reference and reference by many parties in conducting legal
relations and actions and not from parties who feel wronged or tyrannized. With the basis of
this concept, there will be no arbitrariness committed by various parties. Both law enforcers
and justice seekers.

This will be able to give birth to civil society, in which individuals as people or citizens have the same and
equal position before the law.

2. Constitutional Principles

The constitutional principle in a rule of law state will teach that the basis and reference used as a
guideline in society, nation and state is the constitution. So, the rights of citizens and the
human rights of each citizen can be guaranteed, protected and also protected by the constitution.

This principle can be realized by requiring law enforcement to be carried out absolutely by paying for
enforcement measures so that supremacy is not only a symbol.

Definition of the rule of law

After knowing what law and the rule of law is. Next we will study together related to the
notion of a rule of law.

A rule of law or also known as rechtsstaat or the rule of law is a country where every action is carried
out based on rules or in accordance with established laws. If there are individuals whose
actions violate the existing rules, then the individual is entitled to punishment because they are
considered to have violated the law,

In the 19th century, the term rule of law had begun to develop. According to Plato, a rule of
law state is a country that has aspirations to be able to pursue truth, decency, beauty and justice.

Meanwhile, according to Aristotle, the rule of law is a state that stands on a legal basis that can guarantee
justice for all its citizens.

Characteristics of the rule of law

The rule of law also has several characteristics in it. By knowing the characteristics of a
rule of law country, of course you will also more easily understand what a rule of law is.
Below are the characteristics of a rule of law state.

1. Systematic state administration system

The first characteristic of a rule of law state is the existence of a constitutional system that can
systematically regulate the state. Each institution formed will have its own functions and
duties which aim to help run the government in the country. This is done so that it can comply
with the rules that have been previously set.

In Indonesia, it can be seen that there are institutions that have their respective duties, such as the People’s
Representative Council (DPR), the People’s Consultative Assembly (MPR), the Judicial Commission (KY), the
Supreme Court (MA), and institutions in other regions.

2. Law as a Reference in All Fields

The second characteristic of a rule of law country is that the country makes law a reference or benchmark
in various fields or commonly known as the rule of law. The characteristic of this rule of law
state is the form of efforts to establish law in the highest place as a means of protection for society
without any intervention or abuse of law, including from state officials.

3. There is Protection and
Recognition of Human Rights or Human Rights

The third feature of a rule of law state is the protection and recognition of human rights or human rights.
This characteristic of recognizing and protecting human rights is one of the most important
characteristics. Human rights themselves are the most basic and fundamental rights.
As for those who violate human rights will be punished strictly.

4. An impartial
justice system and equality before the law

The fourth feature of a rule of law state is the existence of an impartial justice system.
This judicial system will include judges and prosecutors as well as members of the judicial
administration determined by applicable law.

Apart from only the central court, an independent and impartial justice system also applies to regional
courts. Justice must indeed be carried out in accordance with the law that has been determined
and applied equally. This will create no point of one-sidedness between the people and state
officials.

5. There is a clear division of powers

The next feature of a rule of law state is the existence of a clear division of powers. This
division of power will uphold democratic values. Each institution will have its own duties and
functions where it is hoped that there will be no overlapping.

If there is a problem or conflict, then the competent authority can apply a more appropriate law.
As stated by the famous figure John Locke, if power can be divided into three, namely legislative,
executive and judicial.

6. The existence of Criminal and Civil Courts

Next is the existence of criminal and civil justice. Criminal justice is a court that will
deal with law violations that have involved many people. Meanwhile, the civil court will deal
with law violations involving individuals.

7. There is Legality in the Meaning
of a Law Itself

The last feature of a rule of law state is legality. Legality in law is a fundamental
principle to be able to maintain legal certainty itself. This legality principle will be
established which will then be used to protect all individual interests.

Legality will also provide limits on authority for state officials to be held accountable for their actions when
they violate existing laws.

That is the explanation of the rule of law and the rule of law. The rule of law is so
important because it can place the law in the first ranking position which has the aim of being able to
provide protection to the whole community without any interference from any party including from the state
administrators themselves.

If you want to find books about law, then you can find them at sinaumedia.com .
To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so
that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Paper Structure – When you enter university or equivalent, Sinaumed’s will often be faced
with the task of working on a paper. Depending on the course you are studying and the
supporting lecturer, this assignment could be one of the assignments that you need to do every week.

The problem is, sometimes there are students who don’t know how to write a paper properly. It
could be that they haven’t gotten the knowledge to write papers when they were still in high school
(SMA).

As a result, the papers they wrote turned out to be messy and not in accordance with the criteria for the
course and supporting lecturers. The contents of the paper are unclear, the structure of the
paper is not neat, it does not use proper and correct Indonesian spelling, as well as other problems.

In this article, Sinaumed’s will receive directions regarding how to write a good and correct paper.
This includes the structure of paper tips and tricks for making paper so that you have no trouble
doing this assignment and can produce satisfying paper.

Definition of Paper

However, before going into the discussion of the process of making a paper, it would be nice for Sinaumed’s to
first study the meaning of the paper itself. This is quite important, because a paper is one of
a number of writing assignments that Sinaumed’s can find in college.

Basically, paper is scientific writing that explains a topic based on facts in the field, without
containing opinions in it. Authors are asked to do research and ensure that the data and facts
in it are genuine and true.

Even so, the content of the discussion of the paper itself is not that deep. Papers are
generally only in the form of summaries of other scientific writings which are also often part of
coursework, namely term papers. Often students, especially at the initial level, are confused
between working on papers and term papers.

This is because both of them have a processing process that is similar to one another. Because
they are scientific papers, both require research and proof of accurate data and facts. The
structure of papers and papers is also quite similar, so it can be easily confused if you don’t understand
in detail.

Papers and essays are also not scientific writing that Sinaumed’s will find when in college.
There are also scientific papers called essays, which are often given by lecturers in charge of a
subject as an assignment for them. For those who are unfamiliar with these types of scientific
work, it is not impossible to distinguish one from another.

Therefore, we will discuss a little about the differences between papers and essays, with the aim that
Sinaumed’s can understand the basic differences between the three scientific papers. Here’s the
presentation:

• Paper: Scientific writing that discusses a particular topic. Writers need research on
  theories, data and facts, so that the contents of scientific writing are accurate.
• Paper: In the form of scientific writing which is also based on theory, data and facts, but the
  contents are more concise. It can be a summary of research such as a paper.
• Essay: Contains writing on a particular topic, which also requires research in it.
  Authors can add personal opinions, so writing is generally subjective.

Paper structure

Every writing, be it fiction, non-fiction, or scientific writing, has its own structure that distinguishes
them from one another. The existence of this writing structure certainly also applies to
papers, which fall into the category of scientific writing.

It was said earlier that papers have a similar structure to papers, which makes it difficult for many
people, especially freshman students, to distinguish between the two scientific papers. Even
so, there are specific things that can be a reference for Sinaumed’s to distinguish between papers and
papers.

This time, we will discuss the paper structure one by one. Generally, papers have a structure
starting from the title, introduction, contents, closing, and ending with a bibliography. The
following is a more detailed explanation of the paper structure:

1. Title

This part is probably the most familiar part for Sinaumed’s. Of course, remembering that every
article needs to have a title so that readers get an idea of ​​the contents of the writing they are reading.
And in this section, the paper has a lot in common with other scientific writings.

A good paper title contains the research topic, period, and has a short, concise and clear structure.
On the title page, generally students are also required to include the institution’s logo, as well
as student data such as faculties, majors, study programs, classes, and of course, student identification
numbers (NIM).

2. Abstract

This section is actually not a part that is often or required to be found in papers. This is
because each agency has its own policy in making paper. Some of them require an abstract, while
others do not.

If Sinaumed’s comes from an agency that asks you to write an abstract in a paper, you can write a short,
concise and clear summary of your paper. Usually, the word count of an abstract is no more than
300, or about half to one page.

3. Introduction

In the introductory chapter, students are asked to explain the reasons why they took the topic as research
paper material. Usually, students are asked to include theories from experts as main ideas and
as supporting backgrounds.

The page count of the introductory chapter for papers normally ranges from 2 to 3 pages. Even
so, there are also agencies that allow students to write the number of pages of the introductory chapter
more or less than the number of pages in general, according to needs and policies.

4. Fill

The contents section can be said to be the most important part of the paper. In this chapter,
students explain in detail what research results they got for this paper. The number of pages
of the contents chapter should be the largest number of pages for the paper.

The results of this study are of course also supported by the theories previously written in the
introductory chapter. Make sure that the data, theory, and facts listed in the contents of the
chapter are true and not fabricated, because this could affect the final result.

5. Cover

In the concluding chapter, Sinaumed’s writes the conclusions of the paper’s research. If
necessary, you can also add suggestions or criticisms regarding the research you are doing. The
length of the cover page is usually around one sheet or a maximum of two sheets.

The closing chapter is usually a chapter that is quite underestimated and neglected, because writers want
to quickly finish their paper. In fact, this section is also important because it summarizes
the contents of the discussion as a whole. The difference between conclusions and research can
cause confusion, and bring the paper into question.

6. Bibliography

The bibliography is the part that contains references, readings or references that someone uses to write
scientific papers such as papers. Generally, the bibliography itself consists of books or
journals containing theories that the author quotes and uses to support the research content.

It’s quite rare for someone to use a website from the internet as a reference, because what they find
is not necessarily true. Even so, sometimes it is also permitted for authors to quote from
the internet , provided that the website is an official
website that can be verified.

Tips and Tricks in Writing Papers

Writing a paper, if you don’t have experience, especially in scientific writing, can be quite difficult.
Students are often faced with situations where they are confused about prioritizing something, so
that their writing system becomes a mess.

Even someone who has often written does not necessarily have the ability to master writing scientific
papers. This is due to differences in structure and mindset. It takes time for
someone before they get used to writing scientific papers.

To make it easier for Sinaumed’s who are not used to writing papers or other scientific writing, there are a number
of tips and tricks that you can follow so that you can quickly master doing this assignment and be able to write
papers or other scientific writing properly and correctly.

1. Don’t Delay. Quickly Collect
Intentions

This actually also applies to other college assignments or even assignments in high school.
The quicker you start, the easier it will be for you to do this task. And this
certainly applies to working on paper.

For some negative things if you often delay paperwork. Starting from mistakes in finding data,
facts, and theories, mistakes in writing words, forgetting to include something, to various other mistakes
that shouldn’t have happened if you started sooner.

2. Understand the Topic and Keep It in Your Head

Each paper must have its own topic and theme. Students are advised to first understand the
topic and theme of the paper, before they finally start writing it. This is done so that the
contents of the paper discussion do not deviate from the topic or theme that should be.

Sinaumed’s can do research on the topics or themes that you will write about later. And for sure,
don’t forget the topic or theme. Make sure that the paper you write is in accordance with the
request of the lecturer in charge of the course.

3. Install Writing Slowly

Another benefit that students can get if they write papers faster is that you can work on them slowly.
With this, you can minimize errors that can occur if someone chooses to write a paper close to the
submission deadline.

Not only that, Sinaumed’s can also work on papers in a systematic and tidy manner. Basically, you
guys have more time to do research. You can write and structure, find data better, and double
check because you still have enough time.

4. Make sure the data, facts and theories are
correct

This is one of the important tips when working on paper. Even in a handful of books, the
content may not be in accordance with the theory it should be. Even though it’s rare, this is
the reason why students must always ensure the truth of the facts, data, and theories in the paper.

Especially for those who want to use quotes from the web on the internet, where all kinds of
information, both true and false, are milling about. You have to make sure that the writer
is someone who can be trusted, and writes on a trusted website too, so that certainty is
guaranteed.

5. Don’t Forget to Cross Check Again

And finally, if Sinaumed’s has finished your paper, don’t be lazy to cross check the assignment.
Because, it is possible for you to find errors of any kind in this scientific writing that you
were not aware of before.

Again this is an advantage for people who decide to start working on paper early. Those who
work on this assignment close to the submission deadline generally do not have time to cross
check , so their paper is more likely to have errors of any kind.

Lecture Assignments Other Than
Papers Often Found by Students

Of course, apart from papers, students will still be faced with various other assignments as long as they
carry out this level of education. These assignments usually vary from one student to another,
and cannot be generalized.

This is because students have study backgrounds that are not necessarily the same as other students.
Students who have the same study program as their friends do not necessarily get the same
assignments in one subject, because of differences in supporting lecturers.

Even so, there are at least 5 types of assignments that Sinaumed’s can find when running lectures.
Hopefully after knowing these assignments, you will be better able to prepare yourself when you get
this assignment in one course.

1. Practicum

Practicum assignments are indeed synonymous with students who are in majors smelling of Natural Sciences
(IPA) such as the Department of Biology, the Department of Chemistry, and the Department of Physics.
Students will be directed to do research in the laboratory to test a component and ensure its
correctness.

2. Presentation

Presentation assignments do not recognize majors, study programs, or courses. Every student at
some point will be asked to explain a topic in front of the class and in front of the supporting lecturers,
generally using the PowerPoint (PPT) application.

3. Field Observations

Field observation assignments usually involve students working directly in their chosen field.
Again, almost every student in various majors will get this assignment, so they can understand
their work later after graduating from university.

4. Journal Or Book Review

The task of reviewing journals or books, although it sounds specific to students of the Faculty of Letters,
in fact can also be found in other faculties such as the Faculty of Medicine, Faculty of Social and
Political Sciences (FISIP), to the Faculty of Psychology. The purpose of this review is to
deepen students’ knowledge of their field of study.

5. Project

Project assignments mean group assignments to make something, be it a product or an idea, so that it can
also be found in various departments and faculties. Project assignments can also be in the form
of other tasks that have previously been discussed, but are done in groups.

Enough articles that discuss the topic of paper, starting from the definition of paper, paper structure,
and also tips and tricks for writing a paper. Hopefully, Sinaumed’s will be helped in
understanding scientific papers more deeply, and won’t find it difficult to do this assignment.

There are a number of book recommendations regarding paper structure as well as paper writing and course
assignments that Sinaumed’s can read to add insight.